0% found this document useful (0 votes)
434 views258 pages

Madanapalle Institute of Technology & Science

Uploaded by

Ravikanth Nss
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
434 views258 pages

Madanapalle Institute of Technology & Science

Uploaded by

Ravikanth Nss
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 258

Dept.

of Mechanical Engineering

MADANAPALLE INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE


MADANAPALLE
(UGC-AUTONOMOUS)
www.mits.ac.in

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Course structure
AND
Detailed SYLLABI
For the students admitted to

B. Tech. Regular Four Year Degree Programme from the academic year 2018-19

and

B. Tech. Lateral Entry Scheme from the academic year 2019-20

B.TECH. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

Page 1 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

MADANAPALLE INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE,


MADANAPALLE

B. Tech Four Year Curriculum Structure


Branch: MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Total Credits: 160 (4 Year Course)

I. Induction Program and Holistic Development Activities

Sl. No. Title Duration

Three weeks duration at the


1 Induction Program
start of First Year
(Mandatory)
(Refer Annexure - I)

Holistic Development Activities Three hours per week


2
(Every Student from Semester 2 – 8 should (Activity list is enclosed in
register for at least one activity) Annexure - I)
Virtual Laboratory
3 (Students are encouraged to choose and register As specified by
for any of the Virtual laboratories he /she is the Virtual Laboratory
interested)

Page 2 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

II. Semester-wise Structure of Curriculum

(L = Lecture, T = Tutorial, P = Practical, C = Credit)

I Year I Semester

Hours Per Week


Sl. Course
Category Course Title Total Credits
No. Code
L T P Contact
Hours
Basic
1 Science 18MAT101 Engineering Calculus 3 1 0 4 4
Course
Basic Engineering Physics
2 Science 18PHY101 3 1 0 4 4
Course
Engineering Basic Electrical
3 Science 18EEE101 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
Course
Engineering Programming for
4 Science 18CSE101 Problem Solving 2 0 2 4 3
Course (Python)
Basic
5 Science 18PHY201 Physics Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
Course
Engineering Electrical Engineering
6 Science 18EEE201 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
Course

Total 11 2 8 21 17

Page 3 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

I Year II Semester

Hours Per Week


Sl. Course
Category Course Title Total Credits
No. Code
L T P Contact
Hours
Humanities
and Social
Professional
1 Sciences 18ENG101 2 0 2 4 3
English
including
Management
Basic Linear Algebra,
Science Complex
Course Variables and
2 18MAT107 3 1 0 4 4
Ordinary
Differential
Equations
Basic Engineering
3 Science 18CHE101 3 0 0 3 3
Chemistry
Course
Engineering C Programming
4 Science 18CSE102 and Data 3 0 0 3 3
Course Structures
Engineering
Engineering
5 Science 18ME101 2 0 3 5 3.5
Graphics
Course
Basic Chemistry
6 Science 18CHE201 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
Course
Engineering C Programming
Science and Data
7 18CSE201 0 0 3 3 1.5
Course Structures
Laboratory
Engineering Workshop
8 Science 18ME201 0 0 3 3 1.5
Practice
Course

Total 13 1 14 28 21

Page 4 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

II Year I Semester

Hours Per Week


Sl. Course
Category Course Title Total Credits
No. Code
L T P Contact
Hours
Humanities,
Social
Principles of
1 Sciences 18HUM102 3 0 0 3 3
Management
including
Management
Basic Partial Differential
Science Equations and
2 Course 18MAT108 3 1 0 4 4
Probability &
Statistics
Engineering
Engineering
3 Science 18ME102 2 1 0 3 3
Mechanics
Course
Professional Basic
4 18ME103 2 1 0 3 3
Core Course Thermodynamics
Professional Materials Science
5 18ME104 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course and Engineering
Humanities, English
Social Communication –
6 Sciences 18ENG201 Listening & 0 0 3 3 1.5
including Speaking
Management Laboratory
Professional Materials Science
7 Core Course 18ME202 and Engineering 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
Professional 3-D Modelling
8 18ME203 0 0 3 3 1.5
Core Course Laboratory
Mandatory Mandatory Course
9 non-credit – I (Refer Annexure – 2 0 0 2 0
Course V)

Total 15 3 9 27 20.5

Page 5 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

II Year II Semester

Hours Per Week


Sl. Course
Category Course Title Total Credits
No. Code
L T P Contact
Hours
Humanities, Economics and
Social Financial
1 Sciences 18HUM101 Accounting for 3 0 0 3 3
including Engineers
Management
Basic
Life Sciences for
2 Science 18BIO101 3 0 0 3 3
Engineers
Course
Professional Mechanics of
3 18ME105 2 1 0 3 3
Core Course Solids
Professional Manufacturing
4 18ME106 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course Process
Professional Theory of
5 18ME107 2 1 0 3 3
Core Course Machines
Professional Fluid Mechanics
6 Core Course 18ME108 & Hydraulic 2 1 0 3 3
Machinery
Professional Mechanics of
7 18ME204 0 0 3 3 1.5
Core Course Solids Laboratory
Professional Dynamics &
Core Course Electrical
8 18ME205 0 0 3 3 1.5
Machines
Laboratory
Professional Manufacturing
9 Core Course 18ME206 Process 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
Mandatory Mandatory
10 non-credit Course – II 2 0 0 2 0
Course (Refer Annexure –V)

Total 17 3 9 29 22.5

Summer Internship

Page 6 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

III Year I Semester

Hours Per Week


Sl. Course
Category Course Title Total Credits
No. Code
L T P Contact
Hours
Engineering 18ME109
Engineering
1 Science 2 0 2 4 3
Analysis
Course
Professional Design of Machine
2 18ME110 2 1 0 3 3
Core Course Elements
Professional Manufacturing
3 18ME111 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course Technology
Professional
4 18ME112 Heat Transfer 2 1 0 3 3
Core Course
Professional Discipline Elective
5 Elective –I 3 0 0 3 3
Course (Refer Annexure –III)
Open
Open Elective – I
6 Elective 3 0 0 3 3
(Refer Annexure –II)
Course
Humanities,
Corporate
Social
Communication
7 Sciences 18ENG202 0 0 2 2 1
Laboratory
including
Management
Professional Fluid Mechanics
Core Course and Hydraulic
8 18ME207 0 0 3 3 1.5
Machines
Laboratory
Professional Manufacturing
9 Core Course 18ME208 Technology 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
Mandatory Mandatory Course
10 non-credit – III 2 0 0 2 0
Course (Refer Annexure –V)

Total 17 2 10 29 22

Page 7 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

III Year II Semester

Hours Per Week


Sl. Course
Category Course Title Total Credits
No. Code
L T P Contact
Hours
Humanities, 18ENG102
English
Social
Communication -
1 Sciences 2 0 0 2 2
Reading and Writing
including
Management
Professional
2 18ME113 CAD/ CAM 3 0 0 3 3
Core Course
Professional 18ME114
3 Thermal Engineering 2 1 0 3 3
Core Course
Professional
Discipline Elective-II
4 Elective 3 0 0 3 3
(Refer Annexure –III)
Course
Professional
Discipline Elective-III
5 Elective 3 0 0 3 3
(Refer Annexure –III)
Course
Open
Open Elective – II
6 Elective 3 0 0 3 3
(Refer Annexure –II)
Course
Professional Advanced
7 Core Course 18ME209 Manufacturing 0 0 3 3 1.5
Laboratory
Professional 18ME210
8 Robotics Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
Core Course
Professional Virtual Laboratory*
9 0 0 2 2 0
Core Course (Refer Annexure - IV)
Mandatory
Mandatory Course – IV
10 non-credit 2 0 0 2 0
(Refer Annexure –V)
Course

Total 18 1 8 27 20

Summer Internship

*Only for Self Learning and not for Assessment

Page 8 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

TENTATIVE CURRICULUM STRUCTURE FOR IV YEAR

IV Year I Semester

Hours Per Week


Sl. Course
Category Course Title Total Credits
No. Code
L T P Contact
Hours
Professional 18ME115 Engineering Metrology
1 Core 3 0 0 3 3
and Measurements
Course
Professional 18ME116 Machine Learning for
2 Core Mechanical 2 0 2 4 3
Course Engineering
Professional
Discipline Elective-IV
3 Elective 3 0 0 3 3
(Refer Annexure –III)
Course
Professional
Discipline Elective-V
4 Elective 3 0 0 3 3
(Refer Annexure –III)
Course
Open
Open Elective -III
5 Elective 3 0 0 3 3
(Refer Annexure –II)
Course
Professional 18ME211
Thermal Engineering
6 Core 0 0 2 2 1
Laboratory
Course
Professional 18ME212
Mechatronics and
7 Core 0 0 2 2 1
Metrology Laboratory
Course

8 PROJ-ME 18ME701
Project Work – I 0 0 4 4 2

Total 14 0 10 24 19

Page 9 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

IV Year II Semester

Hours Per Week


Sl. Course
Category Course Title Total Credits
No. Code
L T P Contact
Hours
Professional
Discipline Elective-VI
1 Elective 3 0 0 3 3
(Refer Annexure –III)
Course
Open
Open Elective IV
2 Elective 3 0 0 3 3
(Refer Annexure –II)
Course

3 PROJ-ME 18ME702 Project Work - II 0 0 24 24 12

Total 6 0 24 30 18

Page 10 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

ANNEXURE - I

THREE WEEK MANDATORY INDUCTION PROGRAMME

 Yoga and Meditation


 Sports and Games
 NSS
 NCC
 MITS Social Responsibility Club
 Management module
 Design Thinking
 Spoken and Written Communication

 Proficiency modules

 Basic Computer Proficiency


 Interpersonal skills
 Computer Graphics
 Web programming
 Mobile Apps
 Vocabulary enhancement

HOLISTIC DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES


Description of Activities

1. Physical and Health


2. Culture
3. Literature and Media
4. Social Service
5. Self-Development
6. Nature and Environment
7. Innovation

Page 11 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

ANNEXURE – II

OPEN ELECTIVE – I
(To be offered under MOOC’s Category from SWAYAM – NPTEL)

Sl. Course Offered by


Course Code Course Title
No. Department of
Soft Skills
1 18ENG3M01 English & Training
Developing Soft Skills and Personality
2 18ENG3M02 English & Training
Soft Skill Development
3 18ENG3M03 English & Training
Project Management for Managers
4 18HUM3M01 Humanities
Ethics in Engineering Practice
5 18HUM3M02 Humanities
Integrated Waste Management for Smart City
6 18CE3M01 Civil
Soil and Water Conservation Engineering
7 18CE3M02 Civil

8 18CE3M03 Engineering Geology Civil


Non-Conventional Energy Sources
9 18EEE3M01 EEE
Design of Photovoltaic Systems
10 18EEE3M02 EEE
Semiconductor Opto-Electronics
11 18ECE3M01 ECE
Digital VLSI Testing
12 18ECE3M02 ECE
Social Networks
13 18CSE3M01 CSE
Privacy and Security in Online Social Media
14 18CSE3M02 CSE

Any new Interdisciplinary Course offered by SWAYAM NPTEL can be appended in future.

Page 12 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

OPEN ELECTIVE – II
(To be offered under Conventional Mode)

Sl. Course Offered by


Course Code Course Title
No. Department of
18MAT301 Advanced Numerical Methods Mathematics
1

2 18MAT302 Engineering Optimization Mathematics

3 18PHY301 Optical Physics and its Applications Physics

LASER Physics and Advanced LASER


4 18PHY302 Physics
Technology

5 18CHE301 Introduction to Petroleum Industry Chemistry

Green Chemistry and Catalysis for


6 18CHE302 Chemistry
Sustainable Environment

18HUM301 Intellectual Property Rights Humanities


7

8 18HUM302 Human Resource Development Humanities

9 18CE301 Ground Improvement Techniques Civil

10 18CE302 Environmental Impact Assessment Civil

18CE303 Watershed Management Civil


11

12 18EEE301 Industrial Electrical Systems EEE

13 18EEE302 Introduction to MEMS EEE

14 18ECE301 Bio-Medical Electronics ECE

18ECE302 VLSI Design ECE


15

16 18CSE301 Operating Systems CSE

17 18CSE302 E-Learning Technologies CSE

18CSE303 AI Tools, Techniques and Applications CSE


18

Page 13 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

OPEN ELECTIVE – III

(To be offered under MOOC’s Category from SWAYAM – NPTEL)

Sl. Course Offered by


Course Code Course Title
No. Department of

1 18ENG3M04 Speaking Effectively English

2 18CE3M04 Remote Sensing and GIS Civil

18CE3M05 Waste Water Treatment and Recycling


3 Civil

4 18EEE3M03 Introduction to Smart Grid EEE

5 18ECE3M03 Introduction to Embedded Systems ECE

6 18ECE3M04 Embedded System Design with ARM ECE

7 18ECE3M05 Advanced Computer Architecture ECE

8 18CSE3M03 Human Computer Interactions CSE

9 18CSE3M04 Programming in JAVA CSE

10 18CSE3M05 Introduction to Internet of Things CSE

11 18IE3M01 Introduction to Research General

Any new Interdisciplinary Course offered by SWAYAM NPTEL can be appended in future

Page 14 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

OPEN ELECTIVE – IV

(To be offered under Conventional Mode)


Sl. Course Offered by
Course Code Course Title
No. Department of
1 18ENG301 Creative Writing English

2 18HUM303 Entrepreneurship Development Humanities

3 18MAT303 Graph Theory Mathematics


Mathematical Modeling and Numerical
4 18MAT304 Mathematics
Simulation
5 18PHY303 Thin Film Technology and its Applications Physics
Introduction to Nano Science and
6 18CHE303 Chemistry
Technology
Computational Methods in Materials Science
7 18CHE304 Chemistry
and Engineering
8 18CE304 Green Building and Energy Conservation Civil
9 18CE305 Environmental Engineering Civil
10 18EEE303 Robotics EEE
11 18EEE304 Electrical Safety EEE
12 18ECE303 Nano Electronics ECE
13 18ECE304 Wireless Sensor Networks ECE
14 18CSE304 Mobile Application Development CSE
15 18CSE305 Software Project Management CSE
16 18CSE306 Software Testing CSE

Page 15 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

ANNEXURE – III

List of Discipline Electives

Discipline Elective – I

Sl. No. Course Code Course Title

1. 18ME401 Production Planning and Control


2. 18ME402 Computational Fluid Dynamics
3. 18ME403 Tool and Die Design
4. 18ME404 Fluid Power Systems
5. 18ME405 Finite Element Methods
6. 18ME426 Design Thinking and Product Innovation
Any advanced courses can be appended in future.

Discipline Elective – II

(To be offered under MOOC’s category from SWAYAM NPTEL)

Sl. No. Course Code Course Title

1. 18ME4M01 Experimental Stress Analysis


2. 18ME4M02 System Design for Sustainability
3. 18ME4M03 Material Characterization
4. 18ME4M04 Design and Analysis of Experiments
5. 18ME4M05 Industrial Safety Engineering
6. 18ME4M06 Non-Conventional Energy Resources
Any other new Disciplinary Course which doesn’t exist in the Curriculum can be
appended in future.

Discipline Elective – III

Sl. No. Course Code Course Title

1. 18ME406 Design and Analysis of Welded Structures


2. 18ME407 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
3. 18ME408 Internet of Manufacturing Things
4. 18ME409 Solar Energy for Process Heat and Power Generation
5. 18ME410 Industrial Corrosion and Tribology
Any advanced courses can be appended in future.
Discipline Elective – IV

Page 16 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Sl. No. Course Code Course Title

1. 18ME411 Industrial and Automobile Battery Technologies


2. 18ME412 Design of Pressure Vessels and Piping Systems
3. 18ME413 Design of Heat Exchangers
4. 18ME414 Non Destructive Testing
5. 18ME415 Total Quality Management
Any advanced courses can be appended in future.

Discipline Elective – V

Sl. No. Course Code Course Title

1. 18ME416 Mechanical Vibrations


2. 18ME417 Design of Gas Turbine Engines
3. 18ME418 Manufacturing of Composite Materials
4. 18ME419 Design of Power Plant Systems
5. 18ME420 Operations Research
Any advanced courses can be appended in future.

Discipline Elective – VI

Sl. No. Course Code Course Title

1. 18ME421 Robotics
2. 18ME422 Fundamentals of Automobile Engineering
3. 18ME423 Additive Manufacturing
4. 18ME424 Energy Auditing
5. 18ME425 Entrepreneurship
Any advanced courses can be appended in future.

Page 17 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

ANNEXURE - IV

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING - VIRTUAL LABS

Sl. Course Course Title


No. Code
1. 18ME213 Vibration and Acoustics Laboratory
2. 18ME214 Laser Based Flow Diagnostics Laboratory
3. 18ME215 Micromachining Laboratory
4. 18ME216 Nano-Composite, Fabrication and Biomaterials Laboratory and
Signal Processing Laboratory
5. 18ME217 Material Response to Micro-structural, Mechanical, Thermal and
Biological Stimuli Laboratory
6. 18ME218 Virtual Labs for Mechanical Vibrations Laboratory
7. 18ME219 Machine Dynamics & Vibration Laboratory
8. 18ME220 Virtual Combustion and Atomization Laboratory

Page 18 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

ANNEXURE - V

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING –MANDATORY COURSES

Sl. No. Course Code Course Title


1 18CHE901 Environmental Sciences
2 18HUM902 Indian Constitution
3 18HUM903 Essence of Indian Traditional Knowledge
4 18CE904 Disaster Management

Page 19 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

ANNEXURE VI

Honors in Mechanical Engineering

Hours Per Week


SI. No Category Course Code Course Title Total Credits
L T P Contact
Hours
III Year I Semester

Advanced Welding
1 18HDME101 3 0 0 3 3
Professional
Technology
Elective
Course Advanced Optimization
2 18HDME102 3 0 0 3 3
(Choose any Techniques
two from
three courses)
3 18HDME103 Combustion and Emissions 3 0 0 3 3

Sub Total 6 0 0 6 6
III Year II Semester

4 18HDME104 Ergonomics 3 0 0 3 3
Professional
Elective
5 Course 18HDME105 Gas Dynamics 3 0 0 3 3
(Choose any
two from
three courses)
6 18HDME106 Fracture Mechanics 3 0 0 3 3

Sub Total 6 0 0 6 6
IV Year I Semester

7 18HDME107 Powder Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 3


Professional
Elective
8 Course 18HDME108 Advanced Fluid Mechanics 3 0 0 3 3
(Choose any
one from
three courses)
Modeling of SI and CI
9 18HDME109 3 0 0 3 3
Engines

10 Project 18HDME701 Mini Project 0 0 10 10 5

Sub Total 3 0 10 13 8
Total 15 0 10 25 20
ANNEXURE VII

Page 20 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Minors in Mechanical Engineering


(Applicable to CE, EEE, ECE, CSE, CST & CSIT)

Stream Name: Electric Vehicles


Hours Per Week
SI. No Category Course Code Course Title Total Credits
L T P Contact
Hours
III Year I Semester
Professional
Core Fundamentals of
1 18MDME101 3 0 0 3 3
Course Automotive Engineering

Professional
Fundamentals of Electrical
2 Core 18MDME102 3 0 0 3 3
Vehicles
Course

III Year II Semester

Professional
Production Technology of
3 Core 18MDME103 3 0 0 3 3
Automobile Components
Course

Professional
Battery Management
4 Core 18MDME104 3 0 0 3 3
Systems
Course

Professional
5 Core 18MDME201 Electric Vehicles Laboratory 0 0 4 4 2
Course

IV Year I Semester

Professional
6 Core 18MDME105 Vehicle Body Engineering 3 0 0 3 3
Course

7 Project 18MDME701 Mini Project 0 0 6 6 3

Total 15 0 10 25 20

Page 21 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Minors in Mechanical Engineering


(Applicable to CE, EEE, ECE, CSE, CST & CSIT)

Stream Name: Digital Manufacturing


Hours Per Week
SI. No Category Course Code Course Title Total Credits
L T P Contact
Hours
III Year I Semester

Professional
Computer Aided
1 Core 18MDME106 3 0 0 3 3
Manufacturing Process
Course

Professional
Product Design and
2 Core 18MDME107 3 0 0 3 3
Development
Course

III Year II Semester

Professional
Digital Manufacturing
3 Core 18MDME108 3 0 0 3 3
Planning and Control
Course

Professional
Big Data Analytics for
4 Core 18MDME109 3 0 0 3 3
Manufacturing
Course

Professional
Computer Aided Design and
5 Core 18MDME202 0 0 4 4 2
Manufacturing Laboratory
Course

IV Year I Semester

Professional
Smart Sensors and Industry
6 Core 18MDME110 3 0 0 3 3
4.0
Course

7 Project 18MDME701 Mini Project 0 0 6 6 3

Total 15 0 10 25 20

Page 22 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Minors in Mechanical Engineering


(Applicable to CE, EEE, ECE, CSE, CST & CSIT)

Stream Name: Mechatronics


Hours Per Week
SI. No Category Course Code Course Title Total Credits
L T P Contact
Hours
III Year I Semester

Professional
Engineering Statics and
1 Core 18MDME111 2 1 0 3 3
Applied Mechanics
Course

Professional
2 Core 18MDME112 Fluid Power Systems 3 0 0 3 3
Course

III Year II Semester

Professional
3 Core 18MDME113 Industrial Automation 3 0 0 3 3
Course

Professional
4 Core 18MDME114 Robotics and Control 3 0 0 3 3
Course

Professional
5 Core 18MDME203 Mechatronics Laboratory 0 0 4 4 2
Course

IV Year I Semester

Professional
6 Core 18MDME115 Mechatronics 3 0 0 3 3
Course

7 Project 18MDME701 Mini Project 0 0 6 6 3

Total 14 1 10 25 20

Page 23 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Minors in Mechanical Engineering


(Applicable to CE, EEE, ECE, CSE, CST & CSIT)

Stream Name: Nanotechnology


Hours Per Week
SI. No Category Course Code Course Title Total Credits
L T P Contact
Hours
III Year I Semester

Profession
Elements of Nanoscience
1 al Core 18MDME116 3 0 0 3 3
and Nanotechnology
Course

Profession
Fundamentals of Solid-State
2 al Core 18MDME117 3 0 0 3 3
Engineering
Course

III Year II Semester

Profession
Quantum Mechanics for
3 al Core 18MDME118 3 0 0 3 3
Nanotechnology
Course

Profession
4 al Core 18MDME119 Micro and Nanofabrication 3 0 0 3 3
Course

Profession
Micro and Nanofabrication
5 al Core 18MDME204 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
Course

IV Year I Semester

Profession
6 al Core 18MDME120 Industrial Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 3
Course

7 Project 18MDME701 Mini Project 0 0 6 6 3

Total 15 0 10 25 20

Page 24 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Minors in Mechanical Engineering


(Applicable to EEE, ECE, CSE, CST & CSIT)

Stream Name: Energy Engineering


Hours Per Week
SI. No Category Course Code Course Title Total Credits
L T P Contact
Hours
III Year I Semester

Professional
Fluid Mechanics and
1 Core 18MDME121 2 1 0 3 3
Hydraulic Machinery
Course

Professional
2 Core 18MDME122 Applied Thermodynamics 2 1 0 3 3
Course

III Year II Semester

Professional
3 Core 18MDME123 Heat Transfer 2 1 0 3 3
Course

Professional
Computational Fluid
4 Core 18MDME124 2 1 0 3 3
Dynamics
Course

Professional
Thermal Engineering
5 Core 18MDME205 0 0 4 4 2
Laboratory
Course

IV Year I Semester

Professional
Design of Gas Turbine
6 Core 18MDME125 2 1 0 3 3
Engines
Course

7 Project 18MDME701 Mini Project 0 0 6 6 3

Total 10 5 10 25 20

Page 25 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Minors in Mechanical Engineering


(Applicable to CE, EEE, ECE, CSE, CST & CSIT)

Stream Name: Engineering Entrepreneurship


Hours Per Week
SI. No Category Course Code Course Title Total Credits
L T P Contact
Hours
III Year I Semester

Profession
Technology
1 al Core 18MDME126 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurship
Course

Profession
Small Business
2 al Core 18MDME127 3 0 0 3 3
Development
Course

III Year II Semester

Profession
Costing and Accounting for
3 al Core 18MDME128 3 0 0 3 3
Entrepreneurs
Course

Profession
Engineering Business Plan
4 al Core 18MDME129 3 0 0 3 3
Development
Course

Profession
Process Planning & Cost
5 al Core 18MDME206 0 0 4 4 2
Estimation Lab
Course

IV Year I Semester

Profession
6 al Core 18MDME130 Patents & IPR 3 0 0 3 3
Course

7 Project 18MDME701 Mini Project 0 0 6 6 3

Total 15 0 10 25 20

Page 26 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester

Page 27 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester

18MAT101 ENGINEERING CALCULUS

L T P C
3 1 0 4
Course Prerequisite: Mathematics at Intermediate or Equivalent Level
Course Description
The course introduces the concepts of single variable and multivariable calculus with the view of
its applications in various engineering fields. It prepares the students to develop various methods
of finding derivatives and integrals; understanding of concepts related to continuous functions
and enrich their experience in critical analysis.

Course Objectives
1. To introduce the basic concepts of definite integrals and its applications, Beta and Gamma
functions,
2. To acquire knowledge on mean value theorems in calculus.
3. To illustrate various techniques of testing the convergence of infinite series and introduces
the functions of sine and cosine series.
4. To familiarize the knowledge of limit, continuity and derivatives, extreme values in
multivariable.
5. To emphasize the role of Double and Triple integrals in dealing with area and volume of the
regions.

UNIT I:INTEGRALCALCULUS
Definite integrals; Applications of definite integrals to evaluate area and length of curves, surface
areas and volumes of revolutions; Beta and Gamma functions and their properties
(12)

UNIT II: DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS


Rolle’s theorem ,Mean value theorems, Taylor’s and Maclaurin theorems with remainders
(without proofs);indeterminate forms, Maxima and minima. (12)

UNIT III: SEQUENCE AND SERIES


Sequence and Series, their Convergence and tests for convergence; Power series, Taylor's series,
series for exponential, trigonometric and logarithmic functions; Fourier series: Half rangesine and
cosine series, Parseval’s theorem. (12)

UNITIV:MULTIVARIABLE DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS


Limit, continuity and partial derivatives, directional derivatives, total derivative; Tangent plane
and normal line; Maxima, minima and saddle points; Method of Lagrange multipliers.
(12)

UNITV: MULTIVARIABLE INTEGRAL CALCULUS


Multiple Integration: Double integrals (Cartesian and polar), change of order of integration in
double integrals, Change of variables (Cartesian to polar),Applications: areas and volumes
(double integration); triple integrals, curl and divergence, Green’s, Stokes and Gauss divergence
theorems (without proofs). (12

Page 28 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, the students should be able to
1. Evaluate the definite integrals, Beta and Gamma functions and calculate length of curve and
underlying area.
2. Relate the results of mean value theorems in calculus to Engineering problems.
3. Use the power series and Fourier series for ascertaining the stability and convergence of
various techniques.
4. Apply the functions of several variables to evaluate the rates of change with respect to time
and space variables in engineering.
5. Compute the area and volume by interlinking them to appropriate double and triple integrals.

Text Books
1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 42th Edition, 2012.
2. G. B. Thomas, Maurice D. Weir, Joel Hass, Frank R. Giordano, Thomas’ Calculus Pearson
education 11th Edition, 2004.

Reference Books
1. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, Calculus and Analytic geometry, 9th Edition, Pearson, Reprint,
2002.
2. Erwin kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2006.
3. Veerarajan T., Engineering Mathematics for first year, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill New Delhi, 11th Reprint,
2010.
5. D. Poole, Linear Algebra: A Modern Introduction, 2nd Edition, Brooks/Cole, 2005.
6. N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics, Laxmi Publications,
Reprint, 2008.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 29 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester

18PHY101 ENGINEERING PHYSICS


L T P C
3 1 0 4
Course Prerequisite:Plus two level physics course

Course Description: Engineering Physics for Civil and Mechanical Engineersis a physics
course which provides fundamental knowledge to understand the concepts of mechanics, waves
and oscillations, interference, diffraction, and lasers.

Course Objectives:
1. Expose students to the fundamental principles and laws of mechanics in Physics to understand
the types of motion.
2. Demonstrate the ability to identify and apply the appropriate analytic, numerical, and
mathematical reasoning, to situations of the physical world.
3. Analyze the concepts of mechanics, oscillations, waves and optics to prepare the students for
advanced level courses.
4. Expose students to theoretical and mathematical aspects of interference and diffraction of
light for testing of materials.
5. Adaptability to new developments in science and technology.

UNITI: MECHANICS OF PARTICLES


Velocity and Acceleration, Motion in one dimension, several dimensions, formal solution of
kinematical equations. Polar Co-ordinates, velocity and acceleration in polar coordinates.
Newton’s Laws, applications of Newton’s laws (Constraint equations, Block on string, Conical
Pendulum, Block and Wedge). (12)

UNITII: MOMENTUM & WORK ENERGY


Momentum, law of conservation of linear momentum, flow of mass, Rocket Equation, Rocket in
free space and in a gravitational field. Integrating equation of motion in one-dimension-work
energy theorem, orbital velocity and escape velocity,Potential energy, Potential energy of a
uniform force field, potential energy of an inverse square force, stability, conservation laws and
particle collisions. (12)

UNITIII: WAVES AND OSCILLATIONS


Simple Harmonic Motion, damped harmonic oscillations, forced harmonic oscillations,
resonance, and quality factor. Superposition of vibrations along same direction (equal frequency)
and in perpendicular directions, Lissajous figures. Transverse waves, solution of wave equation,
velocity of a transverse wave along a stretched string, modes of vibration of stretched string,
standing waves, standing wave ratio. (12)

Page 30 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNITIV: INTERFERENCE & DIFFRACTION


Interference of light by division of wavefront- Young’s double slit experiment, expression for
fringe width, intensity distribution graph, interference of light by division of amplitude-
interference in thin film by reflection, Newton’s rings experiment, Michelson interferometer,
applications of Interference (colours of thin films). Diffraction, Farunhofer diffraction due to
single slit, double slit and, Diffraction grating (N-slit),applications of Diffraction (List only)
(12)
UNITV: LASERS
Introduction to Lasers, characteristics of Laser, interaction of radiation with matter-spontaneous
and stimulated emission, Einstein’s coefficients; amplification of light by population inversion,
excitation mechanism, types of lasers: solid-state lasers – ruby laser, gas lasers - He-Ne Laser,
semiconductor p-n junction diode laser; applications of lasers.
(12)

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:
1. Describe and explain the fundamental physical principles and laws of Mechanics in Physics.
2. Explain the concepts conservation of momentum, energy, and predict the future state of a
system based on its present state.
3. Apply the physical principles of waves together with logical and mathematical reasoning, to
situations of the physical world of vibrations.
4. Define and evaluate the fundamentals of materials testing using Interference and Diffraction
techniques.
5. Identify the working elements of different lasers and estimate laser operation parameters.

Text Books:
1. An Introduction to Mechanics, by D. Kleppner and R. Kolenkow, Tata McGraw-Hill
Edition, 2007.
2. H. J. Pain, “The physics of vibrations and waves”, Wiley, 2006.
3. A. Ghatak, “Optics”, McGraw Hill Education, 2012.
4. O. Svelto, “Principles of Lasers”, Springer Science & Business Media, 2010.

Reference Books:
1. Physics Vol I & II, Halliday/Resnick/Krane 5th Edition, John Wiley, 2003.
2. Berkeley Physics Course Volume I, Tata-McGraw Hill.
3. Engineering Mechanics, 2nd ed. — MK Harbola
4. Introduction to Mechanics — MK Verma
5. Theory of Vibrations with Applications — WT Thomson

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 31 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. I Year I Semester

18EEE101 BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Intermediate Physics

Course Description:
This course equips the students with a basic understanding of Electrical circuits and machines for
specific applications. In specific, the course covers basic of DC circuit & its analysis, introduction
to single-phase and three-phase AC Systems, magnetic circuits, transformers, DC & AC electrical
machines, basic converters and Components of LT Switchgear.

Course Objectives:
1. To learn the basics of the D.C. circuit analysis.
2. To have an idea about single-phase and three-phase A.C. electrical circuits.
3. To gain knowledge about basic magnetic circuits and transformers.
4. To learn the construction and operation of D.C. and A.C. machines.
5. To understand the operation of basic rectifiers and various components of LT Switchgear.

UNIT I: DC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS


Electrical circuit elements (R, L and C), voltage and current sources, Series and parallel resistive
circuits, Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws, Nodal and Mesh analysis of simple circuits with
dc excitation. Source Transformation, Star-Delta Transformation, Superposition Theorem.
(9)

UNIT II: AC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS


Representation of sinusoidal waveforms, peak and rms values, phasor representation, real power,
reactive power, apparent power, power factor. Analysis of single-phase ac circuits consisting of
R, L, C, RL, RC, RLC combinations. Three phase balanced circuits, voltage and current relations
in star and delta connections. (9)

UNIT III: MAGNETIC MATERIALS AND TRANSFORMERS


Magnetic materials, B-H characteristics, ideal and practical transformer, principle of operation,
emf equation, equivalent circuit, losses in transformers, regulation and efficiency.
(9)

UNIT IV: DC AND AC MACHINES


Construction, working, emf equation of DC generator, methods of excitation, speed control of dc
motor. Generation of rotating magnetic fields, construction and working of a three-phase
induction motor.Introduction of Single-phase induction motor. Introduction to Alternators.
(9)

UNIT V: RECTIFIERS AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS


PN junction diode, half wave, full wave and bridge rectifiers. Components of LT Switchgear:
switch fuse unit (SFU), MCB, ELCB, MCCB, types of wires and cables, earthing. (9)

Page 32 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. To understand and analyze basic DC electric circuits.
2. To measure and analyze various electrical quantities of single phase and three AC electric
circuits.
3. To develop magnetic circuits to experiment and analyze the transformers.
4. To study the working principles of electrical machines.
5. To create power converters for domestic applications with LT switchgear.

Text Books:
1. E. Hughes, “Electrical and Electronics Technology”, Pearson, 2010.
2. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
3. D. C. Kulshreshtha, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 2009.
4. L. S. Bobrow, “Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University Press, 2011.
5. V. D. Toro, “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Prentice Hall India, 1989.

References:
1. Abhijit Chakrabarti, “Circuit Theory : Analysis and Synthesis”, Dhanpat Rai & Co., 2014
2. J.B. Gupta, “Theory & Performance of Electrical Machines”, S. K. Kataria& Sons, 2013.
3. John Bird, “Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology”, Fourth edition, Elsevier Ltd., 2010.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 33 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester

18CSE101 PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING (PYTHON)


L T P C
2 0 2 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
Python is a language with a simple syntax, and a powerful set of libraries. It is an interpreted
language, with a rich programming environment. While it is easy for beginners to learn, it is
widely used in many scientific areas for data exploration. This course is an introduction to the
Python programming language for students without prior programming experience. This course
provides knowledge on how to implement programs in python language and to solve
computational problems using the various programming constructs including data structures,
functions, string handling mechanisms and file handling concepts.
Course Objectives:
1. Learn Python programming constructs.
2. Implement Python programs with conditional structures and loops.
3. Use functions for structuring Python programs.
4. Handle compound data using Python lists, tuples, and dictionaries.
5. Manipulate data using files handling in Python.

UNIT-I
Introduction: Algorithms, building blocks of algorithms (flow chart), History of Python, features
of Python Programming, Running Python Scripts, Variables, Assignment, Keywords, Input-
Output, Indentation. Data Types - Integers, Strings, Boolean.

a) Develop a flowchart for the various arithmetic operations on numbers.


b) Develop a flowchart to check whether the number is positive or negative.
c) Develop a flowchart for finding whether a given number is even or odd.
d) Develop a flowchart for finding biggest number among three numbers.
e) Develop a flowchart for displaying reversal of a number.
f) Develop a flowchart to print factorial of a number using function.
g) Develop a flowchart to generate prime numbers series up to N using function.
h) Develop a flowchart to check given number is palindrome or not using function.
i) Alexa travelled 150 kms by train. How much distance in miles she actually covered?
(9)
UNIT-II
Operators and Expressions: Operators- Arithmetic Operators, Comparison (Relational)
Operators, Assignment Operators, Logical Operators, Bitwise Operators, Membership Operators,
Identity Operators, Expressions and order of evaluations .Control Flow - if, if-elif-else, for,
while,break,continue,pass.

a) Swapping of two number with and without using temporary variable.


b) If the age of Ram, Sam, and Khan are input through the keyboard, write a python program
to determine the eldest and youngest of the three.
c) Develop a program that performs arithmetic operations (Addition, Subtraction,
Multiplication, and Division) on integers. Input the two integer values and operator for
performing arithmetic operation through keyboard. The operator codes are as follows:

Page 34 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

 For code '+', perform addition.


 For code '-', perform subtraction.
 For code '*', perform multiplication.
 For code '/', perform division.
d) Implement the python program to generate the multiplication table.
e) Implement Python program to find sum of natural numbers
f) If the first name of a student is input through the keyboard, write a program to display the
vowels and consonants present in his/her name.
g) The marks obtained by a student in 5 different subjects are input through the keyboard.
Find the average and print the student grade as per the MITS examination policy as shown
below.
% OBTAINED GRADE
90 - 100 O (Outstanding)
80 - 89 A+ (Excellent)
70 - 79 A (Very Good)
60 - 69 B+ (Good)
50 - 59 B (Above)
45 - 49 C (Average)
40 - 44 P (Pass)
< 40 F (Fail)
h) Implement Python Script to generate prime numbers series up to N.
i) Given a number x, determine whether it is Armstrong number or not. Hint: For example,
371 is an Armstrong number since 3**3 + 7**3 + 1**3 = 371. Write a program to find all
Armstrong number in the range of 0 and 999.
(9)

UNIT-III
Data Structures Lists - Operations, Slicing, Methods; Tuples, Sets, Dictionaries, Sequences.
Comprehensions. Functions - Defining Functions, Calling Functions, Passing Arguments,
variable in python-Global and Local Variables.

a) Write a Python script to


 create a list
 access elements from a list
 slice lists
 change or add elements to a list
 delete or remove elements from a list
b) Write a Python script to read the values from a list and to display largest and smallest
numbers from list.
c) Write a Python script to compute the similarity between two lists.
d) Write a Python script to read set of values from a Tuple to perform various operations.
e) Write a Python script to perform basic dictionary operations like insert, delete and display.
f) Write a Python program to count the occurrence of each word in a given sentence.
g) Define a dictionary named population that contains the following data.
Keys Values

Shanghai 17.8

Page 35 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Keys Values

Istanbul 13.3

Karachi 13.0

Mumbai 12.5
h) Write a Python script to create Telephone Directory using dictionary and list to perform
basic functions such as Add entry, Search, Delete entry, Update entry, View and Exit.
i) Implement Python script to display power of given numbers using function.
j) Implement a Python program that takes a list of words and returns the length of the longest
one using function. (9)

UNIT-IV
String Handling -Modules: Creating modules, import statement, from.import statement, name
spacing-Files and Directories

a) Implement Python program to perform various operations on string using string libraries.
b) Implement Python program to remove punctuations from a given string.
c) Write a Python program to change the case of the given string (convert the string from
lower case to upper case). If the entered string is “computer”, your program should output
“COMPUTER” without using library functions.
d) Implement Python program to capitalize each word in a string. For example, the entered
sentence “god helps only people who work hard” to be converted as “God Helps Only
People Who Work Hard”
e) Write a Python script to display file contents.
f) Write a Python script to copy file contents from one file to another.
g) Write a Python script to combine two text files contents and print the number of lines,
sentences, words, characters and file size.
h) Write a Python commands to perform the following directory operations.
 List Directories and Files
 Making a New Directory
 Renaming a Directory or a File
 Removing Directory or File (9)

UNIT-V
Python packages, Introduction to PIP, Installing Packages via PIP(Numpy, Pandas etc.., Using
PythonPackages. Brief
Tour of the Standard Library - Dates and Times, Data Compression, Turtle Graphics.

a) Create a package named Cars and build three modules in it namely, BMW, Audi and
Nissan. Illustrate the modules using class. Finally we create the __init__.py file. This file will
be placed inside Cars directory and can be left blank or we can put the initialization code into
it.
b) Write a python script to display following shapes using turtle. (9)

Page 36 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand problem solving techniques and their applications.
2. Apply the basic elements and constructs of python to solve simple logical problems.
3. Demonstrate different data structures using functions.
4. Demonstrate different file operations and modules.
5. Apply object-oriented principles to build simple applications.

Text Book:
1. Allen B. Downey, ``Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist’’, 2nd edition,
Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016 (http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-
python/)
2. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python – Revised and
updated for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.

References:
1. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational
Problem-Solving Focus, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
2. John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python’’, Revised and
expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013.
3. Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”, CENGAGE Learning,
2012.
4. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, “Practical Programming: An Introduction
to Computer Science using Python 3”, Second edition, Pragmatic Programmers,LLC,2013.
5. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to Programming in Python:
An Inter-disciplinary Approach, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 37 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech I Year I Semester

18PHY201 PHYSICS LABORATORY


L T P C
0 0 3 1.5

Course Description:
Physics Practical course is meant for making the students to gain practical knowledge to co
relate with the theoretical studies. It covers experiments on Principles of Mechanics and Optics,
Measurement of Magnetic field and studying Resonance using LCR Circuit.

Course Objectives:
1. Elucidate the concepts of Physics through involvement in the experiment by applying
theoretical knowledge.
2. Illustrate the basics of mechanics, waves and optics to analyze the behavior and characteristics
of various materials for its optimum utilization.
3. Develop an ability to apply the knowledge of physics experiments in the later studies.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: (Any 10 Out of 18)


1. Spring constant - Coupled Pendulums.
2. Study of resonance effect in series and parallel LCR circuit.
3. Determination of radius of curvature of a curved surface - Newton’s Rings.
4. Wavelength of a laser - Diffraction Grating
5. Wavelength of the spectral lines - Diffraction Grating.
6. Magnetic field along the axis of a current carrying coil - Stewart Gees’ Apparatus
7. Ferroelectric hysteresis (B-H Curve).(ECE)
8. Thickness of a given wire - Wedge Method.
9. Determination of Planck’s constant. (EEE, CSE, CSIT, CST)
10. Dispersive power of prism – Spectrometer.
11. Frequency of the tuning fork - Melde’s apparatus.
12. Energy gap of a material of p-n junction. (EEE, CSE, CSIT, CST)
13. Width of single slit - Diffraction due to Single Slit.
14. Measurement of e/m of electron (Helical Coil method) (ECE)
15. Biot -Savart Law with Helmholtz Coil. (ECE)
16. The Wheatstone Bridge. (ECE)
17. Determination of particle size using Laser.
18. Torsional Pendulum. (ME & Civil)

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of this course, the students should be able to:
1. Apply the scientific process in the conduct and reporting of experimental investigations.
2. Understand measurement technology, usage of new instruments and real time applications in
engineering studies.
3. Verify the theoretical ideas and concepts covered in lecture by doing hands on in the
experiments.
4. Know about the characteristics of various materials in a practical manner and gain knowledge
about various optical technique methods.
5. Acquire and interpret experimental data to examine the physical laws.

Page 38 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Reference Books:
1. Physics Laboratory Manual
2. Optics, A. Ghatak, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi 2011.
3. Fundamentals of Optics, F. A. Jenkins and H. E. White, 4th edition, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1981.
4. Engineering Mechanics, 2nd ed. — MK Harbola
5. Introduction to Electrodynamics- David J Griffiths

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 39 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. I Year I Semester

18EEE201 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
The laboratory facilitates the students to deal with electrical instruments which further
strengthen the concepts & operation of various AC & DC circuits, and machines, and their
characteristics. The lab also reinforce the concepts discussed in class with a hands-on approach
which enable the students to gain significant experience with electrical instruments such as
ammeter, voltmeter, digital multimeters, oscilloscopes, tachometer, switches, fuses and power
supplies.

Course Objectives:
1. To provide hands on experience in setting up simple electrical circuits (DC and AC).
2. To get exposure to handle different electrical equipment’s.
3. To measure various electrical parameters with different measuring instruments.
4. To get hands on experience in operating DC and AC machines.
5. To understand the operation of basic converters and various components of LT Switchgear.

LIST OF LABORATORY EXPERIMENTS/DEMONSTRATIONS:


DEMONSTRATIONS:
1. Basic safety precautions. Introduction and use of measuring instruments – voltmeter,
ammeter, multi-meter, oscilloscope. Study of passive components - resistors, capacitors and
inductors.
2. Demonstration of voltage and current relationships (line-line voltage, phase-to-neutral
voltage, line and phase currents). In star and delta connections.
3. Demonstration of cutout sections of transformer and DC & AC machines.
4. Demonstration of induction machine. Motor operation and generator operation of an induction
machine driven at super-synchronous speed.
5. Familiarization of (i) different types of cables/wires and switches and their uses, (ii) different
types of fuses & fuse carriers; MCB, ELCB, MCCB their ratings and uses (components of LT
switchgear).

EXPERIMENTS:
1. Wiring of a simple circuit for controlling (1) a lamp/fan point, (2) Staircase or Corridor
Winding.
2. Wiring of a power circuit for controlling an electrical appliance (16A Socket).
3. Verification of Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws (KCL & KVL).
4. Verification of superposition theorem
5. Sinusoidal steady state response of R-L, and R-C circuits (impedance calculation and
verification).
6. Measurement of voltage, current and power in a single phase circuit using voltmeter, ammeter
and wattmeter. Also, calculate the power factor of the circuit.
7. Measurement of active power for star and delta connected balanced loads (single wattmeter
method).
8. Open-circuit and short-circuit test on a single phase transformer.
9. Speed control of separately excited DC motor.

Page 40 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

10. Wiring of a power distribution arrangement using single phase MCB distribution board with
ELCB, main switch and energy meter (or residential house wiring).
11. Regulated power supply for generating a constant DC Voltage.
12. Fabrication of a given electronic circuit on a PCB and test the same.

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, the students are expected to
1. Get an exposure to common electrical components and their ratings.
2. Make electrical connections by wires of appropriate ratings.
3. Understand the usage of common electrical measuring instruments.
4. Understand the basic characteristics of transformers and electrical machines.
5. Get an exposure to the working of various power electronic converters.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 41 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester

Page 42 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester

18ENG101 PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH


(Common to all branches)
L T P C
2 0 2 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
Communication takes place in many forms, however the major impact and effectiveness is in its
professionalism. This course defines, enlightens and enables learners to engage in Professional
Communication by addressing all the areas of communication – Listening, Speaking, Reading
and Writing. This course also deals with various types of communication – Verbal, Non-verbal,
Storytelling, Crucial Conversations, Written Communication, Vocalics, Eye Contact, Posture,
etc.

Course Objectives:
This course enables the student to –
1. Engage effectively in a professional environment
2. Understand the intricacies and implications of professional communication
3. Use linguistic skills in any given context
4. Conduct self in a learning environment
5. Be better prepared for employment

UNIT I: GRAMMAR & VOCABULARY


Grammar - Tense, Reported Speech, Modals, Conditionals; Vocabulary development - prefixes,
suffixes, compound words, synonyms & antonyms.
Practical: Dumb Charade, Giving Direction, Talking about an experiment (Tenses), Running
Commentary (9)

UNIT II: READING SKILLS & WRITTEN COMMUNICATION


Reading - short comprehension passages, practice in skimming, scanning and predicting; Writing-
completing sentences, developing hints; Paragraph writing- topic sentence, main ideas, coherence.

Practical: Short Passages – Reading Comprehension, Paragraph Writing, Skit Writing. (9)

UNIT III: VERBAL & NON-VERBAL ASPECTS


Verbal - Introducing oneself, exchanging personal information, Using ‘Wh’- Questions, asking and
answering, yes or no questions-asking about routine actions and expressing opinions; Non-Verbal
– Use of body language, combating nervousness.
Practical: Daily Activities, Role Play, JAM . (9)

UNIT IV: CONVERSATIONS


Listening-short texts & conversing, formal and informal conversations, short group conversations,
speaking about oneself, speaking about one’s friend.

Practical: Speaking: formal and informal conversations, short group conversations, speaking
about oneself, speaking about one’s friend, Character Portrayal.
Listening: Listening/watching interviews, conversations, documentaries, etc.; Listening to
lectures ,discussions from TV/Radio/Podcast. (9)

Page 43 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT & ETIQUETTES


Sharing information of a personal kind - greeting & taking leave; Writing e-mails, memos, reports,
etc.
Practical: Mock Interview, Oral Presentation (9)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learners will be able to
1. Read articles and understand professional communication
2. Participate effectively in informal conversations
3. Introduce themselves and their friends and express opinions in English
4. Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
5. Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.

Suggested Reading/Textbooks:
1. Guy Brook Hart & Norman Whitby; Cambridge English-Business Benchmark: Pre-
Intermediate to Intermediate; Published by: Cambridge University Press.
2. Adrian Doff, Craig Thaine, Herbert Puchta, et al; Empower: Intermediate (B1+); Published
by: Cambridge University Press.

Reference:
1. AJ Thomson & AV Martinet; A Practical English Grammar; Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Raymond Murphy; English Grammar in Use with CD; Cambridge University Press, 2013.
3. K.S. Yadurajan; Modern English Grammar; Oxford University Press, 2014.
4. William Strunk Jr; The Elements of Style; ITHACA, N.Y.; W.P. HUMPHREY, 2006.
5. Joseph Devlin; How to Speak and Write Correctly; ITHACA, N.Y.; W.P. HUMPHREY, 2006
6. Anjana Agarwal; Powerful Vocabulary Builder; New Age Publishers, 2011.
7. Writing Tutor; Advanced English Learners’ Dictionary; Oxford University Press, 2012.
8. www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/
9. https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/english-grammar
10. https://www.rong-chang.com/

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 44 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester

18MAT107 LINEAR ALGEBRA, COMPLEX VARIABLES AND ORDINARY


DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
L T P C
3 1 0 4
Course Prerequisite: 18MAT101

Course Description:
This course introduces the topics involving: Linear Algebra, Complex variable functions,
Ordinary Differential Equations and their applications. The course starts with algebra of matrix,
systems of linear equations and with preliminary course on complex variable. It introduces the
CR equation, analytic function, Taylor and Laurent series expansions and determination of
residues. Emphasis also placed on the development of concepts and applications for first and
second order ordinary differential equations (ODE), systems of differential equations and Laplace
transforms.

Course Objectives:
1. To solve the system of linear equations, and develop orthogonal transformation with emphasis
on the role of eigen-values and eigen-vectors.
2. To analyze the function of complex variable and its analytic property with a review of
elementary complex function.
3. To understand the Taylor and Laurent expansion with their use in finding out the residue and
improper integral.
4. To identify important characteristics of ODE and develop appropriate method of obtaining
solutions of ODE.
5. Explore the use of ODE as models in various applications to solve initial value problems by
using Laplace transform method.

UNIT I: MATRICES
Symmetric, Skew-symmetric and Orthogonal matrices, Determinants, System of linear equations,
Inverse and rank of a matrix, Rank-nullity theorem, Eigen values and eigenvectors,
Diagonalization of matrices, Cayley-Hamilton Theorem, and Orthogonal transformation. (12)

UNIT II: COMPLEX VARIABLE - DIFFERENTIATION


Differentiation, Cauchy-Riemann equations, Analytic function, Harmonic functions, finding
harmonic conjugate, Elementary analytic functions (exponential, trigonometric, logarithm) and
their properties. (12)

UNIT III: COMPLEX VARIABLE - INTEGRATION


Contour integrals, Cauchy-Goursat theorem (without proof), Cauchy integral formula (without
proof), Liouville’s and Maximum-Modulus theorem (without proof); Taylor’s series, Zeros of
analytic functions, Singularities, Laurent’s expansion (without proof), Residues, Cauchy Residue
theorem (without proof), Evaluation of definite integral involving sine and cosine, Evaluation of
certain improper integrals using the Bromwich contour.
(12)

UNIT IV: FIRST ORDER ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS


Exact, Linear and Bernoulli’s, Equations not of first degree: equations solvable for p, equations
solvable for x, equations solvable for y and Clairaut’s type. (12)
Page 45 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS OF HIGHER ORDERS


Second order linear differential equations with variable coefficients, Method of variation of
parameters, Laplace Transform, Inverse Laplace transform, Bromwich contour method, and its
applications to solve ordinary differential equations. (12)

Text books:
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics by Dr. B.S. Grewal, 42nd Edition, Khanna Publishers.
2. Complex variables and applications by R. V Churchill and J. W. Brown, 8th edition, 2008,
McGraw-Hill.
3. Differential Equations with applications and historical notes by G.F. Simmonssecond edition,
McGraw Hill, 2003.

References:
1. Elementary linear Algebra by Stephen Andrilli and David Hecker, 4th Edition, Elsevier, 2010
2. Ordinary and partial differential equations. By M.D. Raisinghania, 2013. S. Chand
Publishing.
3. Linear Algebra and its Applications by D.C. Lay, 3rd edition, Pearson Education, Inc.

Course outcomes
Students are able to
1. Solve the systems of linear equations occurring in engineering system.
2. Determine harmonic function, velocity potential and stream lines in fluid flow systems.
3. Evaluate a contour integral and definite integral involving exponential, sine and cosine
functions.
4. Find general solutions to first and second order homogeneous differential equations by
algebraic and computational methods.
5. Determine the solution of ODE of second and higher order.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 46 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. I Year II Semester

18CHE101 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Pre-requisite: Basic Chemistry at Intermediate or equivalent level.

Course Description: Deals with the basic principles of various branches of chemistry like
physical, organic, inorganic, analytical and nanomaterial chemistry.

Course Objectives:
Students will
1. Understand, analyse and determine the impurities present in the water.
2. Appreciate the synthetic organic reactions used in daily life
3. Learn the principles of spectroscopies to analyse them.
4. Value the basic concepts of thermodynamics and electrochemistry.
5. Be exposed to the importance of nano and engineering materials used in their daily life and
industry.

UNIT I:IMPURITIES PRESENT IN WATER AND WATER TREATMENT


Impurities present in Water: Impurities in water(BIS and WHO standards), Hardness of water-
determination of hardness - EDTA Method (numerical problems), Alkalinity of water (numerical
problems) and its importance and Chlorides. Disadvantages (industry level) of using hard water.
Softening of water (Ion exchange method), Treatment of brackish water by Reverse Osmosis
method. Water treatment for civic applications: coagulation, sedimentation, filtration, sterilization
- chlorination and ozonation. Concept of break point chlorination. (9)

UNIT II: PERIODIC PROPERTIES AND ORGANIC REACTIONS


Periodic properties: Electronic configurations, atomic and ionic sizes, ionization energies,
oxidation states, molecular geometries. Organic Reactions: Introduction to substitution (SN1 and
SN2), elimination (E1 and E2) - Addition, Condensation and Free Radical Polymerization Reaction
(only the mechanism). (9)

UNIT III: SPECTROSCOPY


Basic Principle and Applications of UV-Visible, FT-IR, Raman, Microwave and Nuclear
Magnetic Resonance (NMR) Spectroscopy. (9)

UNIT IV: THERMODYNAMICS AND ELECTROCHEMISTRY


Thermodynamics: Systems, State Functions, Thermodynamic Functions: Work, Energy, Entropy
and Free energy. Estimations of Entropy in Isothermal, Isobaric and Isochoric processes and Free
Energies. Electrochemistry: Free energy and EMF. Cell potentials, the Nernst equation and
applications. Batteries (Lead-Acid and Lithium ion) and Fuel-Cells (H2-O2 and Solid Oxide).
(9)

Page 47 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: ENGINEERING MATERIALS, NANOSCIENCE & NANOTECHNOLOGY


Engineering Materials: Cement Materials and Manufacturing Process. Lubricants – definition,
Properties of lubricants – Viscosity, Viscosity Index, Saponification Number, Flash Point and
Pour Point. Nanomaterials: Introduction, Classes/Types, Chemical synthesis of Nanomaterials:
Sol-Gel, Hydrothermal (Metal Oxide Nanoparticles) and Chemical Vapor Deposition method
(Carbon Nanotubes), Characterization by powder XRD (Scherrer’s equation). Applications of
Nanomaterials – Energy (Hydrogen Storage and Solar Energy) and Environmental Sciences-
Photocatalytic Dye Degradation (TiO2 and ZnO) (9)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
1. Analyse and determine the impurities in water such as hardness, alkalinity for sustainable
development.
2. Prepare organic compounds/polymers for environmental, safety and society need.
3. Comprehend the principles and applications of spectroscopies
4. Apply the concept of free energy in thermodynamics, electrochemistry for solving the
problems evolve in the engineering processes.
5. Acquire spotlight to the nanomaterials and basic engineering materials used in academics,
industry and daily life.

Text Books:
1. P.W. Atkins & Julio de Paula, ‘The Elements of Physical Chemistry’, Ninth edition (Oxford
University Press, Oxford 2010).
2. C. N. Banwell, Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, Fourth Edition, (Tata McGraw Hill,
2008).
3. Ralph H. Petrucci, F. Geoffrey Herring, Jeffry D. Madura, Carey Bissonnette, General
Chemistry - Principles and Modern Applications, Tenth Edition, (Pearson, 2011).
4. Dr S. S. Dara and Dr S. S. Umare, A Text book of Engineering Chemistry,1 stEdition.(S.
Chand & Company Ltd, 2000).
5. T. Pradeep, Nano: The Essentials, 1st Edition, (Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Limited, 2017).

Reference Books:
1. ‘Physical Chemistry’, D. W. Ball, First Edition, India Edition (Thomson, 2007).
2. Perry’s Chemical Engineers’ Handbook, Don W. Green and Marylee Z. Southard, 9th Edition
(McGraw Hill, 2018).
3. Engineering Chemistry, Dr. Suba Ramesh and others, 1st Edition (Wiley India, 2011).
4. Jain and Jain, Engineering Chemistry,16th Edition (Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P) Ltd,
2016).
5. AmretashisSengupta, Chandan Kumar Sarkar (eds.), Introduction to Nano Basics to
Nanoscience and Nanotechnology (Springer-Verlag, Berlin, Heidelberg, 2015)

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 48 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. I Year II Semester

18CSE102 C PROGRAMMING AND DATA STRUCTURES

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: 18CSE101

Course Description:
This course includes C program basics, control structures, arrays, files, pointers and data
structures.

Course Objectives:
1. To make the student understand problem solving techniques and their applications
2. Students will be able to understand the syntax and semantics of C programming language
3. Develop algorithms for manipulating stacks, queues, searching and sorting.

UNIT I: C PROGRAMMING
Structure of C Program, C Tokens: Variables, Data types, Constants, Identifiers, key words and
Operators, Expressions. Control Structures: Conditional Statements (Simple if, if-else, Nested
-if-else, Switch). Iterative Statements (for, While, Do-While), Jump Statements (break,
Continue). (9)

UNIT II: FUNCTIONS & ARRAY


Functions Introduction, User defined function, accessing a function, Function prototypes,
Recursion, storage classes Arrays: Defining an array, processing an array, one dimensional
arrays, two dimensional arrays. Searching: Linear and Binary search Sorting: Bubble Sort and
Insertion Sort. (9)

UNIT III: POINTERS AND STRUCTURE


Pointers: Fundamentals of pointer, Pointer Declarations, Parameter passing: Pass by value,
Pass by reference – Example Program: Swapping of two numbers and changing the value of a
variable using pass by reference. Dynamic memory allocation. Structures: Defining a structure,
processing a structure. (9)

UNIT IV: STACK AND QUEUE


Classification of Data Structure, Stack and Queues: stack, stack operations, stack
implementations using arrays.Queue, queue operations, queue implementations using array,
types of queues, applications of stack and queue. (9)

UNIT V: STRINGS & FILES


Declaring and Defining a string, Initialization of strings, Strings Library functions Files: File
Definition, Opening and closing a data file, Reading and Writing a data file, Files I/O
Functions. (9)

Page 49 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Illustrate the use of control structures, decision making and looping statement.
2. Build programs using arrays and functions.
3. Implement the concepts of pointer, structure and list.
4. Implement storage and retrieval of ordered data using stacks and queues.
5. Illustrate the concepts of Strings and File processing.

Text Books:

1. The C Programming Language, Kernighan and Ritchie, 2 nd Edition, Prentice Hall, India
1988.
2. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffry D. Ullman, Data Structures and Algorithms,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006.

References:
1. Programming in ANSI C, E. Balagurusamy, Sixth Edition, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Publishing
Co.Ltd.-New Delhi
2. Problem Solving & Program Design in C, Hanly, Jeri R and Elliot. B Koffman, Pearson
Education,5th edition, 20007.
3. K. N. King ,"C Programming ": A Modern Approach, 2nd Edition 2nd Edition
4. Byron Gottfried , Jitender Chhabra , Programming with C (Schaum's Outlines Series)

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 50 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. I Year II Semester

18ME101 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS


L T P C
Course Prerequisite: None 2 0 3 3.5

Course Description:
Introduction to AutoCAD commands, simple drawings, orthographic projections, projection of
points, lines, planes; auxiliary projections; projections and sections of solids; development and
intersection of surfaces; isometric projections.

Course Objectives:
1. Engineering Graphics is the primary medium for development and communicating design
concepts.
2. Through this course the students are trained in Engineering Graphics concepts with the use
of AutoCAD.
3. The latest ISI code of practice is followed while preparing the drawings using AutoCAD.
4. Computerized drawing is an upcoming technology and provides accurate and easily
modifiable graphics entities.
5. Storage and Retrieval of Drawings is also very easy and it takes very less time to prepare the
drawings. Also enhances the creativity.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO AUTO CAD


Introduction to AutoCAD commands, simple drawings, Orthographic Projections-Theory,
techniques, first angle projections and third angle projections. (15)

UNIT II: PROJECTIONS OF POINTS & LINES


Projections of points: Positions, notation system and projections. Projections of lines: positions,
terms used, different cases, traces of lines and finding true lengths, auxiliary projections.
(15)

UNIT III: PROJECTIONS OF PLANES & SOLIDS


Projections of planes: positions, terms used, different cases and projections procedure.
Projections of Solids: Projections of Regular Solids inclined to one planes. (15)

UNIT IV: SECTIONS AND DEVELOPMENTS OF SOLIDS


Section Planes and Sectional View of Right Regular Solids-Prism, cylinder. True shapes of the
sections. Development of Surfaces of Right Regular Solids-Prism, Cylinder and their Sectional
Parts. (15)

UNIT V: INTERSECTIONS & ISOMETRIC PROJECTIONS


Intersections of surfaces of solids: Intersection between: Line-plane, Plane-plane, line-solid,
solid-solid. Isometric Projections: Theory of isometric drawing, construction of isometric
projection from orthographic. (15)

Page 51 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Identify various commands in AutoCAD and their usage for engineering graphics
2. Draw the projections of points and straight lines with AutoCAD
3. Draw the projections of the planes and sections of solids.
4. Sketch the intersections of surfaces and developments of solids
5. Draw the conversion of the orthographic views to isometric views and vice versa.

Text Book:
1. D.M. Kulkarni, A.P. Rastogi and A.M. Sarkar., Engineering Graphics with AutoCAD, PHI
Learning Private Limited, New Delhi 2009.

References:
1. Dhananjay A Jolhe, Engineering Drawing: with an introduction to AutoCAD, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2008
2. Warren J. Luzadder& Jon M. Duff Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, 11th edition,
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.ss

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 52 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester

18CHE201 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY


L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course Prerequisites: Basic Chemistry at Intermediate or equivalent level.

Course Description:
It deals with basic principles of volumetric and instrumental analytical methods.

Course Objective:
This Engineering Chemistry Laboratory is common to all branches of I Year B Tech. At the end
of the course the student is expected to Students will
1. Learn to estimate the chemical impurities present in water such as hardness, alkalinity,
chlorine, etc.
2. Understand and experience the formation of inorganic complex and analytical technique for
trace metal determination.
3. Be trained to use the instruments to practically understand the concepts of electrochemistry.
4. Bridge theoretical concepts and their practical engineering applications, thus highlighting the
role of chemistry in engineering.

Learn and understand the practical implementation of fundamental concepts.


LAB EXPERIMENTS (12 EXPERIMENTS)
1. Estimation of total, permanent and temporary hardness of water by EDTA method.
2. Estimation of alkalinity of water sample.
3. Adsorption of acetic acid by charcoal.
4. Determination of molecular weight of a polymer by using Ostwald’s viscometer.
5. Determination of rate constant of an ester hydrolysis (Pseudo First Order reaction).
6. Determination of strength of a Strong acid (conc. H2SO4) by conductometric titration
(Neutralisation Titration).
7. Conductometric titration of BaCl2 Vs Na2SO4 (Precipitation Titration).
8. Dissociation constant of weak electrolyte by Conductometry.
9. Determination of percentage of Iron in Cement sample by colorimetry.
10. Estimation of ferrous ion by Potentiometric titration (Redox Titration).
11. Saponification value of oil.
12. Formation of Iron- 1,10-phenanthroline complex and determination of iron
bycolorimetry.

Course Outcome:
After the completion of the Engineering Chemistry Laboratory experiments, students will be
able to
1. Develop and perform analytical chemistry techniques to address the water related problems
(for e.g., hardness, alkalinity present in water) technically.
2. Handle electro-analytical instruments like digital conductivity meter and potentiometer to
perform neutralization, precipitation and redox titrations respectively.
3. Acquire practical skills to handle spectro-photochemical methods to verify Beer-Lambert’s
Law.
4. Operate various instruments for the analysis of materials and produce accurate results in a
given time frame.

Page 53 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

5. Think innovatively and improve the creative skills that are essential for solving engineering
problems.

Text Book:
1. Engineering Chemistry Lab Manual (2017-18), Dept. of Chemistry, Madanapalle Institute of
Technology and Science, Madanapalle – 517325, Chittoor Dist., Andhra Pradesh, India.
2. “Vogel’s Textbook of Qualitative Chemical Analysis”, Arthur Israel Vogel, Prentice Hall,
2000.
3. Laboratory Manual on Engineering Chemistry, by DrSudha Rani, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
house, 2009.
4. A Text book on Experiments and calculations in Engineering Chemistry, by SS Dara, S Chand
publications, 2015.
5. Laboratory Manual of Organic Chemistry, by Raj K Bansal, Wiley Eastern Limited, New age
international limited, 2009.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 54 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech I Year II Semester

18CSE201 C PROGRAMMING AND DATA STRUCTURES LABORATORY

Course Prerequisite: 18CSE101 L T P C


0 0 3 1.5
Course Description:
This course includes C program basics, control structures, arrays, files, pointers and data
structures.

Course Objectives:
1. To make the student understand problem solving techniques and their applications
2. Students will be able to understand the syntax and semantics of C programming language
3. Develop algorithms for manipulating linked lists, stacks, queues, searching and sorting.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. a) Write a C program to swap the two numbers.
b) Write a C Program to find the eligibility of admission for a Professional course based on the
following criteria:
Marks in Maths >=65
Marks in Physics >=55
Marks in Chemistry>=50
OR
Total in all three subject >=180
2. a) Write a C program to list all the factorial numbers less than or equal to an input number n.
A number N is called a factorial number if it is the factorial of a
Positive integer. For example, the first few factorial numbers are
1, 2, 6, 24, 120, ...
*Note* - We do not list the factorial of 0.
b) Write a program that reads numbers which are in the range 0 to 100, till it encounters -1.
Print the sum of all the integers that you have read before you encountered -1

3. a) Given three points (x1, y1), (x2, y2) and (x3, y3), write a program to check if all the three
points fall on one straight line.
b) The digital root (also called repeated digital sum) of a number is a single digit value obtained
by an iterative process of summing digits. Digital sum of 65536 is 7, because 6+5+5+3+6=25
and 2+5 = 7. Write a program that takes an integer as input and prints its digital root.

4. a) Write a C program to find the series of prime numbers in the given range.
b) Write a C Program to Check Whether a Number is Palindrome or Not.

5. a) Write a c program to check whether a given number is a perfect number or not. (Perfect
number is a positive number which sum of all positive divisors excluding that number is equal
to that number. For example 6 is perfect number since divisor of 6 are 1, 2 and 3. Sum of its
divisor is 1 + 2+ 3 = 6)
b) Write a C function to find the kth occurrence of an integer n in a sequence of non-negative
integers, and then call your function from main.
Your function should be according to the following declaration:
int find(int n, int k);
sample example: input 3 2
1 1 3 2 3 -1

Page 55 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Output: 4

6. Write a C program to find Factorial, GCD, Fibonacci, (Using recursion)

7. Your program should take as input: dimension of a square matrix N, two matrices of
size N x N with integer values, and one operator symbol (+, - ,*). It must perform the
Corresponding operation given below
a) Matrix Addition b) Matrix Subtraction c) Matrix Multiplication

8. One needs to first input a set of N number of ALPHABETIC Strings each representing a name
of a student in an array studname [N] . Assume each string can be Max. 40 Characters long.
subsequently, one needs to input Marks obtained by those students in another array marks [N]
Assume that studname [I] i.e. ith student in the list of student names has obtained Marks [I] in
the Marks List. You need to find out and print the Max Marks obtained by a student and also
print the name of the student who has obtained this mark.

9. Implement the following searching techniques


a) Linear Search b) Binary Search

10 .a) Bubble sort is a sorting algorithm that works by repeatedly stepping through lists that need
to be sorted, comparing each pair of adjacent items and swapping them if they are in the wrong
order. This passing procedure is repeated until no swaps are required, indicating that the list
is sorted. Bubble sort gets its name because smaller elements bubble toward the top of the list.
Consider an array of size 10. It will be filled it by reading 10 integers. The final output will
be sorted output in Ascending Order.
b) Insertion sort is a sorting algorithm in which the elements are transferred one at a time to the
right position. Here the first element in the array is considered as sorted, even if it is an
unsorted array. Then each element in the array is checked with the previous elements,
resulting in a growing sorted output list. With each iteration, the sorting algorithm removes
one element at a time and finds the appropriate location within the sorted array and inserts it
there. The iteration continues until the whole list is sorted. First an array of size 10 will be
taken. We will fill it by reading 10 integers. The final output will be sorted output in
Ascending Order.

11 a) Write a C program to swap two integers using pointers. You have to write a swap function
that will accept the address of two integer and swap their values
b) Write a program in C to add two numbers using pointers. You have to write the fsum()
function which accepts the address of two variables and returns the sum of their values to the
main function.

12 Write a C program to compute internal marks of students for five different subjects using
Structures.

13 Implement the following Data Structures


a) Stack ADT b) queue ADT c) Circular queue ADT

14 a)Write a C program to implement all string operations (string length, string copy, string
compare, string concatenation and string reverse) without using standard string library
functions.

Page 56 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

b) Write a C program for reading a string and assigning its base address to the character
pointer to count characters are vowels or consonants.

15 a) Write a C program to copy the file contents from one file to another file (pass file names
as Command line arguments).
b) Write a C program to count no of lines, words and characters in a file.

Course Outcomes:
After completing this course the students should be able to
1. Apply the concepts of control structures using C.
2. Implement the concepts of arrays and functions through C programming.
3. Develop the source code to implement the concepts of Strings, Pointers and File processing.
4. Implement sorting and searching algorithms using arrays.
5. Implement stack and queue data structures using arrays.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 57 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. I Year II Semester

18ME201 WORKSHOP PRACTICE


L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
This course will provide students with a hands-on experience on various basic engineering
practices. This course will also provide an opportunity to the students to experience the
various steps involved in the industrial product fabrication.

Course Objectives:
1. Introduction to the use of Tools, Machinery and Power tools,
2. Hands on practice in Carpentry, Fitting, Forging, Tinsmith, Plumbing, Foundry, Welding,
Fabrication of plastic components, Metrology, Fabrication of Polymer Composite materials,
simple machine turning and wood turning, and basic electrical connections.
3. Introduction to 3 D Printing
4. Fabrication of final product at end of the semester.

LIST OF TRADES
1. Carpentry (Cross half lap Joint and Miter Joint)
2. Fitting (Square and ‘V’ fit)
3. Turning (Ball pane hammer and handles)
4. Forging (S hook L hook)
5. Tin smithy (Square tray)
6. Plumbing (Wash basin and simple connection)
7. Foundry (Solid and Split pattern)
8. Welding (Arc and Gas welding)
9. Fabrication of plastic components (Pen Stand)
10. Metrology (Internal and External dimension)
11. Composite Material Sample Preparation (Demo Only)
12. Introduction of Power Tools and CNC (Demo Only)
13. Introduction to 3D Printing (Demo Only)

Course Outcomes
On successful completion of this course, the student will be able to
1. Fabricate carpentry components with suitable joint and pipe connections including plumbing
works.
2. Perform welding operation to join various structures.
3. Perform basic machining operations.
4. Create the models using sheet metal and plastic works.
5. Illustrate the operations of foundry, fitting and smithy
6. Fabricate a product using composite and plastic material
7. Design and fabricate a product using the tools and skills learned in the workshop.

Page 58 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Suggested Text/Reference Books:

1. Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K. and Nirjhar Roy S.K., “Elements of
Workshop Technology”, Vol. I 2008 and Vol. II 2010, Media promoters and publishers
private limited, Mumbai.
2. Kalpakjian S. And Steven S. Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, 4th
edition, Pearson Education India Edition, 2002.
3. Roy A. Lindberg, “Processes and Materials of Manufacture”, 4th edition, Prentice Hall India,
1998. (v) Rao P.N., “Manufacturing Technology”, Vol. I and Vol. II, Tata McGrawHill
House, 2017.
4. Work shop Manual / P.Kannaiah/ K.L.Narayana/ SciTech Publishers.
5. Rao P.N., “Manufacturing Technology”, Vol. I and Vol. II, Tata McGrawHill House, 2017.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 59 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech II Year I Semester

Page 60 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. II Year I Semester

18HUM102 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
The course provides students with a practical and concrete explanation of management concepts
and techniques they will need to manage today’s and tomorrow’s organizations. The course will
follow the “planning, organizing, leading, controlling” format of managerial functions while
putting together many small pictures presented by individual modules into one bigger meaningful
picture in which managerial knowledge would apply. At the end of the course students are
expected to understand role of components of bigger picture and interactions between and among
components.

Course Objectives:
The course is intended to
1. Describe the concepts of Management theories, approaches and their application with
organizations around us;
2. Know the concepts of planning and management;
3. Explain the basic concepts of organization, types and structure of organization;
4. Make the students know leading, good communication, theories of motivation; and
5. Explain about controlling, managing operations and functional areas of marketing and
financial management.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION:
Introduction to Management and Organizations- Management definition, skills, roles, goals and
functions of a manager, organization, value of studying management - Managing in a Global
Environment- Global Perspective, Understanding global environment, - Social Responsibility and
Managerial Ethics. (10)

UNIT II: PLANNING


Decision-making process, Types of decisions and decision making conditions, styles, biases and
errors, Planning: Meaning of planning, establishing goals and developing plans, contemporary
issues in planning - Strategic Management-Importance of strategic management, strategic
management process, types of organizational strategies, current issues in strategic management.
(9)

UNIT III: ORGANIZING


Organizational structures - HRM process, Contemporary issues in HRM – Departmentation –
decentralization – delegation of Authority - Managing Change and Innovations (8)

UNIT IV: COMMUNICATION, MOTIVATION AND LEADING


Functions of communication, Inter-personal communication, Barriers of Communication –
Understanding Information Technology- Motivation: Theories of motivation and current issues
in motivation. Leading: Leaders and Leadership, Leadership theories - Leadership issues in
twenty first century (9)

Page 61 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: CONTROLLING
Process of control – Types of Control - feed-forward, concurrent and feedback controls,
contemporary issues in control – Strategic role of Operations Management - Value Chain
Management (9)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the various concepts, approaches and theories of management in the real
situation.
2. Analyze the concept of planning and apply on the decisions in strategic management.
3. Compare organization structure designs and chart diligently with theoretical learning
concepts.
4. Apply communication and theories of motivation in an organization.
5. Understand various tools for controlling organizational performance and apply to achieve
the corporate objectives.

Text Book:
1. Stephen P. Robbins, Mary Coulter “Management”, Pearson Education, 2010, 10th edition.

References:
1. Gary Dessler, “Management”, Prentice Hall, Inc., 1998, 1st edition.
2. Daft Richard L. ‘Management’ Thomson South Western, 5th edition.
3. Koontz H. and Weihrich H., "Essentials of Management", McGraw Hill Int. ed., 2004, 6th
edition.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 62 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year I Semester


18MAT108 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND PROBABILITY&
STATISTICS
L T P C
3 1 0 4
Course prerequisite: Engineering Calculus
Course description:
This course provides an introduction to partial differential equations and its applications,
probability concepts, univariate distributions, Chebychev’s inequality, moments for basic
statistics, correlation and linear regression, hypothesis testing and confidence intervals.

Course objectives:
1. To introduce the partial differential equations and applications of partial differential
equations.
2. To understand the concepts of probability, discrete random variables and their importance
in engineering.
3. To solve real time problems in engineering by using continuous probability distributions.
4. To analyze the problems related to multivariate random variables.
5. To apply classical inference involving confidence intervals and hypothesis testing in
engineering problems.

UNIT 1: PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND ITS APPLICATIONS


Definition and formulation of partial differential equations. Classification, method of separation
of variables; One dimensional wave equation, D'Alembert's solution; Solution of one dimensional
heat flow;Solution of two dimensional steady heat flow. (12)

UNIT 2: PROBABILITY AND DISCRETE RANDOM VARIABLES


Axiomatic approach to probability, theorems on probability, conditional probability and Bayes'
rule. Discrete random variable, discrete density function, cumulative distribution, expectation,
moment generating function, geometric, discrete uniform, binomial and Poisson distributions
(12)

UNIT 3: CONTINUOUS RANDOM VARIABLES


Continuous Random Variables: Continuous density, cumulative distribution function,
Expectation, moment generating function of a random variable, Uniform, gamma, exponential,
normal distributions, Chebyshev's inequality, normal approximation to binomial distribution and
transformation of random variable. (12)

UNIT 4: JOINT DISTRIBUTIONS


Joint densities: discrete and continuous joint densities, marginal densities, independence,
expectation and covariance, correlation. Transformation of random variables. Correlation and
linear regression (12)

UNIT 5: TESTS OF HYPOTHESIS


Sampling distribution, tests of significance: Null and alternative hypothesis, errors in sampling,
critical region and level of Significance. Large sample tests -single and difference of proportions,
single and difference of means. Small sample tests :t- test for single mean, paired and difference
of means, chi-square test for goodness of fit and test for ratio of variances.
(12)

Page 63 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Textbook
1. B.S. Grewal,Higher Engineering Mathematics, 43rd Edition(2014),Khanna Publishers.
2. J.S. Milton and J.C. Arnold, Introduction to Probability and Statistics, 4th edition (2003),
Tata McGraw-Hill Publications.

References:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John Wiley &
Sons,2006.
2. N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, A text book of Engineering Mathematics,
LaxmiPublications, Reprint, 2010.
3. P. G. Hoel, S. C. Port and C. J. Stone, Introduction to Probability Theory, Universal Book
Stall, 2003 (Reprint).
4. S. Ross, A First Course in Probability, 6th edition, Pearson Education India, 2002.

Course Outcomes:
After the completion of the course, students should able to
1. Understand the partial differential equations and its applications in mechanical
engineering.
2. Get the importance of probability and discrete probability distributions in engineering.
3. Solve real time problems in engineering by using continuous probability distributions.
4. Analyze the joint probability distributions and regression analysis.
5. Apply classical inference involving confidence intervals and hypothesis testing in
engineering problems.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 64 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year I Semester

18ME102 ENGINEERING MECHANICS


L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Engineering Calculus

Course Objectives:
1. To study the basics of statics of particles and rigid bodies.
2. To understand various support connections and loadings.
3. To analyze trusses for various loading conditions.
4. To study the problems involving ladder, wedge and belt friction.
5. To learn the geometric properties of the different shapes.

UNIT-I: STATICS OF PARTICLES


Introduction to Mechanics - System of Units - Laws of mechanics - Lame’s theorem -
Parallelogram and triangular Law of forces - Resolution of coplanar forces - Free body diagram
- Equilibrium of particles
Statics of Rigid Body: Moment of a force - Varignon’s theorem - Moments and Couples -
Equivalent system of forces - Requirements of stable equilibrium - Equilibrium of Rigid bodies
subjected to two, three and four force system. (11)

UNIT-II: ANALYSIS OF PIN JOINTED TRUSSES


Classification of trusses –Reactions at supports and connections –Types of loading - Reaction for
simply supported and over hanging beams - Analysis of Trusses (Simply supported and cantilever
beams)
Friction: Classification of friction – Laws of friction – Angle of repose – Force required to move
a body along horizontal and inclines planes – Analysis of ladder, wedge and belt friction.
(9)

UNIT- III: CENTROIDS, CENTER OF GRAVITY AND MOMENTS OF INERTIA


Center of Gravity and Centroid - Area and polar moment of inertia - Radius of Gyration - Parallel
and Perpendicular Axis Theorems - Mass Moment of inertia – Problems on centroid and area
moment of inertia of plane figures and buildup sections (8)

UNIT –IV: KINEMATICS OF PARTICLES


Displacements - Velocity and acceleration - their relationship, relative motion - Curvilinear
motion - Kinetics of Particles – Linear and angular momentum - Equations of motion - Energy
and momentum methods - Work and energy - Principle of Impulse and Momentum Impact
(8)

UNIT V: DYNAMICS OF RIGID BODIES


General plane motion - Velocity and Acceleration - Absolute and Relative motion method -
Equilibrium of rigid bodies in plane motion - D’Alembert’s Principle - Principle of Work Energy
Principle for a rigid body - Principle of impulse momentum for rigid bodies in plane motion.
(9)

Page 65 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course outcome:
Student will be able to
1. Solve the engineering problems in case of equilibrium conditions.
2. Calculate the reaction forces of various supports of different structures.
3. Solve the problems involving ladder, wedge and belt friction.
4. Determine centroid, center of gravity and moment of inertia of various surfaces and solids.
5. Solve the problems involving dynamics of particles and rigid bodies

Textbook:
1. Ferdinand P. Beer, E. Russell Johnston (2010), Vector Mechanics for Engineers: Statics and
Dynamics (9th Edition), Tata McGraw-Hill International Edition.

References:
1. S.S. Bhavikatti, (2008), Engineering Mechanics, New Age International.
2. Irving H. Shames, (2003), Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics, Prentice Hall of
India Private limited.
3. S. Timoshenko D.H. Young J.V. Rao, Sukumar Pati, Engineering Mechanics, McGraw Hill
Education; 5 edition

Mode of evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 66 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year I Semester

18ME103 BASIC THERMODYNAMICS

L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Differential Equations

Course Description:
Thermodynamics is one of the fundamental courses in the study of mechanical engineering. The
principles of thermodynamics are applicable to a wide range of problems encountered in all
branches of engineering. Also thermodynamics is an essential pre-requisite for subsequent
courses in mechanical engineering like fluid mechanics, applied thermodynamics, heat transfer,
gas dynamics, refrigeration and air conditioning, etc. This course is designed to equip the students
with a thorough understanding of basic concepts of thermodynamics and with necessary skills
and techniques to solve problems in thermodynamics through a systematic analysis using
fundamental principles. The specific topics to be covered in the course include concepts of system
and surroundings, energy, energy transfer by work and heat, properties of substances and property
changes, first and second laws of thermodynamics.

Course Objectives:
1. To introduce the concepts of system, surroundings, energy interactions, thermodynamics
properties of substances and to teach different techniques used for estimating the properties
like gas laws and property tables
2. To explain the principles of work and energy.
3. To introduce the fundamentals of thermodynamic laws, concepts and principles.
4. To teach the systematic approach to be employed for effectively solving the problems in
thermodynamics.
5. To explain the principles of various cycles and to apply the thermodynamic concepts in
various applications like IC engines and Refrigeration and Air conditioning systems.

UNIT 1: THERMODYNAMIC BASICS


Macroscopic versus Microscopic viewpoint, Thermodynamic system and control volume,
Thermodynamic properties, processes and cycles, Homogeneous and heterogeneous systems,
Thermodynamic equilibrium, Quasi-static process, Concept of continuum, Zeroth law of
thermodynamics, temperature scale, Ideal gas, Work Transfer, Heat transfer, First law of
thermodynamics, Specific heat, Enthalpy, Internal Energy, Steady flow energy equation and
application, PMM1 and Steady flow energy equation. (10)

UNIT 2: PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCES


Pure substance, Vapor-Liquid-Solid-Phase equilibrium in a pure substance, Independent
properties of a pure substance, Phase boundaries, tables of thermodynamic properties,
Thermodynamic Surfaces, p-v and p-T diagram for a pure substance, p-v-T surface, T-s and h-s
or Mollier diagram for a pure substance, dryness fraction, Steam Tables, Charts of
Thermodynamic properties, Measurement of steam quality. (8)

Page 67 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT 3: SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS AND ENTROPY


Qualitative difference between heat and work, cyclic heat engine, Kelvin-Planck statement of
second law, Clausius’ statement of second law, Refrigerator and heat pump, Equivalence of
Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statement, Reversibility and Irreversibility, Carnot cycle, Reversed
heat engine, Carnot’s Theorem, Corollary of Carnot’s theorem, absolute thermodynamic
temperature scale and Efficiency of heat engine, Entropy, Inequality of Clausius, Temperature-
Entropy plot, Entropy generation in an open and closed system and Entropy change in an
Irreversible process. (10)

UNIT 4: THERMODYNAMIC PROPERTY RELATIONS AND GAS MIXTURES


Equation of state, Ideal gas, Real gas, Compressibility chart, Internal energy, enthalpy, entropy,
specific heats and Gibbs free energy of gas mixture, Maxwell’s Equations, TdS equation,
Difference in heat capacities, Ratio of heat capacities, Joule-Kelvin Effect, Clausius-Clapeyron
equation, Properties of atmospheric air, Psychrometric chart and Psychrometric process.
(9)

UNIT 5: THERMODYNAMIC CYCLES


Rankine cycle, Actual vapour cycle processes, Comparison of Rankine and Carnot cycles, Air standard
cycles - Otto, Diesel, dual and Brayton cycles, Reversed heat engine cycle, Vapour compression
refrigeration cycles. (8)

Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Define the fundamentals of the zeroth and first laws of thermodynamics and explain their
application to a wide range of systems.
2. Apply the properties of steam to design steam systems.
3. Apply the second law of thermodynamics for the design of heat engine, heat pump and
refrigerators. The student will also be able to Evaluate entropy changes in a wide range of
processes and determine the reversibility or irreversibility of a process from such calculations.
4. Explain the cycles on which IC engines, Gas turbines and refrigerator works.
5. Explain the importance of Tds relations and be able to use psychometric charts for the design
of air conditioning systems.

Text Books:
1. Cengel, Y.A and Boles, M.A, Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach, 5th ed.,
McGraw-Hill, 2006.

References:
1. Sonntag, R.E., Borgnakke, C., and Van Wylen, G.J., Fundamentals of Thermodynamics,
6th ed., John Wiley, 2003.
2. Nag, P.K., Engineering Thermodynamics, 3rd ed., Tata McGraw-Hill, 2005.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 68 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year I Semester

18ME104 MATERIALS SCIENCE AND ENGNEERING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
The purpose of this course is to introduce the student to enrich their knowledge on the materials
science field. Begin with the microscopic level the structure at the atomic and their impact on the
material properties are discussed. The relation between heat treatment, phases and alloying
elements properties of materials is also highlighted. The course mainly discusses about the
different types testing methods for materials. Final part of the course covers non-metallic
materials such as ceramics and polymers.

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the relation between structure and properties of metallic materials.
2. To understand the strengthening mechanism of metals
3. To know the concept of phase transformation, phase diagrams and its influence on the
properties of metals.
4. To learn the methods of improving properties by thermo, mechanical treatment.
5. To identify the importance of non-metallic materials like polymers, ceramics and composites,
material standards and their applications.

UNIT I: STRUCTURE OF MATERIALS


Introduction: Historical prospective - importance of materials - Classification of Materials and its
Properties. Bonding in solids: bonding forces and energies - primary and secondary bonding.
Crystallography and Metallic structures: Unit cell - Crystallographic directions and planes, FCC,
BCC, HCP, SC and other structure – miller indices, Linear and planar densities - close-packed
crystal structures. Packing of atoms in solids. Packing factor (9)

UNIT II: CRYSTAL IMPERFECTIONS AND DIFFUSION.


Crystal Imperfections: Types, Vacancies and interstitials, Dislocations and grain boundaries.
Diffusion: Fick’s Law of diffusion – Diffusion mechanism – Steady state and non-steady state,
factors affecting diffusion.
Dislocations: Dislocations and strengthening mechanisms of metals – Solid solution hardening –
Precipitate and dispersion strengthening – Work hardening – The dislocation yield strength.
(9)

UNIT III: HEAT TREATMENT PROCESS AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF


MATERIALS.
Introduction and Concepts: Classification of metal working process- Mechanical Properties of
Metals: Mechanical properties of materials: Elasticity and Plasticity, Stress–Strain curve,
Young’s modulus – The yield strength, Tensile strength, Ductility, Brittleness, Malleability,
Rigidity, Toughness, Resilience, Hardenability, Hardness, Hooke’s Law – Linear and non-linear
elasticity; True stress – strain curves for plastic flow – Plastic work – Tensile testing, the hardness
test, compression testing, creep, fatigue and other testing methods.

Various Heat Treatment Process: Annealing, Normalizing, Quenching. Effect of Heat Treatment
on material properties, Stress relief. Various stages of quenching and effect of quenching medium:
Page 69 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Water, Oil and Air. Austempering, Martempering and Age Hardening. Case Hardening:
Carburizing, Nitriding, Cyaniding, Carbo-nitriding, flame and induction hardening, vacuum and
plasma hardening. Solidification, Nucleation and crystal growth.
(11)

UNIT IV: PHASE DIAGRAMS AND PHASE TRANSFORMATIONS


Phase diagrams: Solubility, Phases- Phase rule, and microstructure - phase equilibrium - Binary
phase diagrams - Phase Transformations. Lever Rule and Gibbs phase rule. Fe-Fe3C Phase
diagram Phase Transformations: Isothermal transformation - TTT diagrams - Continuous cooling
transformation. (8)

UNIT V: FERROUS, NONFERROUS & NONMETALLIC MATERIALS


Ferrous Materials: Effect of alloying additions in Steel (Mn, Si, Cr, Mo, V, Ti & W), Stainless
steels and types, Tool Steels, HSLA, Types, structure and properties of Cast iron: White, Grey,
Ductile, Malleable, CGI and Alloy cast iron. Nonferrous Materials: Brass, Bronze; Al, Cu, Zn
and Pb and respective alloys. Industrial Applications.
Introduction to non-metallic materials- classification of polymers, ceramics and composites-
structure and application of non-metallic materials (8)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course students will be able:
1. To develop deep knowledge of crystal structure and effect of structure on the properties of
the materials.
2. To understand various imperfections in crystal, dislocation mechanisms and diffusion
mechanism in materials.
3. Student will be able understand various mechanical properties of materials and its testing and
need for heat treatment process in materials.
4. To understand the concept of phases and to construct the equilibrium diagrams, Fe-Fe3C phase
diagram and TTT diagrams
5. To recognize the properties and applications of nonmetallic materials and Ferrous materials.

Text Books:
1. W. Callister, “Materials Science and Engineering”, Wiley, 7th Edition, 2007.
2. S. H. Avner, “Introduction to physical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill Education, 2nd Edition,
2007.

References:
1. George E. Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy, SI Metric Edition McGraw Hill Book Company,
London.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 70 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech II Year I Semester

18ENG201 ENGLISH COMMUNICATION - SPEAKING & LISTENING


LABORATORY

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: 18ENG101 0 0 3 1.5

Course Description:
As the students are being exposed to the global language ‘English; it has become a widespread
need. This course builds on what was offered in the first semester and facilitates deeper
understanding into the mechanics of the English language, especially in regard to two particular
skills, i.e. Listening and Speaking. This course is offered in order to help students cultivate and
nurture a mind that “thinks in English.” Intricate issues of pronunciation, modulation, timbre are
dealt with in regard to Speaking and also the sub-skills of Listening, thus the whole course is
entirely lab oriented.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to –
1. Hone in on their listening skills
2. Grasp the differences between native level and mother-tongue influenced pronunciation
3. Develop crucial speaking skills
4. Enhance vocabulary for greater communicative impact
5. Overall development of thinking in the English language

UNIT I: Listening; Understanding key vocabulary; Listening for main ideas; Listening in detail;
Syllable stress; Sentence stress; Presentation.
(12)

UNIT II: Vocabulary for important places (bank, library, restaurant, etc.); Prepositions for
places; Stress determiners (this & that); Intonation.
(12)

UNIT III: Using background knowledge; Collocations; Pronouncing clusters of consonants (e.g.
–gh, -ing, ph, ck); Mapping ideas; Pronunciation of phrases; Listening for opinion; Vocabulary
and collocations for jobs
(12)

UNIT IV: Listening for lecture organization; Text organization features; Phrases with make;
Evaluating and proposing ideas; Expressing attitudes
(12)

UNIT V: Identifying opposing viewpoints; Silent letters; Idioms; Fixed expressions; Phrasal
verbs (12)

Page 71 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, learners will be able to:

1. Listening with intent


2. Pronounce more fluently
3. Develop crucial thinking skills
4. Enhance vocabulary
5. Overall development in the English language

Suggested Reading/Textbook:
1. Sabina Ostrowska; Unlock 3 series(B1): Listening & Speaking; Published by: Cambridge
University Press.
Reference:
1. Gary Buck; Assessing Listening; Cambridge University Press, 2010.
2. Adrian Doff, Craig Thaine, Herbert Puchta, et al; Empower: Upper Intermediate (B2+);
Published by: Cambridge University Press.
3. Josh Sreedharan; The Four Skills for Communication; Cambridge University Press,
2014.
4. William Strunk Jr; The Elements of Style; ITHACA, N.Y.; W.P. HUMPHREY, 2006.
5. Joseph Devlin; How to Speak and Write Correctly; ITHACA, N.Y.; W.P. HUMPHREY,
2006.

6. Miles Carven; Listening Extra; Cambridge University Press, 2008.


7. Jayashree Mohanraj; Speak Well; Orient Blackswan, 2013.
8. F. Kipple; Keep Talking; Cambridge University Press, 2013.
9. www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/
10. https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/english-grammar
11. https://www.rong-chang.com/

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination

Page 72 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year I Semester

18ME202 MATERIALS SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING LABORATORY


L T P C
Course Prerequisite: None 0 0 3 1.5

Course Objectives:
The objective of this course is to expose the students to a broad knowledge of experimental and
analyzing techniques useful in Mechanical as well as a metallurgical engineering field. The
subject introduces the correlation of properties of materials and their structure. It revises student’s
knowledge of crystal structure and phase diagrams of various alloy systems. This laboratory
course offers practical knowledge of heat treatment applicable to ferrous materials and studies
microstructural changes and hardness evaluation.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Preparation and study of the micro-structure of various cast irons: White Cast Iron, Gray Cast
Iron, Ductile Cast Iron and Malleable Cast Iron
2. Preparation and study of the micro-structure of metals like Iron, Al and their alloys and
measurement of grain sizes.
3. Preparation and study of the microstructure of low carbon steels, Medium carbon and high
carbon steels.
4. Experimentally analyzing the effect of quenching mild steel in air, water and oil on the
hardness of the materials.
5. Experimentally analyzing the microstructure and hardness of various heat treatment process
for steel: Annealing, Normalizing and Quenching.
6. Experimentally analyzing the hardenability of the mild steel by Jominy End Quench
Apparatus.
7. Experimentally analyzing the effect of work hardening on steel by hardness measurements
and its reversal by annealing.
8. Synthesis of Al2O3 pellet via powder metallurgy route, and microstructure study.
9. Synthesis of SiC single point lathe tool insert via powder metallurgy route.
10. Synthesis of Al – SiC Metal Matrix compounds via powder metallurgy process and
microstructure study.

Course Outcomes:
1. The student will obtain knowledge on the microstructural analysis of various metals and alloys
with regard to sample preparation via polishing and etching and use and analysis of optical
microscopy.
2. This lab enables the student to select an analytical technique to evaluate and analyze the
samples.
Students learn to use the instruments and get exposed to specimen preparation, validation
of the instrument, precise use of an instrument to accurately estimate the given samples.
3. Ability to perform different heat treatment operation and characterize the microstructure
4. Perform simple calculations to qualify materials properties and microstructural
characteristics.
5. Synthesis of various ceramic and MMC via powder metallurgy.

Page 73 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Text Book:
1. Lab manual provided by the department

References:
1. Brandon D. G, “Modern Techniques in Metallography”, VonNostrand Inc. NJ, USA, 1986.
2. Prabhudev. K. H. “Handbook of Heat Treatment of Steels”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co., New Delhi, 1988
3. Sydney H. Avner, “Introduction to Physical Metallurgy”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
1997.
4. William D. Callister, “Materials Science and Engineering” John Wiley and Sons, 8th Edition,
2009.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 74 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year I Semester

18ME203 3-D MODELING LABORATORY


L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course Prerequisite: Engineering Graphics

Course Description:
The course is about the theory and technique of three-dimensional (3D) modeling utilizing
appropriate software. Topics include the creation and modification of 3D geometric shapes; and
rendering techniques; and use of camera light sources, texture, and surface mapping.

Course Objectives:
1. During the term of the course, students will learn to work within virtual 3-D space.
2. Build volumetric objects including: vertices, splines, polygons, primitive shapes and Sub
Patch geometry.
3. Students will use these tools to build complex objects then learn the basic 3-D rendering
tools and techniques.
4. The student will able to produce 2D drawing from the 3D part geometry to assure the
proper dimensioning of the parts.
5. To make the students to understand and draw assemblies of machine parts and to draw
their sectional views.

List of Experiments

1. Introduction to 3D modelling
3. Modelling of screw threads, keys and Fasteners
4. Assembly of Sleeve and Cotter Joint
5. Assembly of Socket and Spigot Joint
6. Assembly of Shaft Coupling
7. Assembly of Gib & Cotter Joint
8. Assembly of Knuckle Joint
9. Assembly of Universal Joint
10. Assembly of Screw Jack
11. Assembly of Plummer Block
12. Assembly of Simple Eccentric
13. Assembly of Machine Vice
14. Drafting

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Identify of different types of bolts, nuts, welding joints screw threads, keys and fasteners.
2. Visualize and prepare detail drawing of a given object.
3. Draw details and assembly of mechanical systems.
4. Read and interpret given drawing.
5. Create 3-D models using any standard CAD software.

Text Books:
Lab manual provided by the department

Page 75 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

References:
1. Gopalakrishnan K.R, “Machine Drawing”, Subhas Stores, 2007

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 76 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech II Year II Semester

Page 77 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech II Year II Semester

18HUM101 ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING FOR ENGINEERS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
The Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting aims to provide an insight into production,
cost analysis, market structure, Accounting Basic concepts and financial Statement Analysis. The
course is designed to give emphasis on the application of real life examples on various
fundamental issues of economics and accounts. This course introduces the accounting system,
principles, types of accounts, and financial statements etc. The ratio analysis and financial
analysis are useful to know the position of financial statements. Funds flows statements and cash
flow statements are explained to know the analysis of financial matters.

Course Objectives:
The course is intended to
1. Describe the nature of engineering economics in dealing with the issues of scarcity;
2. Know the supply, demand, production and cost analysis to analyze the impact of
economic events on markets;
3. Explain the performance of firms under different market structures and Price
determination in various market conditions.
4. Explain the accounting principles, types of accounting and preparation of final accounts;
and
5. Describe the financial analysis through ratios, funds flow and cash flow statements.

UNIT I: DEMAND ANALYSIS


Scope and Significance of Economics- Understanding the problem of scarcity and choice -
Elements of market Economy: Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium- Theory of Demand,
Elasticity of Demand, Supply and Law of Supply. (10)

UNIT II: PRODUCTION AND COST ANALYSIS


Production Function – Short-run and long- run production – Cost Analysis: Cost concepts - Cost
Structure of Firms and output decision- Break-Even Analysis (BEA) – Managerial significance
and limitations of BEA - Determination of Break Even Point (Simple Problems).
(9)
UNIT III: MARKET STRUCTURE:
Classification of Markets - General Equilibrium and efficiency of Perfect competition, Monopoly,
Monopolistic, Oligopoly, Duopoly – Price determination and various market conditions
(8)

UNIT IV: BASICS OF ACCOUNTING:


Uses of Accounting - Book Keeping Vs Accounting - Double Entry System - Accounting
Principles - Classification Of Accounts - Rules Of Debit & Credit. Accounting Cycle: Journal,
Ledger, Trial Balance. Final Accounts: Trading Account - Profit & Loss Account - Balance Sheet
with Adjustments, (Simple Problems). (9)

Page 78 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: BASICS OF FINANCIAL ANALYSIS


Ratio Analysis - Liquidity, Leverage, Solvency and Profitability Ratios - Interpretation of
Financial Statements - Funds Flow Statement - Capital Budgeting (9)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand Engineering economics basic concepts,
2. Analyze the concepts of demand, elasticity, supply, Production, Cost Analysis and its
essence in floating of an organization,
3. Compare different market structures and identify suitable market,
4. Demonstrate an understanding and analyzing the accounting statements, and
5. Demonstrate the ability to apply knowledge of accounting concepts through Financial
Statements Analysis.

Text Books:
1. Case E. Karl & Ray C. Fair, “Principles of Economics”, Pearson Education, 8 th Edition,
2007
2. Financial Accounting, S.N.Maheshwari, Sultan Chand, 2009
3. Financial Statement Analysis, Khan and Jain, PHI, 2009
4. Financial Management, Prasanna Chandra, T.M.H, 2009

References:
1. Lipsey, R. G. & K. A. Chrystal , “Economics”, Oxford University Press, 11th Edition,
2007
2. Samuelson P. A. &Nordhaus W. D. “Economics”, Tata McGraw-Hill 18th Edition, 2007
3. Financial Management and Policy, Van Horne, James,C., Pearson ,2009.
4. Financial Management, I.M.Pandey, Vikas Publications

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 79 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech II Year II Semester

18BIO101 LIFE SCIENCES FOR ENGINEERS


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Basic knowledge about sciences up to intermediate or equivalent level.

Course Description: The course deals with basic concepts of life sciences, its impact on human
& universe, biological systems and functions, human physiology and metabolism.

Course Objectives:
The course is intended to
1. Introduce the molecular basis of life.
2. Provide the basis for classification of living organisms.
3. Describe the transfer of genetic information.
4. Introduce the techniques used for modification of living organisms.
5. Describe the applications of biomaterials

UNIT – I: INTRODUCTION TO LIFE SCIENCES & LIVING ORGANISMS


Why we need to study Life Sciences? Comparison and differences of biological organisms with
manmade systems (Eye & Camera, Bird flying & Aircraft), Biological observations of 18th
Century that led to major discoveries. Classification of living organisms, Cellular basis of life,
differences between prokaryotes and eukaryotes, classification on the basis of carbon and energy
sources. (10)

UNIT – II: BIOMOLECULES & MACROMOLECULES


Molecules of life: Water, Sugars, Starch, Cellulose, Amino acids, Structure and functions of
proteins (primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary structure), Structure and functions of
nucleotides, nucleic acids, DNA (single and double strand) & RNA, hemoglobin, antibodies and
enzymes, Industrial applications of enzymes and Fermentation process. (8)

UNIT – III: HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY


Bioenergetics, Respiration: Glycolysis and TCA cycle, Electron transport chain and oxidative
phosphorylation, Human physiology, Neurons, Synaptic and Neuromuscular junctions. (8)

UNIT – IV: GENES, DNA & RNA


Mendel’s laws, gene mapping, Mitosis and Meiosis, single gene disorders in humans, Genetic
code, DNA replication, Transcription, Translation. Discuss the concept of complementation using
human genetics. Recombinant DNA Technology: recombinant vaccines, transgenic microbes,
plants and animals, animal cloning, biosensors, biochips. (9)

UNIT – V: METABOLISM
Thermodynamics as applied to biological systems. Exothermic and endothermic versus
endergonic and exergoinc reactions. Concept of Keq and its relation to standard free energy. ATP
as an energy currency. This should include the breakdown of glucose to CO2 + H2O (Glycolysis
and Krebs cycle) and synthesis of glucose from CO2 and H2O (Mechanism of Photosynthesis).
(10)

Page 80 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes
After studying the course, the student will be able to:
1. Explain the differences between biological organisms and manmade systems and classify
organisms
2. Interpret the relationship between the structure and function of proteins, nucleic acid and
summarize the industrial applications of biomolecules
3. Explain the mechanism of respiration
4. Demonstrate the mapping of genes and explain the medical importance of gene disorders.
5. Apply thermodynamic and kinetic principles to biological systems

Text books:
1. N. A. Campbell, J. B. Reece, L. Urry, M. L. Cain and S. A. Wasserman, “Biology: A
global approach”, Pearson Education Ltd, 2018.
2. Arthur T Johnson, Biology for Engineers, CRC press, 2011.
3. Cell and Molecular Biology by De Robetis and De Robertis.

Reference books:

1. Alberts Et. Al. The molecular biology of the cell, 6/e, Garland Science, 2014.
2. E. E. Conn, P. K. Stumpf, G. Bruening and R. H. Doi, “Outlines of Biochemistry”, John
Wiley and Sons, 2009.
3. John Enderle and Joseph Bronzino Introduction to Biomedical Engineering, 3/e, 2012.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 81 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year II Semester

18ME105 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: Engineering Mechanics 2 1 0 3

Course Description: Fundamental principles of stress and stains, Temperature relations;


Principal stresses and strains; Shear Forces and Moments diagrams for various types of beams
with different types of loads; Flexural Stresses and Deflection of Beams; Torsion, deflections due
to bending; Stability of equilibrium.

Course Objectives:
1. Student will understand the fundamental concepts of stress, strain and deformation of solids
with applications to bars and beams
2. Student will understand the theory of elasticity including strain/displacement Hooke’s law
relationships
3. Student will understand shear forces and bending moments in various beams with different
loads.
4. To create clear awareness to the student to concept of design of columns.
5. The knowledge of this subject will help in understanding the Design & Theory of Machines
courses

UNIT I: FUNDAMENTALS OF STRESSES & STRAINS


Simple Stresses & Strains : Elasticity and plasticity – Types of stresses & strains–Hooke’s law–
stress, strain diagram for mild steel, Working stress – Factor of safety, Lateral strain, Poisson’s
ratio& volumetric strain Elastic moduli & the relationship between them, Bars of varying section
,Factor of Safety – composite bars, Temperature stresses. Strain energy, Resilience, Gradual,
sudden, impact and shock loadings,
Principal Stresses: Principal Stresses, Strains with uniaxial and bi- axle conditions. Mohr’s circle
concepts, Mohr’s circle for uniaxial and bi- axle stresses (11)

UNIT II: SHEAR FORCE AND BENDING MOMENT


Shear Force and Bending Moment: Definition of beam – Types of beams, Concept of shear force
and bending moment. SF and BM diagrams for cantilever, simply supported and overhanging
beams subjected to Point loads, UDL, UVL and combination of these loads, Point of contra
flexure. Relation between S.F., B.M. and rate of loading at a section of a beam
(9)

UNIT III: FLEXURAL STRESSES & DEFLECTION OF BEAMS


Flexural Stresses: Theory of simple bending – Assumptions Derivation of bending equation: M/
I = f/y = E/R Neutral axis, Determination bending stresses – section modulus of rectangular and.
circular sections (Solid and Hollow), I, T, Angle and Channel sections, Design of simple beam
sections
Deflection of Beams: Introduction of deflection of beams, slope, deflection and radius of
curvature Differential equation, for the elastic line of a beam Double integration and Macaulay’s
methods Determination of slope and deflection for cantilever and simply supported beams
subjected to point load uniformly varying load. Mohr’s theorems (11)

Page 82 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT IV: TORSION


Torsion of Circular Shafts- Theory of pure torsion, Derivation of torsion equations; Assumptions
made in the theory of pure torsion Torsional moment of resistance- polar section modulus
(7)

UNIT V: BUCKLING
Introduction, elastic stability, Examples of instability, Elastic stability of flexible columns
(7)

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Estimate the principal stresses by analytical and Mohr’s circle.
2. Analyze the distribution of shear force and bending moment for various types of beams under
different load conditions.
3. Evaluate bending stresses in beams and calculate the deflection and slope of beams with
different types of load.
4. Design shafts for pure torsion.
5. Analyze the elastic stability of flexible columns.

Text Book:
1. Mechanics of Materials by Gere and Timoshenko, C B S Publishers & Distributors,
2ndEdition,2004.

Reference Books:
1. Mechanics of Materials by Ferdinand P. Beer and E.Russel Johnston, McGraw Hill
Education (India) publicationsEdition,2004.
2. Strength of Materials by S. Ramamrutham, Dhanpat Rai Publishers
3. Strength of Materials by R.K. Bansal, Laxmi Publishers, 5th Edition,2012.
4. Strength of Materials by R.K. Rajput, S.Chand& Company, 5 th Edition,2012.
5. Strength of Materials by Dr. Sadhu Singh, Khanna Publishers, 10th Edition,2013.
6. Mechanics of solids and structures by Dr. R. Vidyanathan and Dr. P. Perumal, Laxmi
Publishers

Mode of evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 83 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year II Semester

18ME106 MANUFACTURING PROCESS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
Manufacturing is the creation, through one or several processing operations, of components or
products from basic raw materials. The effectiveness of process selection will be based on the
inter-related criterion of design parameters, material selection and process economies.

Course Objectives:
1. Working principle of different metal casting processes and gating system.
2. Classification of the welding processes, working of different types of welding processes and
welding defects.
3. Nature of plastic deformation, cold and hot working process, working of a rolling mill and
types, extrusion processes.
4. Principles of forging, tools and dies, working of forging processes.
5. Classification, applications and manufacturing methods of plastics, ceramics and powder
metallurgy

UNIT 1: METAL CASTING PROCESS


Casting & Moulding Process: Introduction to casting process, principles of gating, gating ratio,
function and types of risers, defects in casting. Die casting – Types of die casting, centrifugal
casting & Investment casting, and stir casting. Melting Furnaces: Induction furnace, Electric arc
furnace, and cupola furnace. Testing of cast products (8)

UNIT 2: METAL JOINING PROCESS


Fabrication methods, general considerations, type of joints, edge preparations, type of welding
process, electric arc, gas welding, bracing, soldering, inert gas welding, special type of welding
– resistance welding, spot welding, thermit welding, plasma arc welding laser beam welding, TIG
and MIG welding, submerged arc welding, friction stir welding, welding defects, Heat Affected
Zone, Non-destructive testing methods, and applications of welding.
(9)
UNIT 3: SHEET METAL PROCESS
Introduction, Shearing, sheet metal characteristics and formability, blanking, piercing, forming,
bending, drawing, deep drawing, spinning, rubber forming, hydro forming, superplastic forming,
hot stamping, stretch forming, calculation of forces, spring back, progressive die, compound die,
combination die, working of mechanical press, hydraulic press.
(8)

UNIT 4: Bulk Deformation Process.


Forging – Introduction hot forging and cold forging, open die forging, impression die forging,
closed die forging, upset forging, extrusion forging, calculation of forces.
Extrusion –Introduction – Hot extrusion, backward and forward extrusion, cold extrusion,
extrusion defects, impact extrusion, design of extrusion dies, design considerations, extrusion
equipment, and application of extrusion.

Page 84 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Rolling –Introduction – Flat rolling, friction forces, roll force and power requirements, different
types of rolling process, defects in rolling, Types of rolling mills, die design and design
considerations, calculation of roll force, torque and horse power, Application of rolling.

Drawing – Introduction – Calculation for drawing force, wire drawing, flat drawing, lubrication,
die design for drawing, drawing process, die design, die materials, defects, residual stresses, types
of drawing equipment, Application of drawing, advantages and limitations, calculation of draw
stress and force. (11)

UNIT 5: POWDER METALLURGY


Introduction – Characteristics of engineering powders, particle size, distribution, packing,
density, porosity, surface area etc. Production of metallic powders –atomization, chemical
reduction, electrolysis, conventional pressing and sintering, secondary operation, sintering
techniques, isostatic pressing, powder injection molding, power rolling, application of powder
metallurgy (9)

Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1. Selection of suitable manufacturing process for a given product by pattern making, design of
gating systems, preparation of molding and poring of molten metal for casting and defects
etc.
2. Selection of metal joining process for different metal using different welding techniques and
production of defect free products.
3. Production of components on sheet metal by using processes like blanking, piercing, forming,
bending, deep drawing process.
4. Compare cold working and hot working processes using rolling, extrusion process, rolling
and drawing process.
5. Making products from powder form by employing different techniques.

Text Books:

1. Kalpakjain S and Schmid S.R., Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, 7/e, Pearson,
2018.
2. Rao P.N., Manufacturing Technology – Volume I, 5/e, McGraw-Hill Education, 2018.

Reference Books:

1. Millek P. Groover, Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing: Materials, Processes and


Systems, 4/e, John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2010.
2. Sharma P.C., A Text book of Production Technology, 8/e, S Chand Publishing, 2014.
3. Ian Gibson, David W. Rosen, Brent Stucker, Additive Manufacturing Technologies:
Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing, 1st Edition, Springer, 2010.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 85 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year II Semester

18ME107 THEORY OF MACHINES

L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Engineering Mechanics

Course Description:
The objective is to study the relative motion, velocity, and accelerations of the various elements in
a mechanism. In mechanical Engineering we come across number of mechanisms such as four
bar/slider crank/double slider crank/straight line motion mechanism etc. Mechanism deals with
only relative motions. Once we make a study considering for us also there it is called kinetics. The
course first deals with mechanisms, their inversions, straight line motion mechanisms etc. Study
of cams/gears are also introduced. Next, the course gives an insight into the basic concepts of
dynamic analysis of machines.

Course Objectives:
1. Introduce various basic mechanisms and their applications.
2. Familiarize velocity and acceleration in mechanisms.
3. Describe the cams and follower motions and importance of balancing.
4. Explain the importance of gyroscopic couples, gears and gear trains.
5. Introduce the equation of motion for single degree of freedom system

UNIT I: SIMPLE MECHANISMS


Classification of mechanisms – Basic kinematic concepts and definitions – Degree of freedom,
mobility – Grashof’s law, kinematic inversions of four bar chain and slider crank chains- Limit
positions – Mechanical advantage- Transmission angle- Description of some common
mechanisms- Quick return mechanism, straight line mechanisms- Universal Joint – Rocker
mechanisms. (9)

UNIT II: VELOCITY ANALYSIS


Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis of simple mechanisms, graphical velocity
analysis using instantaneous centers, velocity and acceleration analysis using loop closure
equations-kinematic analysis of simple mechanisms-slider crank mechanism dynamics-
Coincident points-Coriolis component of acceleration. (8)

UNIT III: GYROSCOPE & GEAR PROFILE


Gyroscope: Principle of gyroscope, gyroscopic effect in an aeroplane, ship, car and two wheeler,
simple problems
Gear Profile: Involute and cycloidal gear profiles, gear parameters, fundamental law of gearing
and conjugate action, spur gear contact ratio and interference/undercutting-helical, bevel, worm,
rack & pinion gears, epicyclic and regular gear train kinematics. (9)

UNIT IV: BALANCING & CAMS


Balancing of Rotating masses: Need for balancing, balancing of single mass and several masses
in different planes, using analytical and graphical methods
Cams: Classification of cams and followers- Terminology and definitions- Displacement
diagrams- Uniform velocity, parabolic, simple harmonic and cycloidal motions- derivatives of

Page 86 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

follower motions-cam profile- specified contour cams- circular and tangent cams- pressure angle
and undercutting. (10)

UNIT V: VIBRATIONS
Introduction, degree of freedom, types of vibrations, free natural vibrations, Newton method and
energy method for single degree of freedom. Damped vibrations- under damped, critically
damped; and over damped systems, forced vibrations with and without damping in single degree
of freedom; Vibration isolation and transmissibility, Torsional vibrations - two and three rotor
systems. (9)

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Identify the different mechanisms and their inversions in real life applications.
2. Calculate the velocity and acceleration of simple mechanisms by graphical methods.
3. Analyse the effects of gyroscopic couple in ships, aero planes & automobiles and classify
gears and gear trains and compute velocity ratio.
4. Estimate the unbalance mass in rotating machines using analytical and graphical methods and
able to sketch the cam profiles for different follower motions.
5. Analyse free and forced vibrations of single degree freedom systems to avoid resonance.
Understand different mechanisms and their inversions.

Text Book:
1. S.S.Rattan ,Theory of Machines, 4/e, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2014

Reference Books:
1. F. Haidery, Dynamics of Machines, 5/e, Nirali Prakashan, Pune, 2003
2. J.E.Shigley, Theory of Machines and Mechanisms, 4/e, Oxford, 2014
3. P.L.Ballaney, Theory of Machines & Mechanisms, 25/e, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2003.
4. Norton, R.L., Design of Machinery - An introduction to Synthesis and Analysis of
Mechanisms and Machines, 2/e, McGraw Hill, New York, 2000.
5. William T. Thomson, Theory of vibration with applications, 4/e, Englewood Cliffs, N.J. :
Prentice Hall, 1993.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 87 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year II Semester

18ME108 FLUID MECHANICS & HYDRAULIC MACHINERY

L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Partial Differential Equations

Course Description:
Modelling and predicting the behaviour of fluid flow is an important part of many scientific and
technological problems. Flow of fluid is an important aspect of atmospheric and oceanic
circulation, combustion in engines, biological processes such as the flow of blood. From the days
of Isaac Newton to the present day world, considerable progress has been made in the
mathematical modelling of fluid flow. With the advent of enhanced computational ability,
computational fluid dynamics has played a major role in solving complex fluid flow problems. In
this course, the students are introduced to various fluid properties and to model fluids at rest. Flow
of fluids is introduced to the students in two forms, namely, the Lagrangian and the Eulerian form.
Eventually, both the integral and differential form of the governing equations of fluid dynamics
are derived. Flow of fluids in closed conduits and over various geometries is also introduced.
Basic design of hydraulic turbines and pumps are introduced to the students.

Course Objectives:
1. To provide a basic understanding of the properties and behavior of matter (fluids) by means
of analytical equations.
2. To develop an understanding about hydrostatic law, principle of buoyancy and stability of a
floating body and application of mass, momentum and energy equation in fluid flow.
3. To determine the losses in a flow system, flow through pipes, boundary layer flow and flow
past immersed bodies.
4. Determine the force applied by a jet on stationary and moving vanes.
5. To understand the working principle of hydraulic machinery like turbines and pumps.

UNIT I: FLUID PROPERTIES AND KINEMATICS OF FLUID FLOW


The Concept of a Fluid, Classification of fluid flows, System & Control volume, Density, Specific
gravity, Thermodynamic Properties of a Fluid, Viscosity, Surface Tension, Capillarity, Vapor
pressure and Cavitation. Lagrangian and Eulerian descriptions, material derivative, velocity and
acceleration field, streamlines, path lines and streak lines.
Fluid statics: Barometer and atmospheric pressure, Manometry, Buoyancy and stability (9)

UNIT II: GOVERNING EQUATIONS OF FLUID FLOW


Reynold’s transport theorem, Integral form of the conservation of mass for moving or deforming
control volumes and steady flow processes, Integral form of Energy equation, Integral form of
linear momentum equation, Integral form of angular momentum equation. Derivation of the
Bernoulli equation (8)

UNIT III: INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL FLOW


Laminar and Turbulent flows, Entrance region, Laminar flow in pipes, Turbulent flow in pipes,
Minor and Major losses. Orifice meter and Venturimeter.
Flow over flat plate, Boundary layer equations, Displacement, Momentum and Energy
thicknesses, Momentum integral technique for boundary layers, Boundary layers with pressure
gradients. (9)

Page 88 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT IV: IMPACT OF JET VANES & HYDRAULIC TURBINES


Hydrodynamic force of jet striking stationary and moving vanes, flat and curved vanes, jet
impinging centrally and tangentially.
Classification of hydraulic turbines- Impulse and reaction turbines; Basic equation of energy
transfer in rotodynamic machines, specific speed; Components of Pelton turbine, Velocity
triangles and power for Pelton turbine, Maximum efficiency of Pelton turbine; Types of reaction
turbines, Components of Francis turbine, Velocity triangles, power and efficiency of Francis
turbine. Kaplan turbine. (10)

UNIT V: HYDRAULIC PUMPS


Working principle and main parts of a centrifugal pump; Classification of centrifugal pumps;
Static and Manometric head of a centrifugal pump; Efficiencies of centrifugal pump.
Main parts and working of reciprocating pump; Discharge, work done and power required to drive
a reciprocating pump; Slip of a reciprocating pump; (9)

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:

1. Interpret the properties of fluids and their applications, determine differential


pressure using manometric principles, calculate the buoyant forces and estimate the
stability of floating and immersed bodies.
2. Distinguish between a system and control volume approach and will be able to use
the governing equations based on integral approach for solving fluid flow problems.
3. Have a clear understanding of internal flow physics and capable of estimating the
major and minor losses observed in pipe flows. Similarly, they will be able to assess
various flow parameters in external flows with and without pressure gradients.
4. Assess the forces acting on vanes with varied geometries and point of jet impact.
Further, they can differentiate different turbines and estimate the performance
parameters of various turbine used in hydraulic power plants.
5. Differentiate different pumps and calculate their performance characteristics.

Text Books:
1. Cengel, Y.A, Cimbala, John, M., “Fluid Mechanics, Fundamentals and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education; Third edition (1 July 2017)
2. B.K. Venkanna, “ Fundamentals of Turbomachinery”, PHI Learning Private Limited,2018

References:
1. R. K. Bansal, “A Textbook of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, Laxmi
Publications, Ltd., 2005
2. Robert W. Fox and Alan T. Mc Donald, “Introduction to Fluid Mechanics”, John Wiley
& Sons Private Ltd., 2009, 7th Edition.
3. James R. Welty, Charles E. Wicks and Robert E. Wilson, “Fundamentals of Momentum,
Heat and Mass transfer”, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) private limited., 2008, 5th Edition.
4. Frank M White, “Fluid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 7th Edition, 2012.
5. Milton Van Dyke, “An Album of Fluid Motion”, Parabolic Press, 12th Edition.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.
Page 89 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year II Semester

18ME204 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS LABORATORY


L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Objectives:
The objective of this course is to expose the students to a broad knowledge of experimental
methods and measurement techniques useful in Mechanical engineering.

Following is the list of experimental set ups on which experiments shall be conducted. Complete
modalities of operation of the laboratory such as the exact titles of experiments, reports
submission and evaluation methodology etc. shall be announced at the beginning of laboratory
session.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

MOS Practicals:
1. Rockwell Hardness Testing & Brinell Hardness Testing
2. Tensile Test
3. Impact Testing
4. Torsion Test
5. Bending test on
1.Simply supported beam
2. Cantilever beam
6. Test on springs.
7. Compression test on UTM
8. Double shear test on UTM

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Evaluate hardness value for various materials using Rockwell hardness tester
2. Plot the stress stain curve of a ductile material under tensile and compressive load using
universal testing machine
3. Calculate the slope and deflection of simply supported beam under point load
4. Experiment on a spring to interpret the stiffness and shear modulus.
5. Apply the concept of impact loading and to determine impact values for various materials.

Text Book:
Lab manual provided by the department

Reference Book:
1. Mechanics of Materials by Gere and Timoshenko, C B S Publishers & Distributors,
2ndEdition,2004.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 90 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year II Semester

18ME205 DYNAMICS & ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course Prerequisite: Electrical Engineering Laboratory
Course Objectives:
1. To equip students with understanding of the fundamental principles and techniques for
Identify different types of dynamic systems and classify them by their governing equations
2. To develop a model of a mechanical system using a free body diagram
3. To develop equations of motion for translational and rotational mechanical systems
4. To develop an understanding of how property data is generated and reported.
5. To create a bridge between theoretical knowledge and application.

List of experiments - Dynamics Lab Practicals:


1. Study of gyroscopic effect and determination of gyroscopic couple
2. Watt governor
3. Proell governor
4. Porter governor
5. Hartnell governor.
6. Static and dynamic balancing of rotating masses
7. To verify the relation t = 2 π √l/g for a simple pendulum
8. Forced vibration of equivalent spring mass system
9. Longitudinal vibration
10. Torsional vibration of single rotor shaft system
11. Torsional vibration of two rotor shaft system
12. Single rotor system with viscous damping
13. Whirling speed of shaft
14. Determination of jump speed of cam-follower system

List of experiments – Electrical Machines Practicals:


1. Magnetization Characteristics of DC Shunt Generator. Determination of Critical Field
Resistance and Critical Speed.
2. Brake Test on DC Shunt Motor. Determination of Performance Curves.
3. Load Test on DC Compound Generator. Determination of Characteristics.
4. Hopkinson’s Test on DC Shunt Machines. Predetermination of Efficiency.
5. Fields Test on DC Series Machines. Determination of Efficiency.
6. Swinburne’s Test and Speed Control of DC Shunt Motor. Predetermination of Efficiencies.

Additional Experiments:
1. Load Test on DC Series Generator. Determination of Characteristics.
2. Retardation Test on DC Shunt Motor. Determination of Losses at Rated Speed.
3. Separation of Losses In DC Shunt Motor.

Page 91 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Estimate the frequency response of 1DOF systems.
2. State the mode shapes of the 1DOF forced vibration systems.
3. Describe the equations of motions of forced damped vibration systems both analytical
and graphical methods.
4. Analyze natural frequency of multi degrees of systems.
5. Describe the static and dynamic balancing of reciprocating engines.

Text Books:
Manual provided by the department

Reference Book:
1. S.S.Rattan ,Theory of Machines, 4/e, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 2014

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 92 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year II Semester

18ME206 MANUFACTURING PROCESS LABORATORY

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: None 0 0 3 1.5

Course Description:

Production Techniques practical lab contains Metal casting, Welding, Mechanical Press working
and processing of Plastics. These practical inculcates the skill to the students starting from
preparing a wooden pattern to completion of a casting which also comprises different Sand testing
techniques. Students will also get good skill on Welding and mechanical press working which
will be helpful to get an employment in Industries.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. METAL CASTING LAB:
a. Pattern Design and making - for one casting drawing.
b. Sand properties testing - Exercise -for strengths, and permeability – 1
c. Molding: Melting and Casting - 1 Exercise
2. WELDING LAB:
a. Arc Welding: Lap & Butt Joint - 2 Exercises
b. Spot Welding - 1 Exercise
c. TIG Welding - 1 Exercise
d. MIG welding – 1 Exercise
e. Brazing – 1 Exercise

3. MECHANICAL PRESS WORKING:


a. Blanking & Piercing operation and study of simple, compound and progressive press
tool.
b. Hydraulic Press: Operation – Forming exercise.
c. Bending and other operations.

4. PROCESSING OF PLASTICS:
a. Injection Molding
b. Vacuum forming.

Course Outcomes:

This practical course is designed to enrich practical knowledge about common production
techniques used in manufacturing. The students after completing the course will be able to:

1. Produce real time casting on their own


2. Prepare various joints by using various welding process
3. Perform blanking, piercing and forming operations on the sheet metal..
4. Prepare bottle with cape by using injection and vacuum forming.
5. Bend a pipe to the required angle.

Page 93 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Text Book:
1. Manual provided by the department

Reference Book:
1. Kalpakjain S and Schmid S.R., Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, 7/e,
Pearson, 2018.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 94 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester

Page 95 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. III Year I Semester

18ME109 ENGINEERING ANALYSIS

L T P C
2 0 2 3
Course Prerequisite: 18MAT101, 18CSE101, 18MAT107, 18MAT108

Course Description:
This course introduces the students to theory and practice of numerical analysis as it is applied to
solving engineering problems. The computational techniques used for problems like finding roots
of transcendental equations, solving systems of linear equations, determining eigen values,
interpolation, curve fitting, integration, differentiation and solving differential equations are
covered both through lectures as well as hands on practical sessions.

Course Objectives:
1. To introduce the basics of numerical analysis like Taylor Series, round off errors and
truncation errors.
2. To familiarize students with various numerical methods used in engineering problem
solving and their respective merits and demerits.
3. To train the students in writing computer codes using modern tools like Python or
MATLAB for applying numerical techniques to engineering problems.
4. To instruct the students on selecting appropriate numerical technique to for a given
engineering problem and apply it effectively.

UNIT I: BASICS AND NON-LINEAR EQUATIONS


Introduction to problem solving using numerical methods, Types of errors in numerical solutions,
Taylor Series.
Finding roots of non-linear equations using Fixed point iteration, Bi-section, Newton-Raphson,
and Secant methods. Convergence of these methods.
Newton’s Method for system of non-linear equations (9)

UNIT II: SYSTEM OF EQUATIONS AND EIGEN VALUE PROBLEMS


Solution of linear system of equations using Gauss elimination method, Pivoting, Gauss Jordan
method, Iterative methods of Gauss Jacobi and Gauss Seidel
Eigenvalues of a matrix by Power method and Jacobi’s method for symmetric matrices (8)

UNIT III: INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION


Polynomial Interpolation-Lagrange's interpolation–Newton’s divided difference
Piecewise interpolation–quadratic and cubic Splines
Curve Fitting – Least square regression for linear and non-linear curve fitting.
Fourier Transform – DFT (8)

UNIT IV: NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION


Approximation of derivatives using finite differences, Richardson extrapolation and derivatives
by interpolation.
Numerical integration using Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3 rule, Romberg’s Method, Two point and
three-point Gaussian quadrature formulae, Evaluation of double integrals by Trapezoidal and
Simpson’s 1/3 rules. (10)

Page 96 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS


Euler’s method, Modified Euler’s method, Runge-Kutta methods (second order and fourth order)
and Adaptive Runge-Kutta methods for solving first order equations, Multi step methods).
Shooting method and finite difference method for boundary value problems. Introduction to
solving Partial Differential Equations (10)

Course Outcomes:
1. Solve non-linear equations using appropriate numerical methods like bisection method,
Newton-Raphson method etc.
2. Solve a system of linear and non-linear equations using iterative or direct techniques.
3. Select and apply suitable methods for approximation of functions using techniques like
interpolation, curve fitting etc.
4. Evaluate numerical integration and differentiation using numerical methods.
5. Solve initial and boundary value problems in ODEs using appropriate methods.

Textbooks:
1. Steven Chapra, Applied Numerical Methods with MATLAB for Engineers and Scientists,
McGraw Hill Education, 3rd edition.
2. Jaan Kiusalaas, Numerical Methods in Engineering with Python, Cambridge University
Press, 3 edition.

References:
1. Numerical Methods for Engineers; Steven C. Chapra and Raymond P. Canale, 7th edition,
McGraw Hill, 2014.
2. Introduction to Numerical Analysis, S.S. Sastry; Prentice Hall of India, 2012.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 97 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. III Year I Semester

18ME110 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: None 2 1 0 3

Course Objectives:
1. To study fundamental concepts of Machine Design.
2. To analyze failure from static and fatigue loading.
3. To design bolted joints.
4. To design welded joints.
5. To design helical and Leaf springs.

UNIT I:
MACHINE DESIGN INTRODUCTION: General considerations of design, design process,
Preferred sizes, Selection of engineering materials, properties, Manufacturing considerations in
the design, Fits and Tolerance
DESIGN AGAINST STATIC LOAD: Factor of safety, Stress -Strain relation, Simple stresses,
Torsional and bending Stresses, Design of simple machine parts, Cotter Joint, Gib and Cotter
joint, Combined stresses, impact stresses. (10)

UNIT II:
VARIOUS THEORIES OF FAILURE: Maximum principal stress theory, Maximum shear stress
theory, Maximum Distortion energy theory.
DESIGN AGAINST FLUCTUATING LOAD: Stress concentration factors, Fluctuating stresses,
Endurance limit, Design for infinite and finite life, Goodman’s line Soderberg’s line.
(9)
UNIT III:
DESIGN OF THREADED JOINTS: Types of threaded joints, Terminology of Screw threads,
Analysis of bolted joints- Simple and eccentric loads, Torque requirement for bolt tightening.
(8)
UNIT IV:
WELDED JOINTS: Introduction to welding, Weld symbols, Stresses in Welded Joints, Design
of parallel and transverse fillet welds.
UNSYMMETRICAL WELDS: Axially loaded, Eccentric load and torsional loads in welds in
Torsion. (9)

UNIT V:
MECHANICAL SPRINGS: Types of springs, Spring materials, Stress and deflections of helical
Springs, Surge in springs, Examples based on simple analysis
LEAF SPRINGS: Multi leaf springs, Equalized stresses in spring leaves (nipping). (9)

Page 98 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course outcomes:
Student will be able to
1. Describe general design principles like design process, material selection, manufacturing
considerations, combined stresses, impact stresses, theories of failure, and factor of safety.
2. Evaluate simple components under cyclic loading using the concepts of stress concentration,
notch sensitivity, endurance limit and Goodman and Soderberg criteria.
3. Design bolted joints subjected to direct loading and eccentric loading.
4. Design welded joints subjected Torsion bending and axial loading.
5. Design helical and leaf springs for various applications with considerations of stress-
deflection relations and fatigue loading.

Text Book:
1. V.B. Bhandari, Design of Machine Elements, 4th edition, Mc Graw Hill Education (India),
New Delhi.

Data Book:
1. V.B. Bhandari, Design of Machine Elements, 4th edition, Mc Graw Hill Education (India),
New Delhi.

References:
1. Budynas R. G. and Nisbett J. K. Shigley’s Mechanical Engineering Design, McGraw Hill, 9th
SI Edition, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Norton Robert L., Machine Design: An Integrated Approach, Second Edition, Pearson
Education Asia, New Delhi, 2001.
3. Hall A. S., Holowenko A. R. and Bennett M. D., Machine Design, McGraw Hill (Schaum’s
Outline Series), (SI Units), New Delhi, 2008.
4. M. F. Spotts, Design of Machine Elements, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 99 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. III Year I Semester

18ME111 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Production Technology

Course Description:
The main objectives of this course are to present advanced information about metal cutting
theory to students and to enhance the students' knowledge in production technology. The
course includes basic concepts and definitions, tool materials, chip formation, mechanics of
metal cutting, cutting forces, heat generation and dissipation, tool life, cutting fluids, surface
roughness, machining process planning, machining economy and introduction of Automation.

Course Objectives:
1. Provide the basic concepts in mechanics of metal cutting, chip formation, various tool
materials and tool life.
2. To train the students in the metal cutting domain so as to equip themselves with adequate
knowledge about the various operations such as turning, shaping, planning, drilling, milling
and grinding machines.
3. To apply knowledge to calculate the machining parameters for different machining processes
and economics.
4. To develop fundamental knowledge on Advanced machining process.
5. To evaluate the machining cost during turning operation.

UNIT -I: THEORY OF METAL CUTTING


Overview of metal cutting, chip formation, chip thickness ratio, shear angle and its relevance,
orthogonal and oblique cutting processes, types of chips, chip breakers, forces and energy
calculations (merchant’s analysis), power consumed, tool wear, tool life, tool materials, cutting
fluids, numerical problems. (9)

UNIT -II: MACHINE TOOLS AND MACHINING OPERATIONS


Turning, Milling, Planing, Shaping, Broaching, Sawing, Filing, Hole making operations: Drilling,
Reaming, Boring, Tapping, Machining time calculations, High speed machining.
(8)
UNIT -III: ABRASIVE MACHINING PROCESSES
Mechanics of grinding, effect of grinding conditions on wheel wear and grinding ratio, cutting
conditions, temperature, power, specifications of grinding wheel, application considerations in
grinding, grinding operations, machining time, numerical problems, honing, lapping,
superfinishing, polishing and buffing. (9)

UNIT-IV: ADVANCED MACHINING PROCESSES


Need for advanced machining processes, classification, EDM, ECM, UM, AJM, LBM, EBM,
IBM, CM - Process principle and mechanism of material removal, Process Parameters, Process
Capabilities, Applications, Operational characteristics, Limitations. (9)

Page 100 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT-V: ECONOMICS IN MACHINING AND AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGIES


Economic considerations in machining, cost of single pass turning operation, optimum cutting
speed in turning for minimum cost, optimum cutting speed in turning for maximum production
rate & profit rate, numerical problems. Introduction about Automation fundamentals, Adaptive
control, Computer Numerical Control, Industrial Robotics, Sensor Technology
(10)

Course outcomes:
Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Evaluate the cutting forces, power and specific energy and tool life in machining
2. Identify and select suitable machining operations for specific applications
3. Identify and select suitable abrasive machining processes for surface finishing of components
4. Select an advanced machining process based on the effect of various process parameters on
the required performance criteria.
5. Evaluate cutting speed to minimize production cost and maximize production rate and
understand the recent developments in Automation.

Textbooks:
1. Groover, Mikell P., Fundamentals of Modern manufacturing: materials, processes and
systems, 4th ed. John Wiley & sons, INC, 2010.
2. S. K. Hajra Choudhury, Nirjhar Roy, Elements of Workshop Technology: Machine Tools
(Vol - 2), A. K. Hajra Choudhury, Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
3. Serope Kalpakjian and Steven R. Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology,”
Pearson Education, 7/e, 2013, New Delhi.
4. R.K.Jain &S.C.Gupta, Production Technology, Khanna Publishers

Reference books:
1. Roy A. Lindberg, “Processes and Materials of Manufacture,” PHI, New Delhi, 2004.
2. P.N. Rao, Manufacturing & Technology: Foundry Forming and Welding, 3rd Ed.,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 101 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. III Year I Semester


18ME112 HEAT TRANSFER

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: 18ME103, 18ME108 2 1 0 3

Course Description:
Fundamental concepts of heat transfer; steady-state and unsteady-state heat conduction; analytical
and empirical relations for forced and free convection heat transfer; condensation and boiling;
heat exchanger analysis and design; and Heat transfer by radiation.

Course Objectives:
1. To elucidate the fundamental mechanisms of heat transfer
2. To teach the governing laws of heat transfer by conduction, convection and radiation
3. To train the students in using the analytical and empirical methods for estimating heat
transfer under different conditions.
4. To explicate the rudimentary aspects in heat transfer with phase change.
5. To introduce different approaches for solving sizing and rating problems in Heat
Exchanger design

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION AND STEADY ONE-DIMENSIONAL CONDUCTION


Underlying physics and basic rate equations for conduction, convection and radiation modes of
heat transfer; Relationship to Thermodynamics, Thermal properties of materials, Heat conduction
equation in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinates; Boundary conditions and initial
conditions. Simplification of conduction equations for one dimensional steady state conduction;
Applications to plane wall, cylindrical shell and spherical shells, composite walls; Electrical
analogy and overall heat transfer coefficient; conduction with heat generation.
(9)

UNIT II: EXTENDED SURFACES AND TRANSIENT CONDUCTION


Heat transfer from extended surfaces; governing equation and analytical solutions for different
boundary conditions, performance and efficiency of fins. The Lumped heat capacitance model,
governing equation, Biot number; One dimensional transient heat flow: applications to semi-
infinite solid, plane slab, cylinders and spheres; Heisler charts. (9)

UNIT III: CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER


Thermal and velocity boundary layers, convection heat transfer coefficient, laminar and turbulent
boundary layers, boundary layer momentum and energy equations, non-dimensional parameters
and their significance, Correlations for forced convection problems involving flat plates,
cylinders; spheres and banks of tubes. Internal flows- mean velocity, mean temperature, entry and
fully developed regions, correlations for heat transfer in laminar and turbulent pipe flows. Natural
convection heat transfer on a vertical plate; governing equations, dimensionless numbers,
empirical relations for natural convection on plates, cylinders and spheres.
(9)

UNIT IV: BOILING, CONDENSATION AND HEAT EXCHANGERS


Non-dimensional numbers in heat transfer with phase change, Boiling heat transfer modes, pool
boiling, forced convection boiling, empirical correlations for boiling heat transfer, Condensation
heat transfer mechanism, condensation on a vertical plate and vertical cylinders, film
condensation inside horizontal tubes; dropwise condensation. Classification of heat exchangers,
Page 102 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

overall heat transfer coefficient, fouling factor, LMTD and NTU analyses of heat exchangers.
(9)

UNIT V: RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER


Physical mechanism of Radiation, radiation intensity, black body radiation, Planck’s distribution
law, Wein’s displacement law, Stefan Boltzmann law, Real surfaces, emissivity, absorptivity,
reflectivity and transmissivity, Kirchoff’s identity, grey surface, view factor between surfaces,
reciprocity relation, heat exchange between grey surfaces and black surfaces, electric network
analogy, radiation shields. Effect of participating media, Radiation combined with other modes
of heat transfer. (9)

Course Outcomes:
1. Estimate heat transfer rate due to conduction, convection and radiation under simple
conditions using Fourier’s Law, Newton’s Law, and Stefan-Boltzmann Law.
2. Calculate the temperature distribution and rate of heat transfer in one dimensional heat
conduction problems (Cartesian, polar and spherical coordinates) like composite walls,
cylinders, and extended surfaces.
3. Calculate temperature evolution in lumped and one-dimensional conduction systems using
Newton’s law of cooling, analytical methods and chart solutions.
4. Calculate the heat transfer and temperature distribution in external and internal fluid flow
problems using the principles of momentum and thermal boundary layer, bulk mean
temperature, mean temperature, phase change, Nusselt condensation theory and empirical
Nusselt number correlations.
5. Design an appropriate heat exchanger, like condenser, evaporator, radiator etc., for a given
heat transfer requirement using LMTD and NTU-𝜖 methods.
6. Calculate heat transfer due to radiation under certain conditions using the concepts of black
and grey bodies, shape factor and electrical network analogy.

Textbook:
1. F. P. Incropera & D. P. Dewitt, Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, John Wiley & Sons,
2001, 5th edition.

References:
1. Yunus Cengel, Heat and Mass Transfer: Fundamentals and Application, McGraw Hill
2. J.P. Holman, Heat Transfer, McGraw Hill, 2002, 9th Edition.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Internal Mid Examinations, External End Examination.

Page 103 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester

18ENG202 CORPORATE COMMUNICATION LABORATORY


L T P C
Course Prerequisite: 18ENG102 0 0 2 1

Course Description:
English is practical and it is a must for any institution to provide students with opportunities to
indulge in actively applying their language skills. Thus the Communication Skills Lab facilitates
students with adequate opportunities to put their communication skills in use. It also
accommodates peer learning by engaging students in various interactive sessions.

Course Objectives:
This course enables the student to
1. Develop their communicative competency
2. Focus on their interactive skills
3. Fortify their employability skills
4. Empower their confidence and overcome their shyness
5. Become effective in their overall performance in the industry

UNIT I: Listening & Speaking


Group discussion, Interview Skills, Presentation Skills, Role Plays, Small Talks, listening to and
understanding Lectures, News, Discussions, Debates, Theatre, Movies, etc. (9)

UNIT II: Reading & Writing


Reading a plethora of writing from Newspapers to Philosophical Treatise, Understanding Graphics,
Interpreting, Summarizing, Etc. (9)

UNIT III: Verbal & Non-verbal Aspects


Speaking- introducing oneself - exchanging personal information- Language development- ‘Wh’-
Questions- asking and answering-yes or no questions-asking about routine actions and expressing
opinions. (9)
UNIT IV: Storytelling & Conversations
Listening-short texts-formal and informal conversations-participating in conversations- short
group conversations- speaking about oneself- speaking about one’s friend. (9)

UNIT V: Business Environment & Etiquettes


Sharing information of a personal kind; greeting; taking leave; Writing e-mails, memos, reports,
etc. (9)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
1. Read articles from magazines and newspapers
2. Participate effectively in informal conversations.
3. Introduce themselves and their friends and express opinions in English
4. Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
5. Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.

Page 104 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Suggested Reading/Textbook:
1. Meenakshi Raman &Sangeetha Sharma; Technical Communication – Principles and
Practice (2nd Edition-2014); Oxford University Press –2014
2. Michael Swan & Catherine Walter; How English Work (9th Edition); Oxford University
Press - 2001

Reference:
1. Nutall J. C.; Reading Comprehension; Orient Blackswan
2. Jane Willis; Teaching English through English; Published by Longman Handbooks
3. www.cambridgeenglish.org/in/
4. https://learnenglish.britishcouncil.org/en/english-grammar
5. https://www.rong-chang.com/

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 105 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. III Year I Semester

18ME207 FLUID MECHANICS AND HYDRAULIC MACHINES LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course prerequisite: 18ME108

Course Description:
It is intended that the student would learn to use different techniques to measure discharge and
measure head losses through straight and bent pipes. He would also learn the performance
evaluation of centrifugal and reciprocating pumps along with Pelton Wheel and Francis turbine
Course Objectives:
1. To impart practical exposure on the performance evaluation methods of various flow
measuring equipment and hydraulic turbines and pumps.

Fluid Mechanics Practicals:


1. Calibration of Venturimeter
2. Calibration of Orificemeter
3. Impact of jet on vanes
4. Determination of friction factor for a given pipe line.
5. Determination of loss of head due to sudden contraction in a pipe line.
6. Turbine flow meter.
7. Flow through notches (Rectangular & V-type)
8. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem

Fluid Machines Practicals


1. Performance test on Pelton wheel.
2. Performance test on Francis turbine.
3. Performance test on Kaplan turbine.
4. Performance test on single stage centrifugal pump.
5. Performance test on multi stage centrifugal pump.
6. Performance test on reciprocating pump.

Course outcomes:
After completion of the course students will be able to
1. Verify the Bernoulli’s theorem for incompressible flows.
2. Determine the co-efficient of discharge for a flow measuring devices like
Venturimeter and Orificemeter.
3. Determine the co-efficient of vanes like flat and curved vanes.
4. Determine the performance and draw operating characteristic curves for Pelton
wheel, Reciprocating pump and Multi-stage Centrifugal pump.
5. Determine the loss of head in pipe lines due to friction, sudden contraction, enlargement,
bends and elbows.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 106 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. III Year I Semester

18ME208 MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course prerequisite: 18ME106

Course Description:
Parts manufactured by casting, forming, and various shaping processes often require further
operations before they are ready for use or assembly. This lab involves various machining
processes to remove some of material from the workpiece with machining allowances in order to
produce a specific geometry at a definite degree of accuracy and surface quality.

Course Objectives:
1. To familiar of construction and working principles of different machine tools.
2. To study and acquire knowledge on various basic machining operations in different machines.
3. To know the applications of machines in real life manufacturing of components.
4. To train the students for producing complex components using different machines.
5. To identify different types of chips produced during machining.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Study of construction, working principle and operations of general-purpose machines: Lathe,
drilling, milling, shaper, planer, slotter, surface grinder and tool and cutter grinder.
2. Job on step turning and taper turning on lathe machine.
3. Job on thread cutting and knurling on lathe machine.
4. Job on drilling and tapping.
5. Shaping a V- block on a given work piece using Shaping machine.
6. Keyway cutting using slotting.
7. Forming spur gear on a milling machine.
8. Grinding of single point cutting tool using tool and cutter grinder.
9. Grinding plane surface on a surface grinding machine.
10. Job on facing, turning, taper turning and chamfering operations on a CNC lathe machine.

Course outcomes:
After completion of the course students will be able to
1. Handle different machine tools and perform different operations.
2. Explain the field of application and working of various machines.
3. Differentiate conventional machines with CNC machines.
4. Fabricate various mechanical components by using different operations.
5. Understand the importance of surface finishing and material removal rate.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 107 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

Page 108 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18ENG102 ENGLISH COMMUNICATION - READING AND WRITING

L T P C
2 0 0 2
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
Students being exposed to the global language ‘English’ has become a widespread need. This
course builds on what was offered in the first semester and facilitates deeper understanding into
the mechanics of the English language, especially in regard to 2 particular skills, i.e. Reading and
Writing. This course is offered in order to help students cultivate and nurture a mind that “thinks
in English.” Intricate issues of understanding academic texts, vocabulary needed to comprehend
texts, evaluate, and analyze writing tasks, etc.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to –
1. Hone in on their reading skills
2. Cultivate critical reading and writing skills
3. Develop crucial comprehension of texts, graphs and graphics
4. Enhance vocabulary for greater communicative impact
5. Overall development in the English language

UNIT I:
Reading for main ideas; Applying background knowledge to predict content; Skimming;
Scanning; Making inferences; Understanding discourse (9)

UNIT II:
Identifying audience; Reading for detail; Using visuals; Academic vocabulary, collocations and
synonyms (9)

UNIT III:
Scanning to find crucial information; Using critical thinking to identify purpose; Previewing;
Topic related vocabulary; Writing an introduction; Essay structure; Descriptive paragraphs;
Writing a conclusion. (9)

UNIT IV:
Analyzing essay questions; Writing a problem-solution based on graphs and graphics;
Developing own ideas. (9)

UNIT V:
Writing cause-effect paragraphs; Evaluating diagrams; Brainstorming; Academic verbs and
topical language. (9)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, learners will be able to
1. Read and comprehend academic texts, graphs, diagrams and graphics
2. Develop crucial thinking skills
3. Write purposefully and effectively
4. Enhance vocabulary

Page 109 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

5. Overall development in the English language

Suggested Reading/Textbook:
1. Matt Firth; Unlock 3 series; Published by: Cambridge University Press

Reference:
1. Liz Driscoll; Reading Extra; Cambridge University Press – 2004
2. Graham Palmer; Writing Extra; Cambridge University Press – 2004
3. Writing Tutor; Advanced English Learners’ Dictionary, 9th Edition; Oxford University Press–
2012
4. https://www.nypl.org/blog/2012/11/28/11-great-free-websites-practice-english
5. www.readbrightly.com/6-great-websites-teen-writers/

Mode of evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 110 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. III Year II Semester

18ME113 CAD / CAM

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: Zeal to Learn 3 0 0 3

Course Description:
The CAD/CAM course provides an understanding, importance and relevance to the fundamentals
of design software usage and manufacturing processes for producing various products.

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the current viable cad hardware, software and fundamentals.
2. To learn graphics software.
3. To perform various CAD operations using software.
4. To learn basic understanding of Computer Numerical Controlled (CNC) machines,
5. To learn machining processes - milling and turning and write part programming using a
combination of G Codes and M codes.

UNIT I: CAD FUNDAMENTALS, SKETCHING, PART MODULE.


Fundamentals - Hardware (Computer Devices-CRT, Rastar Scan, Random Scan Techniques, etc)
Software (Solid Modelling, Solid Works, Catia, 3D Design Creo, etc). Introduction to Sketching,
Tools and Commands in Sketch. Using Sketcher tools, a component has to be drawn. Generating,
Editing and Modifying Drawings in CAD Software. Introduction to Part Module, Tools and
Commands in Part Module. Using Part tools, a component has to be drawn. Working with
Advanced Modeling tools (Sweep, Blend, Swept Blend). Generating, Editing and Modifying
Drawings in CAD Software (10)

UNIT II: ASSEMBLY MODELING, WIRE FRAME MODELING


Introduction to Assembly Modeling, Analytical Properties, Relational Properties and
Intersections, Data Transfer Formats. Generating, Editing and Modifying Drawings in CAD
Software. Introduction to Wire Frame, Surface Modeling and Sheet Metal features Components.
Introduction to CAD Data Exchange Formats-IGES, ACIS, DXF and STL, Geometric
Dimensions and Tolerances (GD&T) (8)

UNIT III: INTRODUCTION TO CAM, MACHINING CENTER


Introduction to – Manufacturing Systems and their performance analysis, Introduction to
automation, computer integrated manufacturing. Concepts of NC Systems, CNC Systems, DNC
Systems, Advantages, Disadvantages and Limitations , Components of NC, CNC, DNC Machines
- Types, Working and Importance of Slide Ways, Recirculating Ball Screw, Feedback devices
(Transducers, Encoders), Automatic Tool Changers (ATC), Automatic Pallet Changer (APC),
Spindle Drives, Axes Drives, Control Systems, Interpolations, Merits and Demerits, Machine
Structure – Requirements and reasons. (9)

UNIT IV: TOOLING


Tool- Pre-setting – Concept and Importance, Qualified Tools- Definition, Need and Advantages.
Tool holders and Changing Devices - Types and Applications. CNC- Turning and Milling
Centers: Types, Features, Axes Nomenclature, Specification, Work Holding Devices – Types,
Working and Applications. (8)

Page 111 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT- V: PROGRAMMING
Manual Part Programming, Computer Aided Part Programming - Definition and importance of
various positions like machine zero home position, work piece zero, and program zero,
programming format and structure of part program. ISO- G Codes and M-codes for turning and
milling meaning and applications of important codes. Simple and Complex part programming
for turning and milling using ISO format having straight turning, taper turning (linear
interpolation) and concave/ convex turning (circular interpolation), ISO format milling.
Importance, types and applications and format for 1. Canned Cycles, 2. Macro, 3. Do Loops, 4.
Subroutine. Need and Importance of various compensations: Tool length compensation, Tool
radius compensation, Pitch error compensation, Tool offset. Study of CNC VMC part
programming fundamentals and writing part program. Study of CNC – Turning part programming
fundamentals and writing part program. Study and demonstration of Die Sinking EDM. Study
and demonstration of RP Machine (10)

Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the engineering design process and its role in graphic communication process.
2. Use CAD software to generate and interpret a computer model - technical drawings of parts
and assemblies according to engineering design standards.
3. To demonstrate a basic and advanced understanding of NC, CNC and DNC strategies.
4. To demonstrate a basic understanding of machining fundamentals including speed and feed
calculations, tooling systems and work holding systems.
5. To demonstrate an ability to set-up, write part program using G- Codes and M- Codes to
machine parts for CNC milling and turning.

Text Books:
1. SOLIDWORKS 2020 Basic Tools Getting Started with Parts, Assemblies and Drawings,
Paul Tran SDC Publications.
2. SOLIDWORKS 2020 Reference Guide, David Planchard SDC Publications.
3. CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, Ibrahim Zeid and R. Sivasubramanian, Mcgraw Hill
Education.

Reference Books
1. CAD/ CAM Principles & Applications, Rao, P. N. TMH.
2. CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, R. Sivasubramaniam, TMH.
3. Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing, Lalit Narayan, PHI.
4. CAD/CAM: Concepts and Applications, Chennakesava R. Alavala, PHI.
5. CATIA V5-6R2019 for Designers, Sham Tickoo, Purdue University, CADCIM Technologies.
6. Mechanism Design Essentials in 3DEXPERIENCE 2016x Using CATIA Applications, Nader
G. Zamani.

Mode of evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 112 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. III Year II Semester

18ME114 THERMAL ENGINEERING


L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Description:
This course forms the basis for all further thermal engineering courses to build upon. Those being
– Steam and Gas turbines, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning, IC Engines etc. One can fully
understand and appreciate these courses better after a thorough study of thermal engineering

Course Objectives:
Specific objectives may be summarized as:
1. To expose the fundamentals of thermodynamics and to be able to use it in accounting for
the bulk behaviour of the sample physical systems.
2. To integrate the basic concepts into various thermal applications like IC engines, gas
turbines, steam boiler, steam turbine, compressors, refrigeration, and air conditioning.
3. To introduce students various conventional applied thermal systems and the
corresponding thermodynamic design procedures for each of these systems.

UNIT-I: BOILER, CONDENSER & COMPRESSOR


Boilers: Classifications and working of boilers, boiler mountings and accessories, Draught and
its calculations, air preheater, feed water heater, super heater. Boiler efficiency, Equivalent
evaporation. Boiler trial and heat balance.
Condenser: Classification of condenser, air leakage, condenser performance parameters.
Compressor: Classification and comparison, working principle, work of compression – with and
without clearance, Volumetric efficiency, Isothermal efficiency and Isentropic efficiency.
Multistage air compressor with Intercooling. Working principle and comparison of Rotary
compressors with reciprocating air compressors (9)

UNIT II STEAM TURBINES & NOZZLES


Steam Turbines : Classification of steam turbine, Impulse and Reaction turbines, Staging, Stage
and Overall efficiency, Reheat factor, Bleeding, Velocity diagram of simple and compound
multistage impulse and reaction turbines and related calculations, work done, efficiencies of
reaction, Impulse and reaction turbines, state point locus, Losses in steam turbines, Governing of
turbines, Comparison with steam engine.
Steam and Gas Nozzles: Flow through Convergent and convergent-divergent nozzles, variation
of velocity, area and specific volume, choked flow, throat area, Nozzle efficiency, Off design
operation of nozzle, Effect of friction on nozzle, Super saturated flow. (9)

UNIT-III REFRIGERATION & AIR-CONDITIONING


Refrigerants: Desirable properties, Common refrigerants used, Nomenclature
Refrigeration: Comparison of heat engine, heat pump and refrigerating machine, Unit of
refrigeration and C.O.P, Simple vapour compression refrigeration cycle, Representation cycle on
T-S, P-h and h-s charts, Effect of Subcooling and Superheating, Air refrigeration Cycle, Vapor
Absorption Cycle.
Air-Conditioning: Properties of moist air, Dry, wet bulb and Dew point temperature,
Psychrometric chart, Psychrometric processes in air conditioning equipment. (9)
Page 113 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT-IV GAS TURBINES & JET PROPULSION


Gas Turbine: Gas turbine classification, Brayton cycle, Principles of gas turbine, Gas turbine
cycles with intercooling, reheat and regeneration and their combinations, Stage efficiency,
Polytropic efficiency. Deviation of actual cycles from ideal cycles, Materials for Turbine.
Jet Propulsion: Introduction to the principles of jet propulsion, Turbojet and turboprop engines
and their processes, Principle of rocket propulsion, Introduction to Rocket Engine. (9)

UNIT -V INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES


I. C. Engines: Classification of IC engines, two stroke & four stroke, and SI & CI engines –
comparison, Ideal and actual: Valve and port timing diagrams, Performance analysis of I.C
Engines, Morse test, Heat balance.
Combustion: Combustion analysis, heating values, air requirement, Air/Fuel ratio, standard heat
of reaction and effect of temperature on standard heat of reaction, Combustion efficiency, heat of
formation, Adiabatic flame temperature, enthalpy of formation, enthalpy and internal energy of
combustion, Combustion in SI and CI Engine, Knocking phenomenon and control.
(9)

Course Outcomes:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
1. Apply thermodynamic concepts to solve the problems on different industrial engineering
components.
2. Understand the concept of steam turbines, nozzles and be able to solve the problems in
steam turbines and nozzles.
3. Learning the working principles of various refrigeration cycles and acquire knowledge
about the concept of psychrometry and various psychrometric processes for designing of
refrigeration and air-conditioning.
4. Apply thermodynamic concepts to design the gas turbines and jet propulsion.
5. Explain the functioning and features of IC engines, components, auxiliaries, Combustion
and evaluate the performance parameters of IC engines.
Text Books

1. Thermodynamics an engineering approach, by Yunus A. Cenegal and Michael A. Boles.


Tata McGraw hill Pub. Sixth edition, 2008.
2. R.K. Rajput, Applied Thermodynamics, 2nd Edition, Laxmi Publications.

Page 114 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

References:

1. M J Moran and H N Shapiro, Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics 3e, John


Wiley, 1995.
2. I.C Engines by Ganeshan.V. Tata McGraw Hill, 4rth Edition. 2012.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and External End Examinations.

Page 115 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18ME209 ADVANCED MANUFACTURING LABORATORY


L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course prerequisite: All types of machining process

Course Description:
The course work can show the prime importance of simulation software like ANSYS which
enables to confidently predict the behavior of the product for different conditions. The use of G
& M codes in CNC machines which are used in the manufacturing sector. Making products by
EDM process, product using 3D printing and refrigeration and air conditioning.

Course Objectives:
1. To gain practical experience in Programming software systems from Siemens and Fanuc
2. To gain the knowledge and hands on experience for writing and operating of programs for
CNC machines.
3. To gain knowledge and hands on experience in EDM m/c, Tribometer.
4. To learn knowledge and hands on experience on coding and operation of 3D printer
5. To have hands on experience on various experiments over Refrigeration & Air-Conditioning.

List of Experiments:

1) CNC lathe Machine:


Introduction of CNC lathe (Use G and M codes)
a. Programming for plain turning – facing, center drilling
b. Programming of step turning
c. Programming for step, taper and undercut process.
d. Programming for threading turning process.

2) CNC Milling machine:


Introduction to CNC Milling Machine (Use G code and M code)
a. Programming for up and down milling
b. Programming taper milling.
c. Programming for end milling.
d. Programming for profile milling

3) Electrical Discharge Machining


a. Study of Electric Discharge Machining.
b. Electric Discharge performance study on Material Removal Rate (MRR)
c. Identification of Process parameters and carbon deposition rate.
d. Analysis of Powder Mixed Electrical Discharge Machining and surface properties.

4) Pin on Disc Tribometer


a. Study of Pin on Disc Tribometer for Wear Measurement.
b. Identification of wear rate for various Loading Condition.
c. Analysis of velocity and its influence on velocity.
d. Wear rate variation under various environmental conditions.

Page 116 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

5) 3 D Printing
a. Part orientation and painting.
b. Support structure generation.
c. Types of in fill while printing.
d. Post processing of printed components.

6) Metal Forming:
Practical on Vacuum forming.
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the training, students will be able to write program and produce products.
1. Student should be able to Write part programs for lathe and milling operations.
2. Student should be able to do produce products using CNC machines.
3. Student will be able to make products by EDM process.
4. Student will be able to do wear analysis using Pin on Disc Tribometer
5. Student will be able to do product by 3D printing process.
Text Books:
1. Lab manual provided by the department.
Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 117 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18ME210 ROBOTICS LABORATORY


L T P C
0 0 3 1.5
Course Prerequisite: Basic programming Skills

Course Objectives:
The objective of this course is to provide an experiential based learning platform to practically
teach the concepts of IoT from basics to advanced by building projects and develop the skills
needed for an exciting career in IoT. By successfully completing the experiments in this
laboratory, the students would earn basic skills in making a robot move and control it using an
embedded program

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Assembling and connecting DC motors and motor drivers to the microcontroller and
controlling using Arduino
2. Connecting sensors to the microcontroller and data acquisition using Arduino
3. Developing smart irrigation system using the Arduino-Uno
4. Developing smart water monitoring system using the Arduino-Uno
5. Developing smart weather monitoring system using the Arduino-Uno
6. Developing smart building using IoT
7. Developing a line follower robot
8. Developing obstacle avoiding robot
9. Developing obstacle following robot using Arduino programming logic
10. Developing mobile controlled robot using Arduino programming logic
11. Developing gesture controlled robot using Arduino programming logic

Course Outcomes:
1. The student will be able to weather monitoring using IoT programming logic. Students will be
able to set up ThingSpeak App.
2. Students will learn the concepts and working of soil moisture sensor. They will be able to
interface soil moisture sensor with Arduino and reading data from soil moisture sensor.
students will also develop smart water monitoring using IoT.
3. Students will learn DTMF Decoder and its working and also detect DTMF tones using mobile
app programming logic for DTMF decoder
4. The student will be able to learn the placement and connection of IR sensors in Obstacle
Detection Robots using Arduino and develop an obstacle avoider robot using Arduino
programming logic
5. Students will learn accelerometers and their working. They will also learn to interface
accelerometer with Arduino programming logic for gesture robot

Page 118 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Text Book:

1. Lab manual provided by the department

References:
1. Richard Grimmett, “Arduino Robotic Projects”, PACKT Publishing Ltd.
2. Adeel Javed “Building Arduino Projects for the Internet of Things”, Apress 2016

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 119 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

Page 120 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II
18MAT301 ADVANCED NUMERICAL METHODS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Description

This course reviews and continues the study of computational techniques for evaluating
interpolations, derivatives and integrals; solving system of algebraic equations, transcendental
equations, ordinary differential equations and partial differential equations. The course
emphasizes on numerical and mathematical methods of solutions with appropriate error analysis.
The students use MATLAB as the computer language to obtain solutions to a few assigned
problems.

Course Objectives
1. To introduce computation methods of solving algebraic and transcendental equations.
2. To avail the basics of numerical techniques for solving the system of linear equations.
3. To familiarize the knowledge of interpolation and numerical calculus.
4. To use numerical calculus for solving ordinary differential equations.
5. To introduce the computational techniques for solving partial differential equations.

UNIT-I: Solutions of algebraic and Transcendental Equations


Introduction to MATLAB, errors, sources of errors, floating point arithmetic, significant digits,
relative error, propagation of errors, how to avoid loss of significant digits, evaluation of
polynomial.
Bisection method, False-position method, Secant method, Fixed-point iteration method,
Newton’s method – single and multiple roots, Order of convergence of the methods.
Exercises of Bisection method and Newton’s method through MATLAB
(9)

UNIT-II: Solutions of system of Algebraic Equations


Gaussian Elimination, LU decomposition, Thomas algorithm for the tridiagonal systems, Norms-
Euclidean, mini-maxi, Frobenius and 1-,2- and ∞-norms, Condition numbers and errors in
computed solutions. Jacobi’s method, Gauss-Seidel method, Power method for obtaining
eigenvalues and eigenvectors of matrices.
Exercises of Gaussian Elimination and Gauss-Seidel method through MATLAB
(9)

UNIT-III: Interpolation & Numerical Calculus


Existence and Uniqueness of interpolating polynomial, Lagrange polynomials, Divided
differences, Evenly spaced points, Error of interpolation, cubic spline, Inverse interpolation,
Derivatives from difference table, Higher order derivatives, Trapezoidal rule, Simpsons rule, a
composite formula, Gaussian Quadrature.
Exercises of Divided differences and Simpson’s rule through MATLAB

(9)

Page 121 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT-IV: Numerical Solutions to Ordinary Differential Equations


Taylor series method, Euler and Modified Euler’s method, Runge-Kutta methods for initial value
problems, Shooting method, Finite difference method for boundary value problems.
Exercises of Runge-kutta method and Shooting method through MATLAB
(9)

UNIT-V: Numerical Solution to Partial Differential Equations


Finite difference methods for one-dimensional Wave and Heat equations; Laplace and Poisson
equations (five-point formula).
Exercises of Finite difference method (forward, central and backward differentiation) and Crank-
Nicolson method through MATLAB
(9)

Course Outcomes
At the end of this course, students should be able to
1. Solve the system of algebraic and transcendental equations.
2. Apply the numerical techniques to find the solution to system of equations.
3. Calculate and analyze the rate of variations and numerical sum of such changes using
numerical calculus relevant to the field of Engineering.
4. Find the accurate numerical solutions to ordinary differential equations representing some
Engineering problems.
5. Compute the solutions for engineering problems represented by partial differential equations.

Text Books
1. Curtis F. Gerald, Patrich O. Wheatley, Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, 7 th
Edition, 2003.
2. S.S. Sastry, Introductory methods of numerical analysis, PHI, 4th Edition, 2005.

Reference Books
1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 35th Edition, 2010.
2. Burden and Faires, Numerical Analysis 7th ed., Thomson Learning, 2001.
3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics by E. Kreyszig, 10th ed., Wiley, 2010.
4. Applied Numerical Methods with MATLAB for Engineers and Scientists by Steven C.
Chapra, 3rd ed., Mc Graw Hill, 2012.
5. M.K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar and R.K. Jain, Numerical Methods for Scientific and Engineering,
New Age International Ltd., 5th Edition, 2010.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 122 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18MAT302 ENGINEERING OPTIMIZATION

L T P C
3 0 0 3

Course prerequisite:18MAT101,18MAT106, 18MAT104, 18MAT108, 18MAT109.

Course description: Unconstrained and constrained optimization, Linear programming problem,


transportation and assignment problems, dynamic programming problem, project management
and queuing models.

Course objectives:
1. Understand the optimization techniques for solving engineering problems.
2. Formulate and solve linear programming problem.
3. Obtain the optimal solution for transportation and assignment problems.
4. Avail knowledge to solvedynamic programming problem using recursive relations.
5. Analyze the techniques of project management and queuing models.

Unit 1: Classical optimization. (9)

Introduction to optimization, unconstrained optimization with single variable and multi variable.
Constrained multivariable optimization with equality constraints- Lagrange multipliers method,
constrained multivariable optimization with inequality constraints - Kuhn-Tucker conditions.

Unit 2: Linear programming problem. (9)

Linear Programming Problem (LPP), Mathematical formulation, graphical solution, simplex


method. Artificial variable technique - Big M-method and two phase simplex method.Duality,
dual Simplex method.

Unit 3: Transportation problem and assignment problem. (9)

Transportation problem: definition and algorithm, transshipment problem. Assignment problem,


travelling salesman problem.

Unit 4: Dynamic programming. (9)

Introduction, developing optimal decision policy, Dynamic Programming Problem (DPP) under
certainty, DPP approach for solving LPP.

Page 123 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Unit 5: Project management and Queuing models. (9)

Network analysis: Network representation, Critical Path Method (CPM) and Project Evolutionary
and Review Technique (PERT). Introduction to queuing system, single server queuing models
(M/M/1) :(∞/FCFS), (M/M/1): (N/FCFS).

Course outcomes:
At the end of the course the students should able to
1. Understood the importance of unconstrained and constrained optimization to solve
engineering problems.
2. Get an idea about the linear programming techniques.
3. Solve transportation andassignment problems in engineering situations.
4. Applythe Bellman principle of optimality to solvedynamic programming problem.
5. Analyze the problems of network analysis for project management and Queuing systems
engineering & industry.

Text Books:
1. J K Sharma, Operations Research: Theory and Practice, Macmillan Publishers India Ltd,
5th edition,2013.
2. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 43rd edition (2014), Khanna publishers.
References:
1. Hamdy A Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Pearson Education, 9/E, 2011.
2. FS Hillier and GJ Lieberman, Introduction to Operations Research, TMH, 8/E, 2006.
3. JC Pant, Introduction to Optimization: Operations Research, Jain Brothers, New, 6/E,
2004.
4. A Ravindran, DT Philips and JJ Solberg, Operations Research: Principles and Practice,
John Wiley& Sons, Singapore, 2ndedition.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Internal Mid Examinations, External End Examination.

Page 124 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18PHY301 OPTICAL PHYSICS AND ITS APPLICATIONS

L T P C

3 0 0 3

Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:

The course will cover Geometrical optics, Aberrations, Physical Optics, Diffraction and Optical
fibers.

Course Objectives:

1. Knowledge of basic principles and concepts in optics and the techniques used to deal with
them.
2. Explain the limitations associated with spherical and chromatic aberration
3. Describe optical systems such as microscopes and telescopes with reference to parameters
such as angular magnification and depth of field
4. Provide students with a working knowledge of optical physics, including interference,
diffraction and physical optics.
5. Introduce construction and concepts of basic fiber optic communication system and to make
the students learn about its important applications for societal needs.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION

Corpuscular and wave theory, Fermat’s principle, Matrices for translation, refraction and
reflection, Unit and nodal planes, Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors.
(9)

UNIT II: ABERRATIONS AND OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

Types of aberrations, Chromatic and monochromatic aberrations. Different types of


monochromatic aberrations. Simple and Compound microscopes, Astronomical and Terrestrial
telescopes. Ramsden’s and Huygens’ eye pieces.

(9)
UNIT III: WAVE OPTICS & INTERFERENCE

Huygens’s principle, Superposition of waves, Fourier transforms, representation of slits and


apertures, Two beam interference by Division of wave front. Applications of Interference,
Nonlinear interaction of light with matter (self-study).

(9)

Page 125 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT IV: DIFFRACTION & POLARISATION

Fraunhoffer diffraction, Diffraction from single slit, double slit & multiple slits, Fresnel half-
period zones, Zone plate, Applications of diffraction, Polarization, Malus’ law, double refraction.
Applications of polarization.

(9)
UNIT V: FIBER OPTICS

Construction and working principle of optical fibers, Numerical aperture and acceptance angle,
Types of optical fibers. Attenuation and losses in optical fibers, Analog and Digital optical fiber
communication system. Applications of optical fibers in communications, sensors and medicine.

(9)

Course Outcomes:

Upon completion of this course the students shall be able to:

1. Recollect the fundamental characteristics of light and their mathematical principles.


2. Learn the principles of superposition, Interference and Diffraction
3. Understand nonlinear optics and photonics phenomena.
4. Be exposed to the application of optical techniques in cutting edge research areas.
5. Describe the basic laser physics, working of lasers and principle of propagation of light in
optical fibers.

Text Book:

1. Optics by Ghatak, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill (2011).

Reference Books:

1. Optics by Lipson, Lipson & Lipson, 4th Edition, Cambridge Univ Press (2010).
2. Optics by Hecht, 4th Edition, Addison-Wesley (2002).

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 126 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II
18PHY302 LASER PHYSICS AND ADVANCED LASER TECHNOLOGY
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Basic knowledge of atomic structure at intermediate (10+2) level is
sufficient

Course Description:
Laser usage is rampant in various technological applications. Several fields gaining attention in
the usage of lasers. This course covers the introduction to the theory and mechanism of laser
action, various types of lasers and their applications and future use.

Course Objectives:
1. Make the student to understand the detailed principles of various lasers.
2. Profound understanding of different variety of lasers will provide them to think of superior
selection and usage of lasers in practical technological applications.
3. Students are aware of latest developments in certain areas of Laser technology which have
important applications for societal needs.
4. Explain how material processing is accomplished with lasers. Estimate laser operation
parameters for material processing.
5. Exposure about Lasers applications in engineering, communications, spectroscopy and
material process etc.
UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO LASER TECHNOLOGY
Laser characteristics, The Einstein Coefficients, Absorption and Emission Cross Sections,
Spontaneous and Stimulated emission of radiation, Population inversion, Methods of
Population Inversion, Laser Rate Equations, stable two minor optical resonators, Mode
selection, Gain in the regenerative laser cavity.
(9)
UNIT II: GASES AND LIQUIDS LASING MEDIUM
Energy levels & Radiative properties of Atoms and molecules; Atomic lasers: He-Ne laser, Argon
Ion laser; Molecular Lasers: Carbon dioxide laser, Liquid energy levels and their radiative
properties, Organic Dye laser.
(9)

UNIT III: SOLID STATE LASERS


Energy Levels in solids-dielectric medium, Solid-state lasing materials, Narrow line width laser
materials, broad band line width laser materials, solid state lasers: Nd:YAG, Nd:YLF; Ti:Sapphire
(introduction only)
Energy Levels in solids-semiconductor medium, direct and indirect band gap semiconductors,
Semiconductor diode laser, Quantum dot lasers (Introduction only);
(9)

Page 127 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT IV: PULSED OPERATION OF LASERS


Nanosecond: Q-Switching, Techniques of Q-Switching: electro-optic, Acousto-Optic.
Femtosecond: Relationship between pulse duration and Spectral Width, Passive mode-
locking, Active mode locking, Kerr lens mode locking, Amplification of femtosecond
pulses.
(9)

UNIT V: LASER APPLICATIONS


Laser processing of materials: laser cutting, laser drilling, welding; Lasers in metrology- Accurate
measurement of length, light wave communications; Laser spectroscopy: Laser fluorescence and
Raman scattering
(9)

Course Outcomes
Upon completion of this course the students shall be able to:
1. Understand the principle of phenomenon of laser and identify the operating principle involved
in various type of lasers.
2. Estimate stability requirements in producing laser light by different types of sources
3. Differentiate or list the various types of lasers and their means of excitation.
4. Assess (Identify) which laser would best meet the need for a particular industrial or research
task.
5. Student can knowledge of latest technological developments in laser technology.
Femtosecond laser etc.

Text books:
1. Laser Fundamentals: William T Silfvast. Cambridge Publication.
2. Laser Theory and Applications: A.K. Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, Springer
Reference books:
1. Solid State Laser Engineering: Walter Koechner. Springer series in optical sciences.
2. Ultrafast Optics, Andrew M. Weiner
3. Laser spectroscopy: Demtroder
4. Laser Applications: Monte Ross
5. Femtosecond Laser Pulses Principles and Experiments: Claude Rulli`ere, Springer
6. Principles of Laser: O. Svelto
7. Laser Physics: Peter W Miloni, Joseph H Eberly.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 128 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18CHE301 INTRODUCTION TO PETROLEUM INDUSTRY

L T P C
Course Pre-requisite: Basic Chemistry at Intermediate or equivalent level. 3 0 0 3

Course Description:
It deals with basic principles of petroleum engineering and the processes involved in petroleum
industry.

Course Objective:
1. To get exposure to the basic concepts of petroleum refining.
2. To understand the basic properties of various fuels, additives and their importance.
3. To introduce the basic concepts of refining processes and technologies.
4. To familiarize the basic concepts of catalysis and various catalysts used in the refinery.
5. To understand the safety and environmental issues in petroleum industry

UNIT I: BASIC PROCESSES IN PETROLEUM REFINING AND FUEL TESTING


Source of Crude oils and types, Overview of refinery process, Atmospheric Distillation, Vacuum
distillation, Desalter, Desulphurization, Cracking, catalysis, Effluent treatment plant(ETP).
Properties and quality control of fuel: Density, Viscosity, Pour Point, Flashpoint, Fire Point,
Octane Number, Cetane Number, Ductility, Water Content, Sulphur Analysis, Micro Carbon
Residue Test(MCRT), Saturate, Aromatic, Resin and Asphaltene(SARA), High Frequency
Reciprocating Rig(HFRR), Calorific Value.
(9)

UNIT II: CHEMICAL ADDITVES IN PETROLEUM INDUSTRY


Types of products in the refinery and their structural properties, Neutralizing amines, Corrosion
inhibitors, Multifunctional additives, viscosity modifiers, drag reducing agents, antioxidants,
Lubrication modifiers, Antifoam agents, Oil spill absorbers, Dispersants, Chemicals used for ETP
plant.
(9)

UNIT III: ROLE OF HYDROPROCESSING AND FLUID CATALYTIC CRACKING IN


PETROLEUM INDUSTRY
Hydrocracking reactions, Hydrocracking feedstock’s, Modes of Hydrocracking, Effects of
process variables, Hydro treating process and catalysts, Resid hydro processing, FCC Cracking,
Catalyst coking and regeneration, Design for Fluidized-Bed Catalytic Cracking Units
(9)

UNIT IV: ROLE OF CATALYSTS AND BIOPROCESSES IN PETROLEUM INDUSTRY


Types of catalyst and their importance, Design and selection of catalyst. Catalytic processes.
Bioprocesses: Introduction, Refining of petroleum using biodesulphurisation, Bioremediation,
commercial processes for bioethanol, isopropanol.
(9)

Page 129 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: SAFETY AND MANAGEMENT IN PETROLEUM INDUSTRY


Safety policy, Personal protective equipment, Different type of extinguishers, Types of gloves
and their application, Hydrants and their role, Safety indicators, Safety contact, Environmental
pollution, precaution and first aid, safety measures, Different elements and their role in
Occupational safety and Management.
(9)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will
1. Be able to understand the overview of petroleum industry
2. Be able to understand the concepts of crude oil, types of crude oils, properties of fuels such
as octane number, cetane number, viscosity, density etc. Instruments.
3. Be familiarized with importance and their use of chemicals involved in the petroleum
industry.
4. Be familiarized with the processes involved in hydroprocessing and fluid catalytic cracking.
5. Be familiarized the types of catalysts and bioprocesses in the petroleum industry.
6. Understanding the PPE, different types of extinguishers, First aid, process safety and
management in the petroleum industry.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Mohamed A. Fahim, Taher A. Al-Sahhaf and Amal Elkilani, Fundamentals of Petroleum
Refining, Elsevier,2009
2. David T Day, Handbook of the Petroleum Industry, Volume 1, ISBN: 137595962X, Chizine
Publ., 2017

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sankara Papavinasam, Corrosion Control in the Oil and Gas Industry, Elsevier, 2013
2. Petroleum Engineering Handbook (Vol. 1 - VIII). Editor in Chief: Larry W. Lake, Society of
Petroleum Engineers.
3. Srinivasan Chandrasekaran. Health, Safety and Environmental Management for offshore and
Petroleum Engineers, John Wiley and Sons, U.K., ISBN: 978-11-192-2184-5, 2016.
4. S. P. Srivastava and Jenő Hancsók, Fuels and fuel additives, Wiley VCH Verlag Gmbh & Co,
Weinheim, 2004.
5. Robert O. Anderson, Fundamentals of the Petroleum Industry–University of Oklahoma Pres,
1987.
6. James G. Speight, Handbook of Petroleum Product Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2015
7. Physical Chemistry by G.W. Castellan (Addison Wesley Publishing Company), 2004

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 130 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18CHE302 GREEN CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS FOR SUSTAINABLE


ENVIRONMENT

L T P C
3 0 0 3

Course Prerequisite: Basic Engineering Chemistry or equivalent level

Course Description:
This course aims to introduce the interdisciplinary concept for engineering’s to enhance their
knowledge that they need to contribute with relevance and confidence in developing green
technologies.
This course covers feedstocks, green metrics and the design of safer, more efficient processes, as
well as the role catalysts, solvents and green processes for nanoscience.

Course Objectives:
1. Learn an interdisciplinary approach to the scientific and societal issues arising from industrial
chemical production, including the facets of chemistry and environmental health sciences that
can be integrated to promote green chemistry
2. Sensitize the students in redesigning of chemicals, industrial processes and products by means
of catalysis.
3. Understand the use of alternatives assessments in using environmentally benign solvents.
4. Emphasize current emerging greener technologies and the need of alternative energies.
5. Learn to adopt green chemistry principles in practicing nanoscience.

UNIT 1: PRINCIPLES AND CONCEPTS OF GREEN CHEMISTRY


Introduction, Green chemistry principles, sustainable development and green chemistry, atom
economy, atom economic: Rearrangement and addition reactions and un-economic reactions:
Substitution, Elimination and Wittig reactions, Reducing Toxicity. Waste - problems and
Prevention: Design for degradation.
(9)
UNIT 2: CATALYSIS AND GREEN CHEMISTRY
Introduction to catalysis, Heterogeneous catalysts: Basics of Heterogeneous Catalysis, Zeolites:
Catalytic cracking, ZSM-5 catalyst and high silica zeolites, TS1 Oxidation catalyst, Catalytic
Converters, Homogeneous catalysis: Hydrogenation of alkenes using Wilkinson’s catalyst, Phase
transfer catalysis: Hazard Reduction, C–C Bond Formation, Oxidation Using Hydrogen Peroxide.
Recycling of catalyst.
(9)
UNIT 3: ORGANIC SOLVENTS: ENVIRONMENTALLY BENIGN SOLUTIONS
Organic solvents and volatile organic compounds, solvent free systems, supercritical fluids:
carbondioxide, water - water as a reaction solvent, water based coatings, Ionic liquids as solvent.
(9)

Page 131 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT 4: EMERGING GREENER TECHNOLOGIES AND ALTERNATIVE ENERGY


SOURCES
Biomass as renewable resource, Energy: Fossil Fuels, Energy from Biomass, Solar Power, Fuel
Cells(Hydrogen—oxygen fuel cell, SOFC and PEMFC), Photochemical Reactions: Advantages
and Challenges of Photochemical Processes, Example-Caprolactum, chemistry Using
Microwaves: heating, assisted Reactions, Sonochemistry.
(9)
UNIT 5: GREEN PROCESSES FOR NANOSCIENCE
Introduction and traditional methods in the nanomaterials synthesis, Translating green chemistry
principles for practicing nanoscience. Green Synthesis of Nanophase Inorganic Materials and
Metal Oxide Nanoparticles: Hydrothermal Synthesis, Reflux Synthesis, Microwave-Assisted
Synthesis, Other methods for Green synthesis of metal and metal oxide nanoparticles, Green chemistry
applications of Inorganic nanomaterials
(9)

Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of this course the students should
1. Recognize green chemistry concepts and apply these ideas to develop respect for the
interconnectedness of our world and an ethic of environmental care and sustainability.
2. Understand and apply catalysis for developing eco friendly processes.
3. Be in a position to use environmental benign solvents where ever possible.
4. Have knowledge of current trends in alternative energy sources.
5. Apply green chemistry principles in practicing green Nanoscience.

Text Books :
1. M. Lancaster, Green Chemistry an introductory text, Royal Society of Chemistry, 2002.
2. Paul T. Anastas and John C. Warner, Green Chemistry Theory and Practice, 4 th Edition,
Oxford University Press, USA 2005.

Reference Books :
1. Edited by Alvise Perosa and Maurizio Selva , Hand Book of Green chemistry Volume 8:
Nanoscience, wiley-VCH
2. V.K. Ahluwalia , M. Kidwai, New trends in Green chemistry, 2004, Springer.
3. Benny Joseph, Environmental Science and Engineering, TATA Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi
2006.
4. Albert Matlack, Introduction to Green Chemistry, Second Edition CRC press, 2010

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 132 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18HUM301 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS


L T P C
3 0 0 3

Course Description: Intellectual property (IP) is a legal term that refers to creations of the mind.
Examples of intellectual property include music, literature, and other artistic works; discoveries
and inventions; and words, phrases, symbols, and designs. Under intellectual property laws,
owners of intellectual property are granted certain exclusive rights. Some common types of
intellectual property rights (IPR) are copyright, patents, and industrial design rights; and the
rights that protect trademarks, trade dress, and in some jurisdictions trade secrets. Intellectual
property rights are themselves a form of property, called intangible property.

Course Objectives: The course is intended to:


1. Explain the importance of Intellectual Property Rights, its protection and management;
2. Explain the types/tools of IPR;
3. Make aware the students to understand the commercialization of IPR;
4. Know the filing of patent rights, acts, rules & portfolio analysis, management, patent
strategy; and
5. Create awareness about Right to Information Act (RTI), its powers, functions, penalties
and appeal.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION:
Intellectual property and its protection, WTO, TRIPS Agreement& its Protection
(9)

UNIT II: INTRODUCTION TO COPYRIGHTS


Copyright Principles – Copyright Law - Copyright ownership - Right to prepare derivative works
– Rights of Distribution - Copyright Formalities and Registrations - Copyright disputes -
International Copyright Law – Patent Trademark – Geographical indications
(9)

UNIT III: COMMERCIALIZATION OF IP ASSETS:


Contracting, Licensing, Assignment and technology transfer; Drawing up a business strategy IP
rights in export markets; Ownership of rights by employees; Valuation of intellectual property
rights.
(9)

UNIT IV: PROCEDURE FOR FILING PATENT IN INDIA AND OTHER COUNTRIES,
PCT filing, Patent Search, Patent Acts & Rules, Patent Infringement, Patent Portfolio analysis
and management, Patent Strategy.
(9)

Page 133 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: RTI
Introduction – Objectives – Obligation of Public Authorities – The Central & State information
commission – Powers & Functions – Penalties & Appeal.
(9)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the importance of Intellectual Property Rights, its protection and management.
2. Analyze and apply the types/tools of IPR.
3. Identify the process of commercialization of IPR.
4. Understand the procedure of filing of patent, acts, rules and portfolio analysis, management,
patent strategy.
5. Apply the Right to Information Act (RTI) in real life situation.

Text Book:
1. Intellectual Property: The Law of Trademarks, Copyrights, Patents, and Trade Secrets, 4th
Edition (2013) By Deborah E. Bouchoux, Cengage Learning

References:
1. Latest Research Papers

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 134 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18HUM302 HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT


L T P C
3 0 0 3

Course Description: The course content includes: Introduction to HRM, strategic human
resource challenges, work flows, job analysis, managing diversity, concepts, goals, mechanism
and system of HRD, recruitment and selection, downsizing and outplacement, appraising and
managing employee performance, training, career development, managing compensation,
rewarding performance, designing benefit plans, employee relation and employee discipline, and
workplace safety and health.

Course Objectives: The course is intended to:


1. Explain the nature and scope of HRM, its functions, policies and strategies;
2. Describe the human resource planning, work analysis and importance in designing jobs;
3. Know the recruitment, selection and the process of performance appraisal;
4. Make the student to learn about training and development; and
5. Explain the industrial relations, trade unions, Ethics and fair treatment at work.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
Understanding the nature and scope of Human Resource Management- Definition, Functions /
objectives, organization of department.
(9)
UNIT II: HUMAN RESOURCE PLANNING
Human Resource Planning- Factors affecting HRP, the planning process, managerial succession
planning. Job Analysis, Methods of collecting job data, Competency based Job Analysis, Job
design approach, contemporary issues in Job Description.
(9)
UNIT III: RECRUITMENT, SELECTION AND PERFORMANCE APPRAISAL
Recruiting and selecting employees-, Selection process, Barriers, selection in India. Performance
Management, Process of Performance Appraisal, Methods of Performance Appraisal - Errors in
Performance Appraisal.
(9)
UNIT IV: TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT
Training v/s development – Training Methods - challenges in training - Career development –
Reward Management – Performance Appraisal – Compensation Management.
(9)
UNIT V: INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS, TRADE UNIONS
Industrial Relations, Trade unions, resolving dispute- Labor Movement - Trade Union in India,
Collective Bargaining: Process and Methods, Grievance: Sources and process of Redressal,
Managing Ethical issues in Human Resource Management- Ethics and fair treatment at work.
(9)

Page 135 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will be able to:
1. Understand the concept of HRM, its nature, scope, functions, policies and strategies;
2. Analyse human resource planning and apply in designing jobs;
3. Evaluate the recruitment, selection and the process of performance appraisal;
4. Understand the importance of training and development activities; and
5. Examine the industrial relations, trade unions, employee safety and health measures.

Text Books:
1. Aswathappa K., Human Resource Management- Text and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill, 6th
Edition, 2010
2. Gomez-Mejia, L.R., Balkin, D.B., &Cardy, R.L. Managing Human Resource Management
6th edition, Pearson Edu. 2007.

References:
1. Garry Dessler, BijuVarkkey , Human Resource Management ,11th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2009.
2. R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management, 10th Edition, 2010

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 136 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18CE301 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisites: None
Course Description
Identification of problematic soils; ground improvement techniques; densification in granular
soils; densification in cohesive soils; soil stabilization; confinement; reinforced earth;
geosynthetics; improvement of expansive soils.
Course Objectives
1. To introduce engineering properties of soft, weak and compressible deposits, principles
of treatment for granular and cohesive soils and various stabilization techniques.
2. To bring out concepts of reinforced earth.
3. Applications of geotextiles in various civil engineering projects.

UNIT I: DEWATERING & GROUTINHG


Introduction- Need for engineered ground improvement, classification of ground modification
techniques; suitability, feasibility and desirability of ground improvement technique.
Methods of de-watering- sumps and interceptor ditches- wells- drains- Electro- osmosis.
Objectives of grouting- grouts and their properties-grouting methods.
(9)
UNIT II: DENSIFICATION
In - situ densification methods in cohesionless Soils: - Vibration at the ground surface, Impact
at the Ground Surface, Vibration at depth, Impact at depth. In - situ densification methods in
cohesive soils: - preloading or dewatering, Vertical drains - Sand Drains- Sand wick geo-drains
- Stone and lime columns - thermal methods.
(9)
UNIT III: STABILIZATION
Methods of stabilization-mechanical-cement- lime-bituminous-chemical stabilization with
calcium chloride- sodium silicate and gypsum.
(9)
UNIT IV: REINFORCED EARTH & GEOSYNTHETICS
Principles - Components of reinforced earth - factors governing design of reinforced earth walls
design principles of reinforced earth walls. Geotextiles- Types, Functions and applications -
geo- grids and geo-membranes - functions and applications.
(9)

Page 137 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: EXPANSIVE SOILS


Problems of expansive soils - tests for identification - methods of determination of swell
pressure. Improvement of expansive soils - Foundation techniques in expansive soils - under
reamedpiles.
(9)
Course Outcomes
After successful completion of the course, student will be able to

1. Identify basic deficiencies of various soil deposits and able to decide various
dewatering methods to improve the soil.
2. Implement different techniques of soil densification.
3. Use admixtures in stabilizing the soil.
4. Use geo-synthetics materials in engineering applications.
5. Suggest different types of foundation techniques and methods to control swelling of soil

Text Books
1. Dr. Purushotham Raj, P., Ground Improvement Techniques, Laxmi Publications, New
Delhi.
2. Dr. Sivakumar Babu, GL, An Introduction to Soil Reinforcement &
Geosynthetics, Universities Press

Reference Books
1. Hausmann M.R., Engineering Principles of Ground Modification, McGraw-
Hill International Edition, 1990.
2. Moseley M.P., Ground Improvement, Blackie Academic and Professional, Boca Taton,
Florida, USA, 1993.
3. Xanthakos P.P., Abramson, L.W and Brucwe, D.A., Ground Control and Improvement,
John Wiley and Sons, New York, USA, 1994.
4. Robert M. Koerner, Designing with Geosynthetics, Prentice Hall New Jercy, USA.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 138 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18CE302 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisites: None
Course Description
The course will focus on Basic concept of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA), EIA
Methodologies, Impactof Developmental Activities and Land use in soil, water, and vegetation,
Environmental Audit, Post Audit activities, The Environmental pollution Acts.
Course Objectives
1. To impart knowledge on Environmental management and Environmental Impact
Assessment.
2. To give the student the brief knowledge about various legislations and audit protocols.
3. To give student knowledge about the framing of environmental audit through case
studies.

UNIT I: CONCEPTS AND METHODOLOGIES IN EIA


Introduction - Elements of EIA - Factor affecting EIA -Impact evaluation and analysis -
Preparation of Environmental Base map - Classification of environmental parameters. Criteria
for the selection of EIA Methodology - EIA methods: Ad-hoc methods - matrix methods -
Network method - Environmental Media Quality Index Method -overlay methods - cost/benefit
Analysis.
(9)
UNIT II: IMPACT OF DEVELOPMENTAL ACTIVITIES
Introduction and Methodology for the assessment of soil and ground water - Delineation of
study area - Identification of actives. Procurement of relevant soil quality - Impact prediction -
Assessment of Impact significance -Identification and Incorporation of mitigation measures.
EIA in surface water - Air and Biological environment.
(9)
UNIT III: IMPACT ON VEGETATION AND WILD LIFE
Assessment of Impact of development Activities on Vegetation and wildlife - environmental
Impact of Deforestation - Causes and effects of deforestation.
(9)
UNIT IV: ENVIRONMENTAL AUDIT
Environmental Audit & Environmental legislation objectives of Environmental Audit - Types
of environmental Audit - Audit protocol - stages of Environmental Audit - onsite activities -
evaluation of audit data and preparation of audit report - Post Audit activities.
(9)

Page 139 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION ACTS


The water Act-1974 - The Air Act-1981 (Prevention & Control of pollution Act.) - Wild life
Act- 1972 - Indian Forest Conservation Act-1980 -National Green Tribunal Act –2010 -
Biological Diversity Act-2002.
(9)

Course Outcomes
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Utilize the various methods used in predicting environmental impacts.
2. Utilize site information to interpret impacts on land and groundwater.
3. Outline the environmental impacts of various development activities on existing
ecosystem.
4. Utilize the procedures and various protocols involved in preparation of environmental
audit report.
5. Utilize the implications of environmental prevention and protection acts in relation to
environmental impact assessment.

Text Books
1. Anjaneyulu, Y., Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies, B.S. Publication,
Sultan Bazar, Kakinada.

Reference Books
1. Glynn, J. and Gary W. Hein Ke., Environmental Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall
Publishers
2. Suresh K. Dhaneja Environmental Science and Engineering, S.K., Katania& Sons
Publication, New Delhi.
3. Dr. Bhatia, H.S., Environmental Pollution and Control, Galgotia Publication (P) Ltd,
Delhi.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 140 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18CE303 WATERSHED MANAGEMENT

L T P C
Course Prerequisites: None 3 0 0 3
Course Description
Topic covers basic concepts of watershed, sustainable watershed management approached
and practices, integrated watershed management and modelling, social aspect inwatershed
management, quantification of water quality and quantity at the catchment outlet using modern
techniques, drought, flood and storm management at catchment scale.
Course Objectives
1. To discuss various aspects of water resources development and management on
watershed basis.
2. To proliferate the sustainable use and development of natural resources.
3. To enrich the students for change in the hydrological fluxes due altered physiographic
condition (land use or elevation) on a watershed scale.
4. To improve the quantitative problem solving skills of the students for natural resources
management.
UNIT I
CONCEPT OF WATERSHED: Concept of watershed - classification of watershed -
introduction to watershed management - objective of watershed development - Hydrological
cycle - water balance equation - different stakeholders and their relative importance - watershed
management policies and decision making. (9)
FACTOR AFFECTING WATERSHED DEVELOPMENT: Morphological characteristics:
linear - Arial and Relief aspect - land use - vegetation - soil and geological characteristics -
Hydrology and geology and socio-economic characteristics. (9)
UNIT II
WATERSHED MODELING: Watershed delineation - modelling of rainfall - runoff process
- Concept of integrated watershed management conjunctive use of water resources - Integrated
water resources management. PRA - Private sector participation - Institutional issues - Socio-
economy issues - Integrated development - Water legislation and implementations - Tools and
emerging technologies for watershed management and planning. (9)
UNIT III
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION: Types of erosion - factor affecting erosion - effect of
erosion on land fertility and capacity - estimation of soil loss due to erosion: universal soil loss
equation.
PREVENTION AND CONTROL TO EROSION: contour techniques - ploughing -
furrowing
- trenching - bunding - terracing - gully control - rockfill dams - check dams - brushwood dam
- Gabion structure. (9)

Page 141 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT IV
WATER HARVESTING: Rain water harvesting - catchment harvesting - harvesting
structures - soil moisture conservation - check dams - artificial recharge from pond -
percolation tanks.
FLOOD AND DROUGHT MANAGEMENT: Definition of flood - Flood frequency
analysis: Weibul - Gumbel - and log Pearson methods.Definition and classification of
drought - drought analysis techniques - drought mitigation planning.
MANAGEMENT OF WATER QUALITY: Water quality and pollution - types and
Sources of pollution - water quality modeling - environmental guidelines for water quality.
(9)
UNIT V
COVER MANAGEMENT: Land use land cover change estimation through satellite
imageries

- land capability classification - management of forest - agricultural - grassland and wild


land - Reclamation of saline and alkaline soil. Classification of columns based on
slenderness ratio - reinforcement & loading - Design of rectangular and circular columns
subjected to axial load - (axial load + uni-axial bending) and (axial load + bi-axial
bending). Different Types of Footings - Design of isolated - square - rectangular and
circular footings.
INTEGRATED CROPPING SYSTEM FOR WATERSHEDS: Intercropping - mix
cropping strip and terrace cropping - sustainable agriculture - cover cropping (biomass
conservation) - horticulture - dryland agriculture and afforestation.
(9)
Course Outcomes
The students after completing the course will be able to:

1. Classify watershed and Identify factors to consider for watershed Development.


2. Apply the concepts of watershed development and planning
3. Evaluate the erosion rate and total amount of soil loss from a watershed
4. Select the flood and drought mitigation measures
5. Quantify the change in land use land/cover and its impact on hydrological processes.

Text Books
1. Kenneth N. Brooks Peter F. Ffolliott Joseph A. Magner. Hydrology and the
Management of Watersheds. A John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Publication (4th Edition)
2. VVN, Murthy. Land and Water Management- Kalyani Pblication

Page 142 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Reference Books
1. JVS Murthy. Watershed Management. New Age International publisher.
2. A.M. Michel and T.P. Ojha. Hand Book on Agricultural Engineering, Volume 2.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 143 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18EEE301 INDUSTRIAL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: 18EEE101

Course Description:
This course deals with basics of electrical wiring systems for residential, commercial and
industrial consumers, and its representation with standard symbols and drawings, various
components of industrial electrical systems and its sizing and control aspects of industrial
electrical system using PLC and SCADA.

Course Objectives:
1. To understand the electrical wiring systems for residential, commercial and industrial
consumers.
2. To learn the representation of systems with standard symbols and drawings.
3. To understand the various components of industrial electrical systems.
4. To analyze and select the proper size of several electrical system components.
5. To study the control aspects of industrial electrical system using PLC and SCADA

UNIT I: ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS


LT system wiring components, selection of cables, wires, switches, distribution box,
metering system, Tariff structure, protection components- Fuse, MCB, MCCB, ELCB,
inverse current characteristics, symbols, single line diagram (SLD) of a wiring system,
Contactor, Isolator, Relays, MPCB, Electric shock and Electrical safety practices.

(9)

UNIT II: RESIDENTIAL AND COMMERCIAL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


Types of residential and commercial wiring systems, general rules and guidelines for
installation, load calculation and sizing of wire, rating of main switch, distribution board and
protection devices, earthing system calculations, requirements of commercial installation,
deciding lighting scheme and number of lamps, earthing of commercial installation, selection
and sizing of components.
(8)

UNIT III: ILLUMINATION SYSTEMS


Understanding various terms regarding light, lumen, intensity, candle power, lamp
efficiency, specific consumption, glare, space to height ratio, waste light factor, depreciation
factor, various illumination schemes, Incandescent lamps and modern luminaries like CFL,
LED and their operation, energy saving in illumination systems, design of a lighting scheme
for a residential and commercial premises, flood lighting.
(8)

Page 144 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT IV: INDUSTRIAL SUBSTATION SYSTEMS


HT connection, industrial substation, Transformer selection, Industrial loads, motors,
starting of motors, SLD, Cable and Switchgear selection, Lightning Protection, Earthing
design, Power factor correction – kVAR calculations, type of compensation, Introduction to
PCC, MCC panels. Specifications of LT Breakers, MCB and other LT panel components.
(8)

UNIT V: INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM AUTOMATION


DG Systems, UPS System, Electrical Systems for the elevators, Battery banks, Sizing the
DG, UPS and Battery Banks, Selection of UPS and Battery Banks.
Study of basic PLC, Role of in automation, advantages of process automation, PLC based
control system design, Panel Metering and Introduction to SCADA system for distribution
automation.
(12)

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Discuss the various component representation involved in the design of electrical wiring
for Low Tension.
2. Understand the guidelines for wiring of household and commercial buildings.
3. Understand the various components of illumination in industrial electrical systems.
4. Select the proper size of various electrical system components required for designing
different electrical wiring systems.
5. Understand the control aspects of industrial electrical system using PLC and SCADA.

Text Books:
1. S. L. Uppal and G. C. Garg, “Electrical Wiring, Estimating & Costing”, Khanna
publishers, 2008.
2. K. B. Raina, “Electrical Design, Estimating & Costing”, New age International, 2007.

Reference:
1. Web site for IS Standards.
2. S. Singh and R. D. Singh, “Electrical estimating and costing”, Dhanpat Rai and Co.,
1997.
3. H. Joshi, “Residential Commercial and Industrial Systems”, McGraw Hill Education,
2008.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination

Page 145 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18EEE302 INTRODUCTION TO MEMS


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: 18EEE101

Course Description:
This course describes about manufacturing, modeling and applications of MEMS.

Course Objectives:
1. To know the fundamentals of MEMS materials, their physical properties and Principles
of operation of MEMS devices
2. To know various MEMS microfabrication technologies.
3. To provide various MEMS technology for mechanical, optical, and chemical sensors
and actuator

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
Overview – History and industry perspectives – Working principles – Mechanics and
dynamics –– Scaling law
(9)

UNIT II: MICRO SENSORS & ACTUATORS


Micro sensors: Pressure sensors, accelerometers, gyroscopes-Micro actuators: comb drive
actuators – Micro-electromechanical systems
(9)

UNIT III: MICRO MANUFACTURING


Materials for MEMS and Microsystems- Micro fabrication processes: Photolithography, Ion
Implantation, Diffusion, Oxidation, Chemical Vapour Deposition- Physical Vapour
Deposition, Micro manufacturing: Bulk micromachining, surface micromachining, LIGA
Process- Packaging.
(9)

UNIT IV: MODELING IN MEMS


Micro system design: Finite Element Methods-– Modeling of simulation – piezoelectric,
Gyroscope
(9)

UNIT V: MEMS APPLICATIONS


Micro fluids-sensors for turbulence measurement and control, micro-actuators for flow
control, RFMEMS- filters, Oscillators and phase shifters, Optical MEMS, micro robotics –
Case studies
(9)

Page 146 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, students will able to
1. Explain the fundamentals of MEMS materials, their physical properties and Principles
of operation of MEMS devices
2. Analyze the Micro sensors and actuators and its fabrication
3. Explain the materials for MEMS and Microsystems
4. Design MEMS using microfabrication techniques
5. Explain the advantages of MEMS technology for mechanical, optical, and chemical
sensors and actuator

Text Books:
1. Chang Liu, ‘Foundations of MEMS’, Pearson Education Inc., 2006
2. G.K. Ananthsuresh et al ,’Micro and Smart Systems’, Wiley, India, 2010

References:
1. NadimMaluf, “An introduction to Micro electro mechanical system design”,
ArtechHouse, 2000.
2. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, “The MEMS Handbook”, CRC press Baco Raton, 2000
3. James J.Allen, micro electro mechanical system design, CRC Press published in 2005
4. Stephen D. Senturia, Microsystem Design, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination

Page 147 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18ECE301 BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
This course provides the fundamental knowledge on applications of electronics in bio-
medical signal measurements and processing, bio-medical instrumentation and imaging
techniques.

Course Objectives:
This course enables students to
1. Acquire the basic knowledge on human physiology and biological transducers.
2. Learn about bio-electrodes and bio-amplifiers used in bio-signal acquisition.
3. Understand the working principle of bio-medical measuring instruments.
4. Study various types of imaging techniques used in medicine.
5. Learn the applications of medical instrumentation in designing artificial medical aids.

UNIT I: Human Physiology and Biomedical Transducers


Introduction to human physiology - Biomedical transducers for measuring displacement,
velocity, force, acceleration, potential, dissolved ions and gases.
(9)

UNIT II: Bio-Electrodes and Amplifiers


Introduction to bio-potential, Bio-electrodes, Typical waveforms and characteristics of ECG,
EMG and EEG, Bio-potential amplifiers for ECG, EMG and EEG – Lead systems and
recording methods.
(9)

UNIT III: Biomedical Measuring Instruments


Measurement of blood pressure and temperature, Blood flow meter, Cardiac output
measurement, Respiratory measurement, Blood cell counter, Impedance plethysmography.

(9)

UNIT IV: Medical Imaging


X-ray, Computed Tomography (CT), Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI), Nuclear
imaging, Ultrasonic Imaging.
(9)

UNIT V: Prostheses and Aids


Pacemakers, Defibrillators, Heart-lung machine, Artificial kidney, Aids for the handicapped,
Safety aspects.
(9)

Page 148 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the applications of biological transducers in medical field.
2. Analyze the design of bio-electrodes and bio-amplifiers.
3. Apply suitable measuring instruments to measure various medical parameters.
4. Understand and test various imaging techniques used in bio-medical diagnosis.
5. Analyze the applications of artificial medical aids.

Text Books
1. W.F. Ganong, Review of Medical Physiology, 26th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2019.
2. J.G. Websster, ed., Medical Instrumentation, 3rd Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd. 2009.

Reference Books

1. A.M. Cook and J.G. Webster, eds., Medical Devices and Human Engineering, Taylor
& Francis, 2014.
2. R.S.Khandpur, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, 2nd edition, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2005.
3. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement”, Prentice-Hall, New
Delhi, 2011.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 149 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II

18ECE302 VLSI DESIGN

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: None 3 0 0 3

Course Description
This course describes about various VLSI design methodologies, fundamentals of
CMOS technology. It incorporates basics of MOSFET, CMOS processing technology,
circuit characterization and performance estimation, combinational logic design, sequential
logic design, logic families and VLSI Design flow.

Course Objectives
This course enables students to

1. Know the different VLSI Design Methodologies


2. Understand the characteristics of CMOS device
3. Study CMOS design rules
4. Designing of CMOS by considering the low power
5. Understand different types of CMOS circuit families

UNIT I: Introduction to VLSI design methodologies


Introduction to VLSI Design Methodologies, Scaling, CMOS Logic: Inverter, NAND Gate,
NOR Gate, Combinational Logic, Compound Gates, Pass Transistors and Transmission
Gates, CMOS Inverter Cross-section, Stick Diagrams. VLSI Design Flow, Complementary
CMOS Inverter DC Characteristics, Beta Ratio Effects, Noise Margin.
(9)

UNIT II: MOS transistor theory


MOS Ideal I-V Characteristics, C-V Characteristics, MOS Small-signal Model, MOS
Capacitance Models, MOS Gate Capacitance Model, MOSFET as a Switch, non-ideal I-V
Effects: Velocity Saturation and Mobility Degradation, Channel Length Modulation, Body
Effect, Sub-threshold Conduction, Junction Leakage, Tunneling.
(9)

UNIT III: CMOS technologies


CMOS Technologies: Background, Wafer Formation, Photolithography, Well and Channel
Formation, Isolation, Gate Oxide, Gate and Source/Drain Formation, Contacts and
Metallization, Passivation, Metrology. Scribe Line and Other Structures, MOSIS Scalable
CMOS Design Rules, Micron Design Rules.
(9)

UNIT IV: Low power design


Delay Estimation using RC Delay Model and Linear Delay Model, Logical Effort, Parasitic
Delay. Logical Effort and Transistor Sizing: Delay in a Logic Gate, Delay in Multistage
Logic Networks, choosing the Best Number of Stages. Power Dissipation: Static Dissipation,
Page 150 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Dynamic Dissipation, Low-Power Design. Interconnect: Resistance, Capacitance, Delay,


and Crosstalk.
(9)

UNIT V: Circuit families


Circuit Families: Static CMOS, Ratioed Circuits, Cascade Voltage Switch Logic, Dynamic
Circuits, Sense Amplifier Circuits, Bi-CMOS Circuits, Multiplexers, Sequential Static
Circuits, Design of Latches and Flip-Flops.
(9)
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Explain the VLSI design methodologies and basic CMOS circuits used in modern
Integrated circuits applications.
2. Discuss the fundamentals of MOS transistor theory.
3. Discuss about the CMOS processing technology.
4. Discuss about the integrated circuit characterization and performance estimation.
5. Describe the different types of circuit families.

Text Books
1. J. P. Uyemura: Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems, Wiley.
2. Neil H.E. Weste, David Harris, Ayan Banerjee: CMOS VLSI Design, Third Edition,
Pearson Education.

Reference Books
1. Philip E. Allen and Douglas R Holberg: CMOS Analog Circuit Design, Oxford.
2. Carver Mead and Lynn Conway: Introduction to VLSI systems, BS Publication.
3. Plummer: Silicon VLSI Technology, Pearson Education.
4. J. P. Uyemura: Chip Design for Submicron VLSI, Cengage Learning.
5. Neil H.E. Weste, Kamran Eshraghian: Principle of CMOS VLSI Design, Pearson
Education.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 151 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II
18CSE301 OPERATING SYSTEMS

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: Nil 3 0 0 3
Course Description:
This course will cover the tradeoffs that can be made between performance and functionality
during the design and implementation of an operating system. Particular emphasis will be
given to three major OS subsystems: process management (processes, threads, CPU
scheduling, synchronization, and deadlock), memory management (segmentation, paging,
swapping), and file systems.

Course Objectives:
1. To learn the mechanisms of OS to handle processes and threads and their
communication
2. To give introduction to shell programming.
3. To learn the mechanisms involved in memory management in contemporary OS
4. To gain knowledge on distributed operating system concepts that includes
architecture, Mutual exclusion algorithms, deadlock detection algorithms and
agreement protocols
5. To know the components and management aspects of concurrency management

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
Concept of Operating Systems, OS Services, System Calls, Structure of an OS - Layered,
Monolithic, Microkernel Operating Systems, Case study on UNIX and WINDOWS
Operating System. KORN SHELL PROGRAMMING:Basic Script Concepts,Expressions,
Decisions: Making Selections, Repetition, Special Parameters and Variables, Changing
Positional Parameters, Argument Validation, Debugging Scripts.

(9)
UNIT II: PROCESS CONCEPTS
Processes: Definition, Process Relationship, Different states of a Process, Process State
transitions, Process Control Block (PCB), Context switching Thread: Definition, Various
states, Benefits of threads, Types of threads, Concept of multithreads, Process Scheduling:
Foundation and Scheduling objectives, Types of Schedulers, Scheduling criteria: CPU
utilization, Throughput, Turnaround Time, Waiting Time, Response Time; Scheduling
algorithms: Pre-emptive and Non pre-emptive, FCFS, SJF, RR; Multiprocessor scheduling.
(9)

UNIT III: PROCESS SYNCHRONIZATION AND DEADLOCKS


Critical Section, Race Conditions, Mutual Exclusion, Hardware Solution, Strict Alternation,
Peterson’s Solution, The Producer\ Consumer Problem, Semaphores, Event Counters,
Monitors, Message Passing, Classical IPC Problems: Reader’s & Writer Problem, Dinning
Philosopher Problem etc. Deadlocks: Definition, Necessary and sufficient conditions for

Page 152 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Deadlock, Deadlock Prevention, Deadlock Avoidance: Banker’s algorithm, Deadlock


detection and Recovery.

(9)
UNIT IV: MEMORY MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES
Memory Management: Basic concept, Logical and Physical address map, Memory
allocation: Contiguous Memory allocation – Fixed and variable partition– Internal and
External fragmentation and Compaction; Paging: Principle of operation – Page allocation –
Hardware support for paging, Protection and sharing, Disadvantages of paging. Virtual
Memory: Basics of Virtual Memory – Hardware and control structures – Locality of
reference, Page fault , Working Set , Dirty page/Dirty bit – Demand paging, Page
Replacement algorithms: Optimal, First in First Out (FIFO), Second Chance (SC), Not
recently used (NRU) and Least Recently used (LRU).

(9)
UNIT V: FILE SYSTEM:
File Management: Concept of File, Access methods, File types, File operation, Directory
structure, File System structure, Allocation methods (contiguous, linked, indexed), Free-
space management (bit vector, linked list, grouping), directory implementation (linear list,
hash table), efficiency and performance. Disk Management: Disk structure, Disk scheduling
- FCFS, SSTF, SCAN, C-SCAN, Disk reliability, Disk formatting, Boot-block, Bad blocks.
(9)

Course Outcomes:
At the completion of the course the students will be able to:
1. Write shell scripts using korn shell.
2. Create processes & threads and implement the various process scheduling
techniques.
3. Analyse the concurrent processing and deadlock situations.
4. Design algorithmic solutions to solve memory management problems.
5. Implement the different types of file management techniques.

Text Books:
1. Operating System Concepts Essentials, 9th Edition by AviSilberschatz, Peter Galvin,
Greg Gagne, Wiley Asia Student Edition.
2. Operating Systems: Internals and Design Principles, 5th Edition, William
Stallings, Prentice Hall of India.

References:
1. Operating System: A Design-oriented Approach, 1st Edition by Charles Crowley,
Irwin Publishing
2. Operating Systems: A Modern Perspective, 2nd Edition by Gary J. Nutt, Addison-
Wesley
3. Design of the Unix Operating Systems, 8th Edition by Maurice Bach, Prentice-Hall
of India
Page 153 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

4. Understanding the Linux Kernel, 3rd Edition, Daniel P. Bovet, Marco Cesati,
O'Reilly and Associates

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.

Page 154 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II
18CSE302 E-LEARNING TECHNOLOGIES

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: Nil 3 0 0 3

Course Description:

The course provides a comprehensive understanding of the fundamental theory of E-learning


and the Strategies of E-Learning .The relation between Models of E-Learning and
Multi/Hyper Media for E-learning has been explained across various stages of learning
techniques.

Course Objectives:
1. To enable the students to understand the concept of e-learning and integrating the
technology.
2. To inculcate knowledge in planning the role of information technology in virtual
classroom and university.
3. To make the students to understand the technology mediated communication and its
applications.
4. To include knowledge in planning models of E-learning in in virtual classroom and
university.
5. To make the students to understand the future of E-learning technology and its
development.

UNIT I: CONCEPT OF E-LEARNING


Meaning, Evolution of E-Learning – Components of E-Learning – Virtual classroom:
Teleconferencing, Audio and Video conferencing.
(9)
UNIT II: STRATEGIES OF E-LEARNING
Process of E-Learning: Knowledge Acquisition and Creation, Sharing of Knowledge,
Utilization of Knowledge – E-Learning Instructional Grounds: Behaviourism, Cognitivism
and Constructivism.
(9)
UNIT III: MODELS OF E-LEARNING
Role of Web-Based Instruction in Learning – Models of WBI: Instructional Design Model
(ISD) & Hyper Media Design Model (HMD) – Computer Languages for Designing WBI –
Future of E-Learning.
(9)

Page 155 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT IV: MULTI/HYPER MEDIA FOR E-LEARNING


Concept, Meaning, Characteristics and Applications – Teaching Techniques through
Multi/Hyper Media – Multimedia & Learning – Multimedia for Co-operative and
Collaborative Learning Strategies – General Guidelines for Multi/Hyper Media Applications
– Advantages & Disadvantages of Multi/Hyper Media.
(9)

UNIT V: FUTURE OF E-LEARNING TECHNOLOGY


21stCentury Education – Challenges of Distance Education – Electronic Media in Distance
Education – Open Educational Resources / Open Learning – Internet in Distance Education
– Virtual University System.E-Patashala, Indian Institutes Developing E-Content.
(9)

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
1. Understand the concept of e-learning and integrating the technology.
2. Make the students to understand the technology mediated communication and its
applications.
3. Understand the technology mediated communication and its applications.
4. Include knowledge in planning models of E-learning in in virtual classroom and
university.
5. Make the students to understand the future of E-learning technology and its development.

Text Books:
1. Badrul Khan and Mohamed Ally(Edited), 2015, International Hand book of E-
Learning:Volume-1 Theoretical Perspectives and Research, Routledge,.
2. Robyler , 2007, Integrating Educational Technology into Teaching, 4th Edition, Pearson
Education India .
3. Richard Andrews and Caroline Heythornthwaite (Edited ), 2007, The SAGE Hand Book
of E-Learning Research, SAGE,Delhi.
References:
1. Bryn Holmes and John Gardiner, 2006,E-Learning Concepts and Practice, ,Pine Forge
Press.
2. Y.R. Ramaiah , 2002,Distance Education and Open Learning, , Mittal Publications.
3. PradeepMandav, 2001, Visual Media Communication, Authorspress.
4. Michael D.Wiliams, Prentice Hall, 2000,Integrating Technology into Teaching and
Learning: Concepts and Applications,.
5. Laura Parker Roerden, O'Reilly, 1997,Net Lessons: Web-based Projects for Your
Classroom, Volume 1.
6. Paul F. Merrill, Allyn and Bacon, 1996,Computers in Education, 3rd Edition.
7. Joan Riedl, Allyn and Bacon, 1995,The Integrated Technology Classroom.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examination.


Page 156 of 258
Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Open Elective - II
18CSE303 AI TOOLS, TECHNIQUES AND APPLICATIONS

Course Prerequisite: None L T P C


3 0 0 3

Course Description:
To understand the importance of AI and its applications, Machine learning and Deep
Learning algorithms and smart solutions for various domains.

Course Objectives:
The objectives of this course are to
1. Expose fundamental concepts in AI
2. Demonstrate the capability to create simple AI applications using Natural Language
Processing, Speech Recognition, Computer Vision, Pattern recognition.
3. Present various modeling and formulation techniques to solve problems using AI
techniques.
4. Introduce state-of-art AI tools and techniques to solve various problems faced by
Engineers in design and analysis.

UNIT I: FUNDAMENTALS OF AI
AI-Definition, Applications of AI, Search Strategies – BFS, DFS, Knowledge representation
and reasoning – Knowledge based Agent, Wumpus World Environment, Logics.Machine
Learning: Supervised Learning - Linear Regression, Logistic Regression, Unsupervised
Learning – K-means clustering, Anamoly Detection, Reinforcement Learning. (9)

UNIT II: NLP AND BOT TECHNOLOGIES


Natural Language Processing: Natural language Understanding, Sentiment Analysis,
Segmentation and recognition, Speech Recognition, Text-to-Speech, NLP in the cloud, NL
Interface, Chatbots: Chatbot definition, Build a Chatbot, How has chatbot transformed user
experience, Designing elements, best practices for chatbot development, Virtual Assistants:
What is a Virtual Assistant? (9)

UNIT III: IMAGE PROCESSING &APPLICATIONS


What is Image processing?, Image Noise, Removal of Noise from Images, Color
Enhancement,Fourier transforms, Feature detection and matching, Segmentation, Object
detection, Face recognition, Recognition Databases and test sets. Application: Optical
Character Recognition. (9)

UNIT IV: DEEP LEARNING


Introduction - Neural Networks, Deep Learning, Different types of Deep Neural Networks -
CNN,RNN, forward propagation, Cost function, backpropagation.APIs using Softwares
Tensorflow and Keras. (9)

Page 157 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: SMART APPLICATIONS


Smart Agriculture, Smart Transportation and Autonomous Vehicles, Smart Homes, Smart
Cities. (9)

Course Outcomes:
Upon the completion of the course, students able to
1. Understand the basic concepts and applications of Artificial Intelligence.
2. Design Chatbots based on the user requirements
3. Identify the features of digital images for analysis.
4. Implement the deep learning techniques using software tools.
5. Develop smart applications for various domains

Textbooks:
1. Tom Markiewicz& Josh Zheng,Getting started with Artificial Intelligence, Published
by O’Reilly Media,2017
2. Stuart J. Russell and Peter Norvig,Artificial Intelligence A Modern Approach
3. Richard Szeliski, Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications, Springer 2010
4. Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio, Aaron Courvill, Deep Learning

Reference Books:
1. AurélienGéron,Hands on Machine Learning with Scikit-Learn and TensorFlow
[Concepts, Tools, and Techniques to Build Intelligent Systems], Published by
O’Reilly Media,2017
2. A classical approach to Artificial Intelligence, Munesh Chandra Trivedi, Khanna
Publications
3. Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning, Chandra S.S. & H.S. Anand, PHI
Publications
4. Machine Learning, Rajiv Chopra, Khanna Publishing House

Mode of evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests, End Semester Examinatio

Page 158 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

DISCIPLINE ELECTIVE - I

Page 159 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. III Year I Semester

18ME401 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL


L T P C
Course Prerequisite: Zeal to learn the subject 3 0 0 3

Course Description:
The production planning and control course provides an understanding, importance and
relevance to the various components and functions of production planning and control such as
work study, product planning, process planning, production scheduling, Inventory Control and
also the recent trends like manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise
Resource Planning (ERP).

Course Objectives:
1. Describes the production facilities in the best possible manner along with the proper
systematic planning of production activities.
2. Discuss the adequate arrangement of men, money, materials, machines tools, implements
and equipment relating to production.
3. Articulates all the arrangements to remove possible obstacles in the way of smooth
production.
4. Discuss about the production targets to be achieved by keeping in view the sales forecast.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control-Types of
production- job- batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect -
Functional aspects- Operational aspect-Durability and dependability aspect aesthetic aspect.
Profit consideration- Standardization, Simplification & specialization- Break even analysis-
Economics of a new design. (9)

UNIT II: WORK STUDY


Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis,
Development - Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study – work measurement
- Techniques of work measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling -
Synthesis from standard data - Predetermined motion time standards. (8)

UNIT III: PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING


Product planning - Extending the original product information-Value analysis-
Problems in lack of product planning-Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information
needed for process planning- Steps in process planning-Quantity determination in batch
production-Machine capacity, balancing- Analysis of process capabilities in a multi product
system (8)

UNIT IV: FORE CASTING AND PRODUCTION SCHEDULING


Forecasting – Importance of forecasting – Types of forecasting, their uses – General principles of
forecasting – Forecasting techniques – qualitative methods and quantitative methods, Production
Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-Basic scheduling
problems - Line of balance – Flow production scheduling-Batch production scheduling-Product
sequencing Dispatching-Progress reporting and expediting- Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for
aligning completion times and due dates. (10)

Page 160 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC


Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Effect of demand on inventories-Ordering
procedures, Two bin system -Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order
quantity and economic lot size- ABC analysis-Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer
integrated production planning systems- elements of JIT Systems-Fundamentals of MRP II
And ERP. (10)

Course Outcomes:
The successfully complete of this course, Student will be able to:
1. Interpret the role and importance of manufacturing planning & control system
processes.
2. Demonstrate manufacturing planning & control system processes in industry.
3. Compare good manufacturing planning & control system processes in industry.
4. Examine manufacturing planning & control system practices in industry
5. Understand the inventory control and its applications in manufacturing systems.

Text Books:
1. R. Panneerselvam, “Operations Research”, Second Edition, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
2006.
2. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, First edi
tion, S. Chand and Company, 2000.
3. James.B.Dilworth,”Operations management – Design, Planning and Control for
manufacturing and services” Mcgraw Hill International edition 1992.

Reference Books:
1. Samson Eilon, “Elements of Production Planning and Control”, Universal Book
Corpn.1984
2. Elwood S.Buffa, and Rakesh K.Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations Management”,
8thEdition, John Wiley and Sons, 2000.
3. KanishkaBedi, “Production and Operations management”, 2nd Edition, Oxford
university press, 2007.
4. Melynk, Denzler, “Operations management – A value driven approach” Irwin Mcgraw
hill.
5. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “Operations Management”, 9th edition, Thomson learning
IE,2007
6. Jain. K.C & L.N. Aggarwal, “Production Planning Control and Industrial
Management”, KhannaPublishers, 1990.
7. Chary. S.N. “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata
McGrawHill, 1995.
8. Upendra Kachru, “Production and Operations Management – Text and cases”, 1st
Edition, Excel books 2007.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 161 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. III Year I Semester

18ME402 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS


L T P C
2 1 0 3

Course Prerequisites: 18ME108, 18ME112

Course Description: Computational fluid dynamics (CFD) has become an essential tool in
analysis and design of thermal and fluid flow systems in wide range of industries. Few
prominent areas of applications of CFD include meteorology, transport systems (aerospace,
automobile, high-speed trains), energy systems, environment, electronics, bio-medical (design
of life-support and drug delivery systems), etc. The correct use of CFD as a design analysis or
diagnostic tool requires a thorough understanding of underlying physics, mathematical
modeling and numerical techniques. The user must be fully aware of the properties and
limitations of the numerical techniques incorporated in CFD software. This course aims to
provide precisely these insights of CFD.

Course Objectives:
Specific objectives may be summarized as:
1. To give the students necessary exposure to the CFD techniques such that they can solve
basic fluid flow problems using CFD
2. To understand mathematical characteristics of partial differential equations.
3. To learn computational solution techniques for various types of partial differential
equations.

UNIT 1: GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

Introduction and Philosophy of Computational Fluid Dynamics, Need for problem solving with
CFD, Applications of CFD, Basic structure of a CFD code, Governing equations: Continuity
equation, Momentum equation, Energy equation, Mathematical classification of partial
differential equations: Parabolic, Elliptic and Hyperbolic equations, Well posed and ill posed
problems, Initial and boundary conditions. (9)

UNIT 2: LINEAR SOLVERS AND FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR DIFFUSION


PROBLEMS

Solution of discretised linear algebraic equations, Iteration method: Jacobi’s method,


Elimination methods: L-U decomposition technique, Tridiagonal matrix algorithm (Thomas’
algorithm), Finite Volume Method for one-dimensional steady state diffusion, two-
dimensional diffusion and three-dimensional diffusion problems. (9)

UNIT 3: FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION-DIFFUSION PROBLEMS

Steady one dimensional convection and diffusion, Central differencing scheme, Properties of
discretisation schemes, Assessment of the central differencing scheme for convection-diffusion
problems, Upwind differencing scheme, Hybrid differencing scheme, Quick scheme.
(9)

Page 162 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT 4: SOLUTION ALGORITHMS FOR PRESSURE-VELOCITY COUPLING IN


STEADY FLOWS

Introduction, Staggered grid, Momentum equations, The SIMPLE algorithm, Assembly of a


complete method, SIMPLER and SIMPLEC methods. (9)

UNIT 5: TURBULENCE MODELLING AND GRID WITH APPROPRIATE


TRANSFORMATION

Effect of turbulence on time-averaged Navier-Stokes equations, Characteristics of simple


turbulent flows, Turbulence models: Mixing length model, The k-ε model, Reynolds stress
equation model, Grid with Appropriate Transformation: General transformation of the
equations, Metrics and Jacobian, Stretched (Compressed) grids, Boundary fitted coordinate
systems, Elliptic grid generation. (9)

Course Outcomes:
1. Develop the basic governing equations for fluid and heat flow by examining the physical
boundary conditions.
2. Construct the discretized equations according to the nature (i.e. elliptic, parabolic and
hyperbolic) of the flow problem.
3. Solve the linear algebraic equations by direct and iterative methods.
4. Analyze and evaluate various finite volume based CFD schemes to solve convection-
diffusion problems.
5. Apply the variations of SIMPLE schemes for incompressible flows.
6. Select an appropriate model for turbulence flow and method for grid generation.

Text Books:
1. John D Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publisher, 1st
Edition, 1995.
2. K Muralidhar & T Sundararajan, “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa
Book Distributors Pvt Ltd, 2nd Edition, 2009.
3. H K Versteeg& W Malalasekara, “Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The
Finite Volume Method”, Pearson Education (Indian Reprint), 2nd Edition, 2007.

References:
1. S V Patankar, “Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow”, Taylor & Francis, 1st Edition,
1980.
2. R H Pletcher, J C Tannehill& D A Anderson, “Computational Fluid Mechanics and Heat
Transfer”, CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2012.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 163 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. III Year I Semester

18ME403 TOOL AND DIE DESIGN


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Design of Machine Elements, Manufacturing Technology, Machine
Tools and Metrology
Course Description:
The course provides wide knowledge on component production through jigs for guiding the
cutting tool to make hole and fixtures to locate the components while machining in various
machines tools. The course will help to design press tools for sheet metal components like
simple die, compound, progressive and combination dies. The course enhances the knowledge
on different type mechanical presses, hydraulic press and press brakes.

Course Objectives:
The students will study and understand:
1. The metal cutting process, single point, multi point tools in various for components
Production.
2. The fundamentals and functioning of locating, work holding and clamping devices.
3. Design principles of drill bushes, drill jigs for various industrial applications.
4. The design concepts and various fixtures used in different machine tools.
5. Design procedures of progressive, compound or combination dies for press working
operations

UNIT I: DESIGN OF CUTTING TOOLS


Tool Design, Tool Design objectives, Challenges to the Tool Designer, Requirements of a Tool
Designer, Overview of Metal cutting process, Tool materials, Introduction to cutting tools,
Design of single point cutting tool, Design of Multipoint cutting tool-Drills, Milling cutters,
broaches. (10)

UNIT II: WORK HOLDING DEVICES


Introduction, Functions of work holding devices, Basic principle of six-point location, Locating
methods and devices, Principle of clamping and Types of clamps, Design considerations.
(8)

UNIT III: DESIGN OF JIGS


Types of drill jigs, Drill bushes, General considerations in the design of drill jigs, Simple
designs of Template, Plate, Channel, Box, Angle plate (9)

UNIT IV: DESIGN OF FIXTURES


Design principles, Types of fixtures, Fixtures for machine tools: Lathe, Milling, Boring,
Broaching and Grinding, Inspection and Welding fixtures (9)

UNIT V: PRESS TOOL DESIGN


Press tools, Fundamentals of die cutting operations, Cutting action in punch and die operations,
Centre of pressure, Design of piercing die, Design of blanking die, Progressive, Compound and

Page 164 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Combination dies (9)

Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Design a single and multi-point cutting tools.
2. Use relevant Locating and Clamping devices for components
3. Identify the relevant jigs for the given component with justification.
4. Choose and design a fixture for selected operations on machine tool
5. Select and design blanking, piercing die, compound die, combination die for various
sheet metal components.

Text Books:
1. Donaldson C., Lecain G.H. and Goold V.C. (2007), Tool Design, 3rd edition, Tata
McGraw- Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.
2. F.W.Wilson.F.W. "Fundamentals of Tool Design”, ASME, PHI, New Delhi, 2010.
3. Edward G. Hoffman (2004) Jigs and Fixtures Design, Thomson - Delmar Learning
Series, Singapore.

References:
1. Joshi P. H., (2004) Jigs and Fixtures, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Jeff Lantrip, David A. Smith and John G. Nee, (2003) Fundamentals of Tool Design,
5th Edition, Society of Manufacturing Engineers.
3. Surendra Kenav and Umesh Chandra, Satyaprakashan, Production Engineering Design
(Tool Design), New Delhi.
4. Amitabha Bhattacharya and Inyong Ham, Design of Cutting Tools use of Metal Cutting
Theory, ASTME Publication, Michigan USA.
5. V.Arshinov, G.Alekseev, Metal Cutting Theory and Cutting Tool Design, MIR
Publications.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 165 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. III Year I Semester

18ME404 FLUID POWER SYSTEMS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: 18MAT108

Course Description:
Fluid power systems are the systems that use pressurized fluids for generation, control and
transmission of power. Such systems are extensively used in automobiles, heavy machinery
and in control systems. This course is intended to provide the students with necessary
background in the fluid power so that they acquire a working knowledge of the typical fluid
power systems. The fundamental concepts required for design, analysis, application, operation
and maintenance of fluid power systems will be covered.

Course Objectives:
1. To review the fluid mechanics principles that is relevant to fluid power systems
2. To teach basic components of fluid power systems and their working principles
3. To elucidate the working of hydraulic pumps, motors, valves, actuators and their use in
hydraulic circuits
4. To elucidate the working of compressors, pneumatic actuators, valves and their use in
pneumatic circuits.
5. To explicate the design and analysis of hydraulic and pneumatic circuits.
6. To describe the implementation logic control using fluid circuits
7. To present best practices in design, safe operation and maintenance of Fluid Power
Systems

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO HYDRAULIC POWER


Pascal’s law and problems on Pascal’s Law, Continuity equation, Bernoulli’s equation.
Structure of Hydraulic Control System. The Source of Hydraulic Power: Pumps, Pumping
theory, pump classification, gear pumps, vane pumps, piston pumps, pump performance, pump
selection. Variable displacement pumps.
Hydraulic Actuators and Motors: Linear Hydraulic Actuators [cylinders], Mechanics of
Hydraulic Cylinder loading, Hydraulic Rotary Actuators, Gear motors, vane motors, piston
motors, Hydraulic motor theoretical torque, power and flow rate, hydraulic motor performance.
(9)

UNIT II: CONTROL COMPONENTS IN HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS


Directional Control Valves – Symbolic representation, Constructional features, pressure
control valves –direct and pilot operated types, flow control valves. Shock absorber .Hydraulic
Circuit Design and Analysis: Control of single and double acting Hydraulic Cylinder,
regenerative circuit, pump unloading circuit, Double pump Hydraulic system, Counter Balance
Valve application, and Hydraulic cylinder sequencing circuits. Locked cylinder using pilot
check valve, cylinder synchronizing circuits, speed control of hydraulic cylinder, speed control
of hydraulic motors, accumulators and accumulator circuits. (9)

Page 166 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT III: PNEUMATIC CONTROL


Characteristics of compressed air. Structure of Pneumatic control system. Compressed air:
Production of compressed air – compressors, preparation of compressed air- Driers, Filters,
Regulators, and Lubricators. Pneumatic Actuators: Linear cylinders– Types, conventional type
of cylinder working, end position cushioning, seals, mounting arrangements applications.
Rotary cylinder types construction and application. Design parameters, selection.
Pneumatic Control valves: Design and constructional aspects, poppet valves, slide valves spool
valve, suspended seat type slide valve. Simple Pneumatic Control: Direct and indirect actuation
pneumatic cylinders, use of memory valve. Signal processing elements: Use of Logic gates –
OR and AND gates pneumatic applications. (9)

UNIT IV: MULTI-CYLINDER APPLICATIONS


Coordinated and sequential motion control. Motion and control diagrams – signal elimination
methods. Cascading method. Practical application examples (up to two cylinders) using
cascading method (using reversing valves). Electro-Pneumatic control: Principles-signal input
and output pilot assisted solenoid control of directional control valves, use of relay and
contactors. Control circuitry for simple single cylinder applications. Distribution of
compressed air- Piping layout. (9)

UNIT V: ACCESSORIES AND MAINTENANCE OF FLUID POWER SYSTEMS


Conductor sizing for flow rate requirements, Hydraulic oils; Desirable properties, general type
of fluids, sealing devices, reservoir system, filters and strainers, problem caused by gases in
hydraulic fluids, wear of moving parts due to solid particle contamination, temperature control,
trouble shooting. Safety of Fluid Power Systems. (9)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Apply the basic fluid mechanics principles used in design and analysis of fluid power
systems
2. Distinguish between different types of fluid power systems and know their relative
merits and demerits
3. Design and analyze components of hydraulic systems like pumps, hydraulic motors,
cylinders, valves and actuators.
4. Design and analyze components of pneumatic systems like compressors, valves and
actuators.
5. Describe the working principles of controls for fluid power circuits.

Text Books:
1. Fluid Power with applications, Anthony Esposito, Fifth edition pearson education, Inc.
2000.
2. Pneumatics and Hydraulics, Andrew Parr. Jaico Publishing Co. 2000.

References:
1. Pinches, Industrial Fluid Power, Prentice hall
2. D. A. Pease, Basic Fluid Power, Prentice hall
3. J. J. Pipenger, Industrial Hydraulics, McGraw Hill
4. H. L. Stewart, Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Industrial Press

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 167 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. III Year I Semester

18ME405 FINITE ELEMENT METHODS

L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Mechanics of Solids

Course Description:
To understand the basic concepts of finite element methods and to analyse and solve
structural, dynamic analysis, and heat conduction problems by applying finite element methods

Course Objectives:
1. To teach students the basic principles of finite element methods.
2. To teach students the basic implementation method of finite element methods
3. To teach students how to perform 1-D and 2-D structural analysis using finite element
methods.
4. To teach students how to perform 1-D heat conduction analysis using finite element
methods.
5. To teach students how to perform 1-D dynamic analysis using finite element methods.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO FEM


Basic concepts, general description, application of FEM, advantages of FEM, basic element
shapes, interpolation functions, principle of minimum potential energy, Galerkin method, basic
equations of elasticity, strain displacement relations, solution of system of equations using
Gauss elimination (9)

UNIT II: 1-D STRUCTURAL PROBLEMS


Axial bar element – stiffness matrix, load vector, temperature effects, quadratic shape functions
, Analysis of plane trusses
Analysis of beams – Hermite shape functions, stiffness matrix, load vector (9)

UNIT III: 2-D PROBLEMS


Introduction to CST, iso-parametric element, shape functions, stiffness matrix and load vector,
boundary conditions (9)

UNIT IV: 1-D HEAT TRANSFER ANALYSIS


Derivation of the basic differential equation, finite element solution for combined conduction
and convection (9)

UNIT V: FEM FOR MODAL ANALYSIS


Lagrange’s equations, consistent and lumped mass matrices for bar and 2D truss Characteristic
polynomial approach - Eigenvalues, Eigenvectors, natural frequencies, mode shapes for bars
and 2D trusses (9)

Page 168 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. State the applications of FEM in various engineering fields
2. Calculate stresses and strains for one-dimensional problems using finite element
methods
3. Analyse 2-D problems using FEM
4. Analyse and solve 1D heat transfer problems
5. Analyse the frequency response and find the mode shapes of bars and 2D trusses

Text Book:
1. Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering, Chandraputla, A and Belegundu, PHI

References:
1. Finite Element Methods in Engineering, SS Rao, Pergamon A first course in Finite
Element Method, Daryl L Logan, Cengage Learning

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 169 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. III Year I Semester

18ME426 DESIGN THINKING AND PRODUCT INNOVATION

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Basic Engineering Mathematics and Physics

Course Description:
This course is an introductory course on Innovation and Design Thinking. It focuses on
providing you with the knowledge and fundamental understanding of Creativity, Innovation,
and some contemporary approaches to innovation including design thinking. The course will
cover seminal models, key principles, and methods and techniques in innovation and design
thinking, including their applications.

Course Objectives:
1. To Define Creativity and Innovation
2. Recognize the significance of innovation
3. Discuss both individual and contextual factors that are linked to creativity
4. Discuss key concepts and principles that guide innovative practices
5. Examine approaches to innovation practiced by various organizations

UNIT I: HISTORY OF MODERN DESIGN


An insight into design, History of Modern design: Early innovations industrialization, new
materials, nature of design, work design for survival and survival through design (9)

UNIT II: DESIGN THINKING APPROACHES


Design thinking: Design thinking as a systematic approach to innovation, brain storming, visual
thinking, design challenges, product development (9)

UNIT III: DECISION MAKING


Innovation, art of innovation, strategies for creativity, teams for innovation, design
alternatives, decision making for new design (9)

UNIT IV: DESIGN THINKING APPLICATIONS


Design thinking for strategic innovation, application of design, thinking in business and
strategy, linking design thinking solution to business challenges, enterprise creativity,
competitive logic of business strategy, design thinking for start-ups (10)

UNIT V: DESIGN THINKING TECHNIQUES


Creative thinking techniques: Linear thinking, constraints in design, design thinking to meet
corporate needs, designing today for tomorrow (8)

Page 170 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:

1. Grasp the fundamental capabilities in the methods used for practicing Design Thinking
2. Understand challenges and benefits of Design Thinking
3. Communicate clearly about Design Thinking
4. Innovate in multidisciplinary teams
5. Have a process and mindset suited to innovation and creative problem-solving

Text Books:
1. Tim Brown, “Change by Design” Harper Bollins (2009)
2. Idris Mootee, “Design Thinking for Strategic Innovation”, John Willey & Sons (2013)

References:
1. Tom Kelley and Jonathan Littman, “The Art of Innovation”, Harper Collins Business
(2001)
2. Jimmy Jain, “Thinking for Startups”, Notion Press (2018)
3. David Raizman, “History of Modern Design”, Laurence King Publishing Ltd. Edition 2
(2010)
4. Tom Kelley and Jonathan Littman, “ The Art of Innovation”, Harper Collins Business
(2001)
5. Michael Michalko, “Thinker Toys”, Ten Speed Press (2006)

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 171 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

DISCIPLINE ELECTIVE – III

Page 172 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. III Year II Semester

18ME406 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF WELDED STRUCTURES


L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description: Design of welded structures is one of the important and critical area of
mechanical engineering. This is an important course for both UG & PG level, which deals with
fundamentals of welding design under static and fatigue loading. Residual stress and distortion
characteristics in welding.

Course Objectives:
1. To provide the basic knowledge and importance of design, weldability of steels,
different properties and failure theories.
2. To provide the basic knowledge of different welding symbols and terminology,
different joints involved in welding.
3. To understand the concepts of different static loading conditions on welded joints.
4. To introduce the concept of fatigue or dynamic loading and its importance on welded
structures.
5. To understand the concepts of residual stress and distortion in welded structures.
UNIT I:
Introduction to design, Engineering properties of steels, Weldability of structural steels, Carbon
equivalent, Fatigue and creep properties of welded joints, Theories of failures; (8)

UNIT II:
Type of welds and weld joints, Description of welds terminology, Welding symbols, Edge
preparation, Sizing of welds in structure, Type of connections in welded structures, Combined
groove and fillet weld connections; (8)

UNIT III:
Weld calculations for lap, Butt and fillet welds, Analysis of connections for direct tension or
compression and shear loading conditions, Resistance to moment by combined tension and
compression; (8)
UNIT IV:
Fatigue fracture, Residual fatigue strength, Factors affecting fatigue life, Design of welded
joints for fatigue loading, Methods for improving the fatigue strength of welded joints,
Dynamic behavior of joints - stress concentrations, Fatigue behaviour of hollow section joints,
Reliability analysis and safety factors applied to fatigue design. (9)

UNIT V:
Heat flow in welding, Effect of welding parameters on heat distribution, Calculation of peak
temperature, Weld thermal cycle, Cooling rate and solidification time, Welding residual
stresses - causes, occurrence, Residual stress distribution, Influence of residual stress in static
and dynamic loading, Introduction to stress corrosion. Distortion in welding and factors
affecting distortion (12)

Page 173 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
The focus of Design of welded structures is the fundamentals of welded joint design on the
basis of strength and rigidity under both static and fatigue loadings. By the end of the course
student should:
1. Have a fundamental knowledge of welded structures, its design principle, welding
characteristics of steel and application of theories of failures in welded structures.
2. Have a clear overall picture about various welded symbols and terminology, different
edge preparations for butt joint, different types of joints in welded structures and fillet
with groove combination in welded structures.
3. Be familiar with various types of static loadings and their combinations for different
welded joints.
4. Have a mastery of fatigue or dynamic loading on welded joints and concepts of stress
concentration. Also, they will know how to apply them to the practical engineering
problems;
5. Be able to know the concepts of heat distribution, residual stress, distortion and weld
thermal cycle in different welded structures.

Text Book:
1. Rational Welding Design by Gray, T. G. F. and Spence, J., Butterworths, 1992.

Reference Books:
1. Welding Hand Book, Vol. 2 & 3, 9th Ed., American Welding Society, 2001.
2. Principles of Welding By Messler, R.W. Jr., John Wiley & Sons, 1999.
3. Parmer. R. S. “Welding Engineering and Technology”, Khanna Publications, 1999
4. Bhattacharya.M, ‘Weldment Design’, Association of Engineers, 1991

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 174 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. III Year II Semester

18ME407 REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING


L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisite: 18MAT103 & 18ME112

Course Description:
This course explains the principles of Refrigeration and Air-conditioning and help to design
any Refrigeration and Air-conditioning system through comprehensive explanations of the
fundamental principles. Ideally suited to those with a little or no knowledge of the subject. It
also provides the criteria to select the refrigerant for a particular application. The course
consists of different refrigeration cycles and understanding of psychrometry and psychrometric
processes used for the purpose of air-conditioning.

Course Objectives:
1. The course is designed to give an in-depth study of theory of refrigeration and air-
conditioning and their applications.
2. The techniques of analysis and design of refrigeration and air-conditioning systems will
also be discussed.

Unit_I: INTRODUCTION AND IDEAL CYCLES

Necessity and applications, Refrigerating machines, Comparison of heat engine, heat pump
and refrigerating machine, Unit of refrigeration and C.O.P, Methods of refrigeration, Reversed
Carnot cycle with gas and vapour as refrigerants, Limitations of reversed Carnot cycle with
vapour as refrigerant, Air refrigeration: Reversed Brayton or Joule or Bell Coleman cycle,
Open and dense air refrigeration systems, Refrigeration needs of aircrafts, Simple aircraft
cycle, Boot-strap aircraft cycle, Problem solving. (9)

Unit_II: VAPOUR COMPRESSION AND ABSORPTION REFRIGERATION


SYSTEMS

Modifications in reversed Carnot cycle with vapour as a refrigerant, Simple vapour


compression refrigeration cycle, Representation cycle on T-S, P-h and h-s charts – COP - Effect
of sub cooling and super heating, Actual cycle of operation, Influence of various parameters
on system performance, Use of p-h charts, Multi-pressure systems, Multi-stage compressor,
evaporator and expansion valve, Simple vapour absorption system, Comparison with vapour
compression refrigeration system, Properties of working fluids in vapour absorption systems,
Estimation of maximum COP, Modifications to simple vapour absorption system. (9)

Unit III: SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND REFRIGERANTS

Compressors: General classification, Comparison, Advantages and disadvantages,


Condensers: Classification, Working, Evaporators: Classification, Working, Expansion
Valves: Types, Working,
Refrigerants: Desirable properties, Common refrigerants used, Nomenclature. (9)

Page 175 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Unit-IV: INTRODUCTION TO AIR-CONDITIONING

Properties of moist air, Thermodynamic wet bulb temperature, Psychrometric chart,


Psychrometric processes in air conditioning equipment, Simple air-conditioning system and
state and mass rate of supply air, Summer air-conditioning apparatus dew point, Winter air-
conditioning (9)

Unit-V: LOAD CALCULATIONS IN AIR CONDITIONING AND DUCT DESIGN

Fabric heat gain, Overall heat transmission coefficient, periodic heat transfer through walls and
roofs, Internal heat gains, System heat gains, Break-up of ventilation load and Effective
Sensible Heat factor, Cooling load estimate, Heating load estimate.
Classification of ducts, Governing equations used for the air flow analysis through ducts,
Pressure losses in duct flows, Equivalent diameter for a rectangular duct, Methods of Duct
design. (9)

Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will be able to,
1. Describe the ideal refrigeration cycles and applications of refrigeration systems.
2. Compute the COP and power requirement of vapour compression refrigeration system,
vapour absorption refrigeration system.
3. Explain the working principles of various components of vapour compression
refrigeration system.
4. Analyze air-conditioning processes using the principles of psychrometry.
5. Evaluate cooling and heating loads in an air-conditioning system.

Text Books:
1. Arora C.P. ‘Refrigeration and Air-conditioning’, 3rd Ed Tata McGraw Hill Co, 2000.
2. Domkundwar and Arora. ‘Refrigeration and Air-conditioning’, Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P)
Ltd., 2010.

References:
1. Manohar Prasad, ‘Refrigeration and air-conditioning’, Wiley Eastern Ltd, 1983.
2. Roy J. Dossat, ‘Principles of Refrigeration’, 4th Ed. Pearson Education Asia, 2002.
3. Edward G. Pita, ‘Air Conditioning Principles and Systems’, 4th Ed. Pearson Education
Asia, 2003.
4. W.F. Stoecker and J.W. Jones, ‘Refrigeration and air-conditioning’, 2nd Edition,
McGraw-Hill, Inc. New Delhi.

Data Book: Refrigerant and Psychrometric Properties (Tables & Charts) SI Units, Mathur
M.L. & Mehta F.S., Jain Brothers.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 176 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. III Year II Semester

18ME408 INTERNET OF MANUFACTURING THINGS


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
The manufacturing industries are the significant sustainable sources for the modern society.
Traditional manufacturing systems and relative management approaches need constant review
and upgrade to meet the demands of modern complex products. Internet of Things (IoT), has
potential to collect, process, analyze and communicate real time data, while enhancing overall
productivity within given time frame with higher flexibility and transparency. This course tries
to provide the essential knowledge to bridge the IoT and Manufacturing systems.

Course Objectives:
1. To provide the basic knowledge and importance of IoT and its logic and applications
in Manufacturing Industry.
2. To provide the basic knowledge of real time information sensing and cloud computing
in manufacturing system.
3. To understand the concepts of IoT enabled smart trolleys and assembly systems.
4. To provide basic understanding of real-time production performance analysis methods.
and scheduling system.
5. To provide basic understanding of real-time, information driven production scheduling
system.
UNIT I:
Introduction- Concept of IoT, Existing manufacturing paradigms and their limitations,
Applications of IoT in Manufacturing System (MS), The Concept of IoT-MS and its
limitations.
Overview of IoT-Enabled Manufacturing System- Overall architecture of IoT-MS,
Integration framework of real-time manufacturing information, The work logic of IoT-MS,
Core technologies in IoT-MS. (9)

UNIT II:
Real-Time(RT) Multisource Manufacturing Information Sensing System - Introduction,
Overall Architecture of RT and multisource RMMISS, Deployment of multi-sensors, Multiple
sensors manager, Multiple source manufacturing Information Capturing and Sharing, Case
studies.
Cloud Computing-Based Manufacturing – Introduction, Overall architecture, Cloud
Machine Model, MS-UDDI, Task driven manufacturing service method. (9)

UNIT III:
IoT-Enabled Smart Assembly Station- Introduction, RFID based applications and assistant
services in assembly line, Overall architecture, Real-time: Status Monitoring, Production
Guiding, Data Sharing, Production Requeuing.

Page 177 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

IoT Enabled Smart Trolley– Material handling and real time strategy, RT-data capturing in
manufacturing field, overall architecture, Real-time: Information capturing, Encapsulation,
Exchange, Workflow based guidance. Two stage combination optimization method. (9)

UNIT IV:
Real-Time (RT) Production Performances Analysis Method- Real-time: Production
monitoring technique, KPI analysis, Anomaly analysis. Overall architecture, Even hierarchy of
critical event, HTCPN analysis. Real time production anomaly diagnosis (9)

UNIT V:
Real-Time Information Driven Production Scheduling System – Introduction, RT
production scheduling, Agent technology, Manufacturing information monitor technology,
Overall architecture, Equipment agent, Capability evaluation agent model, RT- scheduling
agent model, Production execution monitor agent model. (9)

Course Outcomes:
The focus of this course is to study the inculcation of IoT in manufacturing systems and how
the system turns smart. By the end of the course student should:
1. Be able to understand the fundamentals of IoT and its application in manufacturing
systems.
2. Have a clear overall picture of multisource manufacturing information sensing system
and cloud manufacturing.
3. Outline various methods of IoT enabled smart assembly systems and summarize the
usage of smart trolleys
4. Make use of various RT- production performance analysis methods for test its
applicability to real life problems.
5. Make use of various RT- information driven production scheduling system for test its
applicability to real life problems.

Text Book:
1. Fei Tao, Y. Zhang, “Optimization of Manufacturing Systems Using the Internet of
Things”, 1st Edition, 2017, Academic Press, Elsevier.

Reference Book:
1. A. Gilchrist, “Industry 4.0: The Industry Internet of Things”, 1st Edition, 2016, Apress.
2. M. Dastbaz, P. Cochrane, “Industry 4.0 and Engineering for a Sustainable Future”, 1st
Edition, 2019, Springer.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 178 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. III Year II Semester

18ME409 SOLAR ENERGY FOR PROCESS HEAT AND POWER


GENERATION
L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: 14ME104&14ME112

Course Description:
This course discusses in details the theory and design aspects of various types of solar thermal
collectors. Details of thermal performance of different thermal collector configurations are
included. Emphasis has been given to the concentrating collector for power generation and the
applications of solar energy for industrial process heat. Solar thermal energy storage through
different mechanics and processes and discussed.

Course Objectives:
1. Describe the various aspects of solar radiation to analyse and estimate solar radiation
at different locations.
2. Articulate the theories and parameters for designing solar energy system
3. Dissipate the knowledge for estimating different losses in solar energy systems

UNIT I: GENERAL INTRODUCTION AND SOLAR ENERGY


Overview of various renewable energy technologies, importance and historical development
of solar energy applications, Environmental characteristics associated with solar energy
utilization, Present Indian and international energy scenario of conventional and RE sources.
Introduction to Solar energy, Global Energy Needs and Resources, solar energy conversion
thermal conversion, photovoltaic conversion, limitations of solar energy conversion,
Fundamentals of Solar Radiation, The Physics of the Sun and Its Energy Transport, Thermal
Radiation Fundamentals, Sun–Earth Geometric Relationship. (9)

UNIT II: SOLAR RADIATION AND MEASUREMENT


Solar Radiation and measurement, Extraterrestrial Solar Radiation, Estimation of Terrestrial
Solar Radiation, Instruments for Measuring Solar Radiation and Sunshine Detectors for Solar
Radiation Instrumentation, Sun earth angles, solar hourly radiations-Radiations on Horizontal
and inclined surfaces, solar energy measuring techniques. (9)

UNIT III: SOLAR ENERGY COLLECTOR


Engineering and technological considerations of various collectors used for solar energy
harnessing, such as Flat-Plate Collectors, Tubular Solar Energy Collectors, Concentrating
Solar Collectors, Parabolic Trough Concentrator, Central Receiver Collector, Compound-
Curvature Solar Concentrators, Experimental Testing of Collectors, Performance of collectors:
Characteristics of various collectors, Critical factors affecting the performance of various
collectors, Different kinds of tests to assess the performance of collector. (9)

UNIT IV: SOLAR THERMAL ENERGY STORAGE


Thermal Energy Storage: types of thermal energy storage, Energy Storage: Sensible heat
storage, Liquid, Solid, packed bed, Latent heat storage. Design of Storage System Selection of
Storage Material, Energy Transport Subsystems, Piping Systems, Pressure Drop, Heat Loss,
Heat Exchangers, and Storage systems used for SHWS applications. (9)

Page 179 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: SOLAR HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS


Solar Water-Heating Systems, Natural Circulation, Forced-Circulation Systems Solar Air-
Heating Systems, Thermal load estimations, Engineering and technological considerations of
Analysis and design various Solar Space Cooling and Refrigeration, Passive Solar House:
Passive Solar Heating, Cooling and Daylighting. (9)

Course Outcomes:
The successfully complete of this course, Student will be able to:
1. Understand the principles of operation of the broad spectrum of renewable energy
Technologies and solar energy
2. Estimate or measure solar radiation at any location.
3. Design appropriate solar collectors required in various applications.
4. Discuss the importance of storage systems, types of thermal storage and alternate
methods
5. Understand the principles of solar cooking, solar desalination, solar ponds, solar space
heating, solar industrial process heating and solar power generation

Text Books:
1. F Kreith and J F Kreider: Principles of Solar thermal Engineering.
2. S P Sukhatme: Solar Energy

Reference Books:
1. J A Diffie and W A Beckman: Solar Engineering of Thermal processes
2. A B Meinel and F P Meinel: Applied Solar Engineering
3. Tiwari, G.N. and SayestaSuneja., Solar Thermal engineering Systems, Narosa
Publishing House.
4. Duffie and Backuran, Solar Thermal Engineering. H.P. Gupta.,Solar Engineering

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 180 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B.Tech. III Year II Semester

18ME410 INDUSTRIAL TRBOLOGY AND CORROSION


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Engineering Chemistry

Course Description:
Corrosion, erosion, wear and friction are central mechanisms for damaging a surface
and thereby the integrity of a structure or a component. Tribology is the science of interacting
surfaces in relative motion. This course deals with the most central topics within surface
protection and tribology. The course deals with how to achieve desired lifetime of a component
or construction by application of coatings, surface modification and/or lubrication.

Course Objectives:
1. To give awareness of most important surface degradation mechanism (corrosion and
wear)
2. To expose the students to different types of corrosion.
3. To give in-depth idea of friction, wear, and lubrication.
4. To make the students understand the principles of lubrication, lubrication regimes,
theories of hydrodynamic and the advanced lubrication techniques.
5. To introduce corrosion and wear testing techniques.

UNIT I : INTRODUCTION TO SURFACES ENGINEERING AND FRICTION


Engineering surfaces - Surface characterization, Contact of engineering surfaces: Hertzian and
nonhertzian contact, Contact pressure and deformation in non-conformal contacts. Causes of
friction, Stick-slip friction behaviour and friction instability, sliding and rolling friction,
frictional heating and temperature rise. Friction measurement techniques. (9)

UNIT II: WEAR


Wear and wear types, Mechanisms of wear, Wear of metals and non-metals. Wear models -
asperity contact, constant and variable wear rate, geometrical influence in wear models, wear
damage. Wear in various mechanical components. wear measurement and controlling
techniques-Fluid jet erosion test-Abrasive wear tester- rolling sliding wear tester- pin-on-disc
wear tester- scratch testing- Wear Measurement /Quantification. (9)

UNIT III: LUBRICATION


Lubricants and their physical properties, types of additives, extreme pressure lubricants,
recycling of used oils and oil conservation, oil emulsion, Selection of Lubricants,
Hydrodynamic lubrication: Reynolds Equation, Infinite bearing, short bearing
Elastohydrodynamic Lubrication: Principle and application, pressure - viscosity term in
Reynold„s equation, Hertz theory, Ertel-Grubin Equation. (8)

UNIT IV : BASIC ASPECTS OF CORROSION


Introduction, Importance of corrosion, Economics of corrosion. Corrosion of Materials:
Oxidation, Corrosion and wear. Basics of Thermodynamics and Kinetics of oxidation and
corrosion. Pourbaix diagram, Polarization, Mixed potential theory. Passivity, Characteristics
of passivation, degradation of composites. (8)

Page 181 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: TYPES OF CORROSION


Fundamental of corrosion studies, types of corrosion, atmospheric, galvanic, pitting, crevice
corrosion, intergranular corrosion and dealloying. Stress corrosion cracking, Season cracking,
high temperature corrosion. Laboratory corrosion tests, corrosion monitoring methods.
Cathodic and anodic protection: Principles, applications, advantages and disadvantages.
Chemical methods of corrosion control: Use of inhibitors and coatings. (11)

Course Outcomes:
The students will be able to
1. Apply the basic theories of surface engineering to predictions about the frictional
behaviour of contact surfaces
2. Understand the wear theories, types of wear, mechanism, factors and selection of
materials.
3. Characterize features of rough surface and liquid lubricants as they pertain to interface
sliding
4. Understand the surface degradation mechanisms
5. Solve problems involving various types of corrosion.

Text Books:
1. Introduction to Tribology, B. Bhushan, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 2002
2. An Introduction to Corrosion Science and Corrosion Inhibition,.N.Banerjee, ,Oxonian
Press, P.Ltd., New Delhi, 1985.

References:
1. Engineering Tribology, PrasantaSahoo, PHI Learning Private Ltd, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Engineering Tribology, J. A. Williams, Oxford Univ. Press, 2005.
3. Zaki Ahmad, Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion Control, Butterworth
Heinemann, London, 2006

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 182 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

MANDATORY NON-CREDIT COURSES

Page 183 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Mandatory Course

18CHE901 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES

L T P C
2 0 0 0

Course Prerequisites: Basic knowledge about sciences up to intermediate or equivalent


level.
Course Description: The course deals with basic concepts of environment, its impact on
human, universe, consumption of energy sources, effects, controlling methods for pollution and
the environmental ethics to be followed by human beings.
Course Objectives:
1. To make the students aware about the environment and its inter-disciplinary nature and to
emphasize the importance of the renewable energy sources.
2. To familiarize the concept of Ecosystem and their importance.
3. To bring the awareness among students about the importance of biodiversity and the need
for its conservation.
4. To make the students understand the adverse effects of environmental pollution, its causes
and measures to control it.
5. To introduce the environmental ethics and emphasize the urgency of rain water harvesting
along with water shed management.
UNIT I:MULTIDISCIPLINARY NATURE OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Definition, Scope and Importance – Need for Public Awareness. Renewable energy Resources:
Solar energy - solar cells, wind energy, tidal energy. Non-renewable energy resources: LPG, water
gas, producer gas. Overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture – fertilizer and pesticides. (6)

UNIT II: ECOSYSTEMS

Concept of an ecosystem. Structure – functions – Producers, Consumers and Decomposers –


Ecological succession – Food chains, Food webs and Ecological pyramids – Introduction,
types, characteristic features, structure and function of the following ecosystems: Forest, Desert
and Lake. (6)

UNIT III: BIODIVERSITY AND ITS CONSERVATION

Introduction, Definition: Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical
and aesthetic values. Biogeographical zones of India. Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss,
poaching of wildlife, Endangered and Endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity:
In-situ and Ex-situ conservation of biodiversity. (6)

Page 184 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT IV: ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION

Definition, Cause, effects and control measures of pollution – Air, Water, Soil and Noise. Solid
Waste Management: Effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes.

(6)

UNIT V SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Urban problems related to Water conservation, rain water harvesting and watershed
management; Climate changes: global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear
accidents. Case Studies: Population growth, variation among nations and population explosion.

(6)

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the students will be able to acquire


1. Ability to understand the natural environment, its relationship with human activities and
need of the day to realize the importance of the renewable energy sources.
2. The knowledge of various ecosystems and their importance along with the concepts of food
chains, food webs and ecological pyramids.
3. Familiarity with biodiversity, its importance and the measures for the conservation of
biodiversity.
4. The knowledge about the causes, effects and controlling methods for environmental
pollution, along with disaster management and solid waste management.
5. Awareness about the sustainable development, environmental ethics, social issues arising
due to the environmental disorders.
Text Books:

1. Text book of Environmental Studies for Undergraduate Courses by Erach Bharucha for
University Grants Commission, Universities Press, 2005.
2. Environmental Studies by R. J. Ranjith Daniels and Jagdish Krishnaswamy, (Wiley Re-
print version 2014).
3. Chemistry for Environmental Engineering/C.N. Sawyer, P.L. McCarty, G.F. Parkin
(TataMcGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, 2003).
4. Environmental Chemistry by B.K. Sharma, (Goel Publishing House, 2014).
5. Environmental Studies by Benny Joseph (TataMcGraw Hill, Second Edition, 2009).

Reference Books:

1. Environmental Science & Engineering by Dr. A. Ravikrishnan, Hitech Publishing


Company Pvt. Ltd. 2013.
2. Perspectives in Environmental Studies, Second edition, Anubha Koushik and C.P.
Koushik, New Age International (P) Limited, Publishers, 2004.
Mode of Evaluation: Assignments and Mid Term Tests

Page 185 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Mandatory Course

18HUM902 INDIAN CONSTITUTION


L T P C
Course Prerequisites: 2 0 0 0

Course Objectives:
The course is intended to:
1. To know about Indian constitution;
2. To know about central and state government functionalities in India; and
3. To know about Indian society.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
Historical Background – Constituent Assembly of India – Philosophical foundations of the
Indian Constitution – Preamble – Fundamental Rights – Directive Principles of State Policy –
Fundamental Duties – Citizenship – Constitutional Remedies for citizens.

(6)

UNIT II: STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF CENTRAL GOVERNMENT


Union Government – Structures of the Union Government and Functions – President – Vice
President – Prime Minister – Cabinet – Parliament – Supreme Court of India – Judicial Review.

(6)

UNIT III: STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF STATE GOVERNMENT


State Government – Structure and Functions – Governor – Chief Minister – Cabinet –
State Legislature –Judicial System in States – High Courts and other Subordinate Courts.

(6)

UNIT IV CONSTITUTION FUNCTIONS


Indian Federal System – Center – State Relations – President’s Rule –
Constitutional Amendments –Constitutional Functionaries - Assessment of working of the
Parliamentary System in India.

(6)

UNIT V INDIAN SOCIETY


Society: Nature, Meaning and definition; Indian Social Structure; Caste, Religion, Language
in India Constitutional Remedies for citizens – Political Parties and Pressure Groups; Right of
Women, Children and Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes and other Weaker Sections.

(6)

Page 186 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:
1. Understand the functions of the Indian government; and
2. Understand and abide the rules of the Indian constitution.

Text Books:
1. Durga Das Basu, “Introduction to the Constitution of India “, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi.
2. R.C.Agarwal, (1997) “Indian Political System”, S.Chand and Company, New Delhi.
3. Maciver and Page, “ Society: An Introduction Analysis “, Mac Milan India Ltd., New
Delhi.
4. K.L.Sharma, (1997) “Social Stratification in India: Issues and Themes”, Jawaharlal
Nehru University, New Delhi.

References:
1. Sharma, Brij Kishore, “ Introduction to the Constitution of India:, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi.
2. U.R.Gahai, “Indian Political System “, New Academic Publishing House, Jalaendhar.
3. R.N. Sharma, “Indian Social Problems “, Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments and Mid Term Tests

Page 187 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Mandatory Course

18HUM903 ESSENCE OF INDIAN TRADITIONAL KNOWLEDGE


L T P C
2 0 0 0

Course Prerequisite:
Basic understanding on Indian culture, traditions, and beliefs. Logistic approach towards
learning.

Course Description:
This course deals with introducing and elaborating the importance and capabilities of the
ancient, Indian Traditional Knowledge System in achieving heights of success and well-being
towards humanity.

Course Objectives:
1. To get exposed to the basics of ITKS;
2. To understand the types and techniques used in Traditional Indian Medicine;
3. To introduce and elaborate the kind of art, architecture along with Vaastu Shashtra
knowledge systems. To elucidate the product and construction technologies;
4. To familiarize the basic knowledge in ancient and traditional Astronomy and astrology
along with aviation technologies in traditional knowledge systems; and
5. To acquire the knowledge on ancient contemporary world and IT revolution.

UNIT I: Indian Traditional Knowledge Systems (TKS) – Indian monuments; British Impact;
Basics sciences - Philosophy and physical science; Indian physics; story of Kanada; Indian
Chemistry; Indian Mathematics.
(6)

UNIT II: (Traditional Medicine)


Ayurveda – origin, texts, the three greater classics, three lesser classics, concepts; manifestation
of creation; mental constitution; three Doshas; individual constitution, clinical process and
proceedings; sushruta Samhita and its contents; shastrakarma; Yoga; and siddha.
(6)

UNIT III: Production and construction Technology; Art, Architecture and VastuShashtra;
crafts and trade – Impact of Technology on society
(6)

UNIT IV: Astronomy and Astrology; Aviation technology in Ancient India - Vedic
Astronomy; Eclipses, calculations using earths circumferences; Heliocentric theory of
Gravitaton; vedic Astrology; Vaimanika Sastra and its ancient notes.
(6)

Page 188 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: Information Technology in India – trends – Contemporary issues of IT Industry –


Impact of IT on Indian society

(6)
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:

1. Understand the basics of Indian Traditional Knowledge System and the origin of basic
science and Mathematics,
2. Get familiarized with various traditional medical methods and their implications in the
human betterment,
3. Understand various production and construction technologies along with art and
architectural implications in TKS,
4. Get the knowledge Vedic astronomy and astrology and get to know the ancient aviation
technologies, and
5. Understand the outreach of the TKS to the contemporary world and gain the Indian action
in protecting the TKS along with IT revolution.

Text Books:
1. Traditional Knowledge System in India, Amit Jha, Atlantic publishers, 2009. ISBN: 978-
81-269-1223-0.
2. Traditional Knowledge System & Technology In India, Basanta Kumar Mohantra, Pratibha
Prakashan (2012), ISBN-10: 8177023101

References:
1. Online Materials

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments and Mid Term Tests

Page 189 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Mandatory Course

18CE904 DISASTER MANAGEMENT

L T P C
2 0 0 0
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description:
The goal of this course is to expose the under graduate students regarding different types of
disasters and preparedness needed to mitigate their effects. The course matrix will cover
various natural, biological, chemical and emerging hazards and risks that may cause property,
loss of lives, and livestock’s. Thus, the future engineers will understand the social
responsibility for the preparedness and mitigation of the damages caused by the disasters.

Course Objectives:
1. To make aware the students about disasters and their impact on living beings.
2. To ensure the students for the understanding on vulnerability, disasters, disaster
prevention and risk reduction.
3. To gain a preliminary understanding of approaches for the Disaster Risk Reduction
(DRR)
4. To enhance awareness of institutional processes available in the country for the disaster
risk mitigation.
5. To develop rudimentary ability to respond to their surroundings with potential
disaster response in areas where they live, with due sensitivity
UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
Introduction, Etymology of disaster, Concepts and definitions: disaster, hazard, vulnerability,
risks, Resilience, prevention and mitigation.

(6)
UNIT II: TYPES OF DISASTERS
Types of Disaster; natural disasters (earthquakes, volcanoes, forest fires and explosions, heat
and cold waves, floods, draught, cyclones, tsunami, landslides, soil erosion); manmade
disasters (industrial pollution, artificial flooding in urban areas, nuclear radiation, chemical
spills, transportation accidents, terrorist strikes, etc.), hazard and vulnerability profile of India,
mountain and coastal areas, ecological fragility. (6)

UNIT III: DISASTER IMPACTS (6)


Disaster Impacts (environmental, physical, social, ecological, economic, political, etc.); health,
psycho-social issues; demographic aspects (gender, age, special needs); hazard locations;
global and national disaster trends; climate change and urban disasters.

(6)

Page 190 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT IV: DISASTER RISK MITIGATION MEASURES


Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR) - Disaster management- four phase approach;
prevention, mitigation, preparedness, relief and recovery; structural and non-structural
measures; risk analysis, vulnerability and capacity assessment; early warning systems, Post
disaster environmental response (water, sanitation, food safety, waste management, disease
control, security, communications), DRR programmers in India and the activities of National
Disaster Management Authority. Roles and responsibilities of government, community, local
institutions, NGOs and other stakeholders; Policies and legislation for disaster risk reduction,

(6)
UNIT V: IMPACT OF DEVELOPMENTAL ACTIVITIES
Disasters, Environment and Development - Factors affecting vulnerability such as impact of
developmental projects and environmental modifications (including of dams, landuse changes,
urbanization etc.), sustainable and environmental friendly recovery; reconstruction and
development methods.

(6)
Course Outcomes:

The student will develop competencies in:

1. Understanding on the nature of disasters


2. Application of Disaster Concepts to Management
3. Analyzing Relationship between Development and Disasters.
4. Ability to understand Categories of Disasters
5. Realization of the responsibilities to society
Text
1. Ghosh G.K., 2006, Disaster Management, APH Publishing Corporation

Reference Books:
1. http://ndma.gov.in/ (Home page of National Disaster Management Authority)
2. http://www.ndmindia.nic.in/ (National Disaster management in India, Ministry of Home
Affairs).
3. Pradeep Sahni, 2004, Disaster Risk Reduction in South Asia, Prentice Hall.
4. Singh B.K., 2008, Handbook of Disaster Management: Techniques & Guidelines, Rajat
Publication.
5. Disaster Medical Systems Guidelines. Emergency Medical Services Authority, State of
California, EMSA no.214, June 2003
6. Inter Agency Standing Committee (IASC) (Feb. 2007). IASC Guidelines on Mental
Health and Psychosocial Support in Emergency Settings. Geneva: IASC

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments and Mid Term Tests

Page 191 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

MINORS in
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Stream Name: Electric Vehicles

(Offered to all the Engineering Disciplines except Mechanical Engineering)

Page 192 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester

18MDME101 FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: Zeal to Learn 3 0 0 3

Course Description:
Automotive vehicle: IC engine- layout, components, materials, and production processes,
Mechanical unit: transmission, drive train, steering, chassis, suspension, brakes, wheels, and
tyres.

Course Objectives:
1. This is an introductory multi-disciplinary course aimed at providing a comprehensive
overview of the operating systems of a modern automobile.
2. It also aims at analysing the working features of an automobile vehicle with the
technologies, materials and processes associated with it.
3. Understand the fundamentals, principle of operation and performance of various
clutches and gear boxes.
4. Understand the principle of operation, performance and gain the knowledge about
various steering system, wheels and tyres, suspension and braking system.

UNIT- I: INTRODUCTION TO IC ENGINES AND WHEELS AND TYRES SYSTEM


Introduction to IC engines- Two Stroke and Four Stroke - IC Engine Operation, SI & CI
engines, Engine Performance Evaluation, Cylinder block, crankcase, cylinder head, piston,
piston rings, piston pin, connecting rod, crankshaft, fly wheel, valves and valve timing.
Wheels and Tyres System – Types of Wheels, Construction, Structure and Function, Wheel
Dimensions. Tyres – Tyre functions, Tyre Materials, Types of Tyres, Tyre Construction, Tyre
Designations, Tyre Force Generation, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Problems.
(8)
UNIT- II: TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Transmissions and Driveline - Introduction, Friction Clutches, Gear Theory – Straight Tooth
Spur Gears, Helical Spur Gears, Straight Tooth Bevel Gears, Spiral Bevel Gears, Hypoid
Gears.
Manual Transmissions - Transmission Power Flows, Synchronizer Operation
Automatic Transmissions - Fluid Couplings and Torque Converters, Planetary Gears,
Planetary Gear-Set Torque Converter, Simpson Drive, Hydraulic Control System.
Continuously Variable Transmissions (CVT) - Van Doorne Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT), Torotrak Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT), Driveshafts -
Hooke’s Joints, Shaft Whirl, Differentials, Four-Wheel Drive (FWD) and All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). (10)

Page 193 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT- III: STEERING SYSTEM


Steering Systems - Introduction, Steering Mechanisms - Worm Systems, Worm and Sector,
Worm and Roller, Recirculating Ball, Rack and Pinion Steering, Power Steering.
Steering Dynamics- Low-Speed Turning, High-Speed Turning, Effects of Tractive Forces,
Wheel Alignment – Camber, Steering Axis Inclination (SAI), Toe, Caster, Wheel Alignment
Steering Geometry Errors, Front-Wheel-Drive Influences, Driveline Torque, Loss of Cornering
Stiffness Due to Tractive Forces, Increase in Aligning Torque Due to Tractive Forces, Four-
Wheel Steering- Low-Speed Turns, High-Speed Turns, Implementation of Four-Wheel
Steering.
Vehicle Rollover - Quasi-Static Model, Quasi-Static Rollover with, Suspension, Roll Model,
Problems (9)

UNIT- IV SUSPENSION SYSTEM


Suspension System – Introduction - Construction, Operation & Materials; Perception of Ride,
Basic Vibrational Analysis, Single-Degree-of-Freedom Model (Quarter Car Model), Two-
Degrees-of-Freedom Model (Quarter Car Model), Two-Degrees-of-Freedom Model (Half Car
Model).
Suspension System Components – Springs -Leaf Springs, Torsion Bars, Coil Springs, Rubber
Springs, Plastic Springs, Pneumatic (Air) Springs, Dampers (Shock Absorbers).
Suspension Types -Solid Axle Suspensions - Hotchkiss Suspensions, Four-Link Suspensions,
de Dion Suspensions; Independent Suspensions - Short-Long Arm Suspensions (SLA),
MacPherson Struts, Trailing Arm Suspensions, Multi-Link Suspensions, Swing Arm
Suspensions.
Roll Center Analysis - Wishbone Suspension Roll Center Calculation, MacPherson Strut
Suspension
Roll Center Calculation, Hotchkiss Suspension Roll Center Calculation, Vehicle Motion About
the Roll Axis. Active Suspensions (9)

UNIT- V BRAKING SYSTEM


Braking System – Braking Dynamics – Necessity, Brake Efficiency, Weight Transfer,
Stopping Distance and Time, Determination of Braking Torque, Hydraulic Principles.
Brake System Components- Master Cylinder, Power Assistance, Combination Valve-
Proportioning Valve, Pressure Differential, Switch, Metering Valve.
Drum Brakes- Analysis of Drum Brakes – Brake Efficiency, Brake Shoe Theory, Types of
Master & Wheel Cylinders, Brake Linings, Bleeding of Brakes, Examples.
Disc Brakes- Disc Brake Components, Brake Disc, Brake Pads, Caliper, Disc Brake Analysis,
Heat Dissipation from Disc Brakes.
Power Brakes- Vacuum Brakes, Air Brakes and Electric Brakes, Air- Hydraulic Brakes,
Electronic Braking System (EBS)- Antilock Brake Systems (ABS) & Traction Control System
(TCS ), Hill Hold Control, Hill Descent Control, Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD),
Electronic Stability Program (ESP). (9)

Page 194 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
After the successful completion of this course:

1. The students will be able to know the functioning of various automobile components as per
the global trends and designing of wheels and tyres system.
2. The students will be able to analyse, evaluate and design the Transmission System.
3. The students will be able to analyse, evaluate and design the Steering System.
4. The students will be able to analyse, evaluate and design the Suspension System.
5. The students will be able to analyse, evaluate and design Braking System.

Text Books:
1. D. Crolla, D. E. Foster, T. Kobayashi and N. Vaughan (Editors-in-Chief), Encyclopedia of
Automotive Engineering, Parts 1-6, Wiley, 2015.
2. R. Stone and J. K. Ball, “Automotive Engineering Fundamentals”, SAE International, 2004.

Reference Books:
1. T. K. Garrett, K. Newton, and W. Steeds, “The Motor Vehicle”, 13th Edition, SAE
International, 2001.
2. Kirpal Singh – “Automobile Engineering” Vol. I - Standard Publications, New Delhi.
3. G.B.S Narang – “Automobile Engineering” – Khanna Publications, New Delhi.
4. T.R. Banga & Nathu Singh – “Automobile Engineering” – Khanna Publications, New
Delhi.
5. William Crouse and Donald Anglin – “Automotive Mechanics” – Mc Graw Hill.
6. V. Ganesan, Internal Combustion Engines, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
7. M. Ehsani, Y. Gao and A. Emadi, Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles:
Fundamentals, Theory and Design, 2nd Edition, CRC Press, 2010.
8. D. B. Astow, G. Howard and J. P. Whitehead, “Car Suspension and Handling”, 4th Edition,
SAE International, 2004.
9. R. Limpert, “Brake Design and Safety”, SAE International, 1992.
10. Jack E Rjavee, “Automotive Technology - A system approach”, Thomson Asia Pte Ltd,
Singapore, 3rd edition, 2004.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 195 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester

18MDME102 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICAL VEHICLES

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: 18EEE101

Course Description:
This course introduces the fundamental concepts, principles and analysis of Battery
Management System in Electric Vehicles

Course Objectives:
1. To study the various aspects of batteries and parameters involved in BMS.
2. To learn the selection of BMS topology.
3. To understand the basic functionality of BMS.
4. To study the various design of BMS.
5. To understand the installation of BMS.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC VEHICLE


Past, Present & Feature of EV, Current Major Issues, Recent Development Trends, EV
Concept, Key EV Technology, State-of-the Art EVs & HEVs, Comparison of EV Vs IC
Engine. EV Configuration: Fixed & variable gearing, single & multiple motor drive, In-wheel
drives (8)

UNIT II: INTRODUCTION TO TRACTION MOTORS:


Propulsion Machine Overview - DC Machines, AC Machines, Comparison of Traction
Machines, A case study; Machine Specification - Four-Quadrant Operation, Rated Parameters,
Rated Torque, Rated and Base Speeds, Rated Power, Peak Operation, Starting Torque;
Characteristic Curves of a Machine - Constant-Torque Mode, Constant-Power Mode,
Maximum-Speed Mode, Efficiency Maps. (9)

UNIT III: HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE


Configuration of HEV (Series, Parallel, Series-parallel &Complex), Power Flow control,
Examples. Power flow control in all HEV configurations, Examples of HEV system
performance. (8)

UNIT IV: FUNDAMENTALS OF EV CONTROLLERS


Introduction to Control, Feedback Controller Design Approach, Modeling the
Electromechanical System, The Mechanical System, The PM DC Machine, The DC-DC
Power Converter, The PI Controller, Designing Torque Loop Compensation, Determining
Compensator Gain Coefficients for Torque Loop, Designing Speed Control Loop
Compensation, Determining Compensator Gain Coefficients for Speed Loop, Acceleration of
Battery Electric Vehicle (BEV) using PM DC Machine, Acceleration of BEV using WF DC
Machine. (10)

Page 196 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: STORAGE & CHARGING


Different Batteries and Ultracapacitors; Battery characteristics (Discharging &Charging)
Battery Chargers: Conductive (Basic charger circuits, Microprocessor based charger circuit.
Arrangement of an off-board conductive charger, Standard power levels of conductive
chargers, Inductive (Principle of inductive charging, Soft-switching power converter for
inductive charging), Battery indication methods, Charging Infrastructure: Domestic Charging
Infrastructure, Public Charging Infrastructure, Normal Charging Station, Occasional Charging
Station, Fast Charging Station, Battery Swapping Station, Move-and-charge zone.
(10)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, students will able to
1. Understand the various parameters involved in battery pack .
2. Classify the BMS based on functionality.
3. Understand the application of BMS in Electric Vehicle.
4. Interpret the design of BMS.
5. Execute the installation, testing of BMS.

Text Books:
1. John G. Hayes and A. Goodarzi, “Electric Powertrain - Energy Systems, Power electronics
and drives for Hybrid, electric and fuel cell vehicles”, Wiley Publication, 2018.

References:
1. K Wang Hee Nam: AC Motor Control & Electrical Vehicle Application, CR Press, Taylor
& Francis Group, 2019
2. C.C Chan, K.T Chau: Modern Electric Vehicle Technology, Oxford University Press Inc.,
New York 2001
3. Iqbal Hussein, Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, CRC Press, 2003.
4. James Larminie, John Lowry, Electric Vehicle Technology Explained, Wiley, 2003.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 197 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME103 PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY OF AUTOMOTIVE COMPONENTS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Zeal to learn the subject

Course Description:
The Production Technology of Automobile course provides an understanding, importance and
relevance to the manufacturing processes and materials used for producing various automotive
components.

MANUFACTURING OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINE COMPONENTS


Course Objectives:
1. To study and understand the concepts of forming process and know the components
produced by forging, extrusion and hydro forming processes.
2. To know about the principle and methods of gear manufacturing process
3. To know about the recent trends for production of automobile components
4. To acquire knowledge in understanding the manufacturing processes and functional
requirement of automotive components.

UNIT I: MANUFACTURING OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINE COMPONENTS


Cylinder block, Cylinder head - Materials, Engine Block Casting -Low pressure die casting,
High pressures die casting, expendable pattern casting. Milling, Drilling, Boring, Honing,
Reaming, Plasma spray coating.
Camshaft-Materials, Closed die forging, Impression die forging- forging force, and Finishing
operations. Heat treatment.
Crankshaft- Materials, Forging, Precision machining, Heat treatment.
Main bearing - Material, Centrifugal casting, Mold material, Surface finishing.
Main bearing cap- Hot chamber die casting, Cold chamber die casting-Precision drilling
operation,
Vibration Damper-Material requirement, Vacuum casting
Piston ring & Pin-Extrusion Process.
Valve tappets- Extrusion Process.
Valves-Monometallic, Bimetal, Stellied welded, Chrome plate, Nitrate. Process Cutting,
Friction welding (Bimetal Special purpose), Upsetting, Forging, Stellied welding, Heat
treatment, Grinding, Plasma spray coating
Automotive springs-Description, Functional requirement- Manufacturing process Hot rolling,
oil tempering, cold oiling, stress relieving, coil and grinding, nitriding, slot peering, Strain
aging
Inlet Manifold- Injection molding- Types, Injection molds.
Exhaust manifold- Process Welded tubular, Investment casting. engine blocks and valves
(11)

Page 198 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT II MANUFACTURING OF GEAR & AXLES


Gear hobbing and gear shaping machines, Gear finishing and shaving, Grinding and lapping
of hobs and shaping cutters, gear honing and gear broaching, Shotpeen hardening of gears.
Propeller shaft – Forging Process.
Transmission shaft & Transmission gear blanks: Forging, Extrusion process.
Rear axle drive shaft, axle housing spindles- Extrusion Process. (7)

UNIT III MANUFACTURING OF AIR & OIL FILTERS


Air Filters- -Materials Core materials, sealing agents, supporting materials.-Production
Process.
Oil Filters-Description of oil filters, Materials, Production Process.
Ceramic Catalytic Convertor-Description of ceramic catalytic convertor- Material
Properties-Processing- shaping, sintering, finishing,
Metallic Catalytic Convertor- Material Properties-Need for honey comb structure in metal
catalytic convertor-Methods of forming honey comb,
Spark Plug- Processing of ceramic, forming of electrode, bonding.
Foot brake linkage & steering knuckles – Forging Process.
Steering worm blanks, brake anchor pins- Extrusion Process. (9)

UNIT IV: MANUFACTURING OF GLASS &RUBBER


Glass -Raw material preparation & melting-Properties of glass -Classification of glass for automotive
application-Glass melting furnace- Pot furnace, Day tank, Continuous tank, Electric furnace, Shaping -
Spinning, processing, blowing, Rolling, Forming of glass fibre, Centrifugal spraying, Heat treatment -
Annealing & Tempering Processing,
Tyre- material selection, manufacturing process-Compound & mixing, Component Preparation, tyre
building, curing and inspection. (8)

UNIT V: MANUFACTURING OF AUTOMOTIVE BODY


Automotive body materials-Automotive steel grades High strength & ultra-strength-Stamping
aluminum sheet, stamping process & die-die operations & tooling -Blank holder-Draw Beads-
Blanking & sharing dies-Binding -Deep drawing-Coating & lubrication. Advances in metal
forming-Hydro forming & Extrusion, Flexible stamping procedure. TIG welding, Adhesive
bonding, Friction Stir welding, Lack welding-Weld bonding, Automotive joining -Joining an
automotive frame, Set assembling automotive doors. Mechanical fastening & bolting.
(10)

Course Outcomes:
After the successful completion of this course, Student will be able to:
1. Understand the functional requirement of automotive component for the required
manufacturing process like forging, forming processes, casting process, welding
process...etc.
2. Apply the various gear manufacturing methods needed for automotive applications.

Page 199 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

3. Use the recent trend in manufacturing process for making auto components such as catalytic
converters, air filters, etc.
4. Selection of the materials, design considerations and the manufacturing process for the glass
and rubber components.
5. Understand the manufacturing processes for constructing the automotive body.

Text Books:
1. Serope Kalpakjian, "Manufactruing Engineeirng and Technology", 6th Edition,Addison-
Wesley Publishing Co., Boston, 2010.
2. Mikell P. Groover "Fundamentals of Modern Manufactruing", 4th Edition,John Wiley &
Sons.

Reference Books:
1. Mohammed A. Omar, “The Automotive Body Manufacturing System and Processes” 1st
Edition, John Wiley & Sons Inc, USA, 2011.
2. Helmi A Youssef, "Manufacturing Technology", CRC Press, 2010.
3. P. N. Rao, “Manufacturing Technology", Vol- I & II, Mc Graw Hill International Editions.
4. R. K. Jain, “Production Technology”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi.
5. Benjamin W Niebel,"Modern Manufacturing Process Engineering", Mc Graw Hill
International Editions.
6. Degarmo Paul, Black, Kohser, “Materials and Processes in Manufacturing”, (12e), Wiley,
2017.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 200 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME104 BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: 18EEE101

Course Description:
This course introduces the fundamental concepts, principles and analysis of Battery
Management System in Electric Vehicles

Course Objectives:
1. To study the various aspects of batteries and parameters involved in BMS.
2. To learn the selection of BMS topology.
3. To understand the basic functionality of BMS.
4. To study the various design of BMS.
5. To understand the installation of BMS.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO BMS


Cells, Batteries, and Packs, Resistance; Li-Ion Cells - Formats, Chemistry, Safety, Safe
Operating Area, Efficiency, Aging, Modeling, Unequal Voltages in Series Strings; Li-Ion
BMSs - BMS Definition, Li-Ion BMS Functions, Custom Versus Off-the-Shelf; Li-Ion
Batteries - SOC, DOD, and Capacity, Balance and Balancing, SOH; Modeling of battery pack;
Modelling approach – Empirical, Physics-based model; (9)

UNIT II: BMS CHOICES


Functionality - CCCV Chargers, Regulators, meters, monitors, balancer, protector;
Technology – Analog, digital, technical comparison; Topology – centralized, modular, master-
slave, distributed, topology comparison. (9)

UNIT III: BMS FUNCTIONS


Measurement – Voltage, current, temperature; Management - Protection, Thermal
Management, Balancing, Redistribution, Distributed Charging; Evaluation - State of Charge
and Depth of Discharge, Capacity, Resistance, State of Health (SOH). (8)

UNIT IV: DESIGN OF BMS


Analog BMS design - Analog Regulator, Analog Monitor, Analog Balancer, Analog Protector;
Analysis of available Digital BMS design - ATMEL’s BMS Processor, Elithion’s BMS Chip
Set, National Semiconductors’ Complete BMS, Peter Perkin’s Open Source BMS, Texas
Instruments’ bq29330/bq20z90, Texas Instruments’ bq78PL114/bq76PL; Custom Digital
BMS - Voltage and Temperature Measurement, Current Measurement, Evaluation,
Communications, Optimization, Switching; Cell Interface; Distributed Charging
(10)

UNIT V: INSTALLING A BMS


Battery Pack Design, BMS Connections to Pack, BMS Connections to System; Configuring-
Cell Configuration, Pack Configuration, System Configuration; Testing; Troubleshooting -

Page 201 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Grounding, Shielding, Filtering, Wire Routing, Nuisance Cutouts (9)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of this course, students will be able to

1. Understand the various parameters involved in battery pack .


2. Classify the BMS based on functionality.
3. Understand the application of BMS in Electric Vehicle.
4. Interpret the design of BMS.
5. Execute the installation, testing of BMS.

Text Books:
1. Davide Andrea, “Battery Management Systems for Large Lithium-Ion Battery Packs”,
Artech House Publishers, 2010.
2. Gregory L Plett , “Battery Management Systems Volume II Equivalent-Circuit Methods”,
Artech House Publishers, 2016.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 202 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME201 ELECTRIC VECHILES LABORATORY


L T P C
0 0 4 2
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Objectives:
The objective of this laboratory is to expose the students practically, a broad knowledge of
working, assembly, disassembly, fault rectification of Vehicle – Electrical System, Suspension
System, Wheel & Tyre System, Steering System, Transmission System, Braking System, Axles
and Differential. It revises student’s knowledge of design thinking, material selection and
functionality of different parts.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

[1]. Dismantling, Study and Assembling of air brake system, antilock braking system and
fault detection.
[2]. Dismantling, Study and Assembling of Drum and Disc Braking System - Brake bleeding.
[3]. Dismantling, Study and Assembling of wheel balancing, wheel alignment machine and
vehicle lifting machine.
[4]. Dismantling, Study and Assembling of head light focusing of vehicles underbody
inspection of vehicle either by lifting the vehicle or bringing the vehicle over
underground inspection pit.
[5]. Dismantling, Study and Assembling of chassis system, steering systems with different
steering gearboxes.
[6]. Dismantling, Study and Assembling of Transfer case, Sliding mesh gear box, Synchro
mesh gear box, Constant mesh gear box and Automatic transmission system.
[7]. Dismantling, Study and Assembling of Constant Velocity Joint (Front Axles), Rear Axle
and Differential.
[8]. Dismantling, Study and Assembling of suspension system. To obtain the Charging and
discharging characteristics of a Battery
[9]. To design and simulated the bi-direction converter for EV charging
[10]. To design the speed control of Motor for EV application
[11]. Calibration of electric sensors utilized in EV
[12]. Design of driver circuits for the power controllers.

Textbook
2. Lab manual provided by the department

Reference Books

1. Automotive Trouble shooting and Maintenance by Anderson Ashburn.


2. Venk Spicer, Automotive Maintenance and Trouble shooting.
3. Ed May, Automotive Mechanics.
4. Bosch Automotive Handbook.

Page 203 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

5. James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “ John Wiley
& Sons,2003.
6. Iqbal Husain, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles-Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press,2003.
7. Mehrdad Ehsani, “Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”, CRC
Press,2005.
8. Ron HodKinson, “Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth
Heinemann Publication,2005.
9. Lino Guzzella, “Vehicle Propulsion System” Springer Publications,2005.
10. Service manuals of reputed vehicles.

Equipments Required:
1. Chassis.
2. Front axle with Rzeppa joint.
3. Rear axle with differential.
4. Sliding, constant mesh and synchromesh gear box.
5. Steering gear box with linkages.
6. Braking system components like, brake shoe, wheel cylinder, master cylinder, disc
braking system.
7. Antilock Braking System.
8. Suspension System.
9. Automotive Batteries and control systems.
10. Bi-Directional convertors, Electric sensors, Driver Circuits and Power Controllers.

Tools and Instruments required:


1. Spanners (Ring and Double and 6mm to 32mm)
2. Players (Cutting and nose)
3. Hammer and mallet
4. Screwdriver
5. Piston Ring Compressor
6. Piston Ring Extractor
7. Allen Key
8. Vernier caliper
9. Cylinder bore gauge
10. Puller
11. Torque wrench

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 204 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech IV Year I Semester

18MDME105 VECHILE BODY ENGINEERNG

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: Zeal to learn the subject 3 0 0 3

Course Description:
The Vehicle Body Engineering provides the basic knowledge about constructional details of
vehicle bodies and its aerodynamic structure. It provides an understanding, importance and
design of Seating and Body. It insights into the vehicle aerodynamics - vehicle drag and types,
various types and effects of forces and moments, various body optimization techniques and
wind tunnel testing. It provides an understanding, importance and design selection of the body
materials, trim, mechanism’s, and body repair.

Course Objectives:
5. The students can impart knowledge in construction of car body, design criteria, types of car
and safety aspects of car.
6. The students able to know the construction of bus body and dimensions of bus body and
safety aspects.
7. The students can impart knowledge in types of commercial vehicles, design of cab and in
aerodynamic testing, forces and moments.
8. The student will be well versed in the design and construction of external body of the
vehicles and materials used in vehicles.

UNIT I CAR BODY DETAILS


Types of Car body - Saloon, convertibles, Limousine, Estate Van, Racing and Sports car –
Visibility- regulations, driver’s visibility, improvement in visibility and tests for visibility.
Driver seat design -Car body construction-Various panels in car bodies. Safety aspect of car
body. (9)

UNIT II BUS BODY DETAILS


Types of bus body: based on capacity, distance travelled and based on construction. Bus body
lay out for various types, Types of metal sections used – Regulations – Constructional details:
Conventional and integral. driver seat design- Safety aspect of bus body. (8)

UNIT III COMMERCIAL VEHICLE DETAILS


Types of commercial vehicle bodies - Light commercial vehicle body. Construction details of
commercial vehicle body - Flat platform body, Trailer, Tipper body and Tanker body –
Dimensions of driver’s seat in relation to controls – Drivers cab design - Regulations. (8)

UNIT IV VEHICLE AERODYNAMICS


Objectives, Vehicle drag and types. Various types of forces and moments. Effects of forces and
moments. Side wind effects on forces and moments. Various body optimization techniques for
minimum drag. Wind tunnels – Principle of operation, Types. Wind tunnel testing such as:
Flow visualization techniques, Airflow management test – measurement of various forces and
moments by using wind tunnel. (10)

Page 205 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V BODY MATERIALS, TRIM, MECHANISMS AND BODY REPAIR


Types of materials used in body construction-Steel sheet, timber, plastics, GRP, properties of
materials. Body trim items-body mechanisms. Hand tools-power tools-panel repair-repairing
sheet metal-repairing plastics-body fillers-passenger compartment service- corrosion:
Anticorrosion methods, Modern painting process procedure-paint problems (10)

Course Outcomes:

After the successful completion of this course:

1. The students will be able to know design of car body and identify the car body parts in
a vehicle.
2. The students will be able to evaluate seating design, safety aspects and bus layout
design.
3. The students will be able to know about different aspects of commercial vehicle-
construction details, design of cabins, seats and body.
4. The students will be able to analyse the Role of various aerodynamic forces and
moments, measuring instruments.
5. The students will be able to find the material which can be used in car body, bus body,
painting process and tools used for body repairs.

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Powloski, J., Vehicle Body Engineering, Business Books Ltd., 1998.
2. James E Duffy, Body Repair Technology for 4-Wheelers, Cengage Learning,2009.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Wolf-Heinrich Hucho, “Aerodynamics of Road Vehicles”, 4th edition, 2000.


2. Giles, G.J., Body construction and design, Illiffe Books Butterworth & Co., 1991.
3. John Fenton, Vehicle Body layout and analysis, Mechanical Engg. Publication Ltd.,
London, 1992.
4. Braithwaite, J.B., Vehicle Body building and drawing, Heinemann Educational Books
Ltd., London, 1997.
5. Dieler Anselm., The passenger car body, SAE International, 2000
6. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Vehicle Technology” 2nd edition, Butterworth Heinemann,
2002.
7. Jack E Rjavee, “Automotive Technology- A system approach”, Thomson Asia Pte Ltd,
Singapore, 3rd edition, 2004.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 206 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

MINORS in
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING –
Stream Name: Digital Manufacturing

(Offered to all the Engineering Disciplines except Mechanical Engineering)

Page 207 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester

18MDME106 COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING PROCESSES


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Nil

Course Description:
This course is the first course of Mechanical minor degree in digital manufacturing technology.
It provides an insight of materials, manufacturing and its requirements of emerging practices.
Topics include selection of materials, manufacturing processes and machining processes and
various relevant activity. Computer aided manufacturing processes involves various functions
involved in the pre and post processes.

Course Objectives:
6. Study the Mechanical properties of materials and their functionality.
7. Selection of materials based on the applications and usability.
8. Study and understand the manufacturing processes and its requirements with modern
computer aided environment.
9. Learn various types of activities in manufacturing systems, principles and working
processes.
10. Understand and apply the knowledge to select the suitable material, manufacturing and
CNC machines.

UNIT I: MATERIALS PROPERTIES


Mechanical properties – fatigue strength – fracture Toughness – Thermal Properties – Magnetic
Properties – Fabrication Properties -electrical, optical properties – Environmental Properties,
Corrosion properties -shape and size – Material Cost and Availability- failure analysis
(8)

UNIT II: SELECTION OF MATERIALS


Selection of Materials for Biomedical Applications – Medical Products – Materials in
Electronic Packaging – Advanced Materials in Sports Equipment – Materials Selection for
Wear Resistance -Advanced Materials in Telecommunications – Using Composites –
Manufacture and Assembly with Plastics, fibre and Diamond Films. (9)

UNIT III: MANUFACTURING PROCESSES


Interaction of Materials Selection, Design, and Manufacturing Processes – Production
Processes and Equipment for Metals – Metal Forming, Shaping, and Casting – Plastic Parts
Processing -Composites Fabrication Processes – Advanced Ceramics Processing – surface
treatment -Resource -The Price and Availability of Materials. (9)

UNIT IV: COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING


CAM Concepts, Objectives & scope, Nature & Type of manufacturing system, Evolution,
Benefits of CAM, Role of management in CAM, Concepts of Computer Integrated
Manufacturing, Impact of CIM on personnel, Role of manufacturing engineers, CIM Wheel to
understand basic functions. Types of manufacturing systems, transfer lines, flexible

Page 208 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

manufacturing system (FMS), The manufacturing cell, tool management and workpiece
handling system, benefits of CIM. (9)

UNIT V: NC/CNC MACHINE TOOLS: NC AND CNC TECHNOLOGY


Types, Classification, Specification and components, Construction Details, Controllers,
Sensors and Actuators, CNC hardware: Re-circulating ball screw, anti-friction slides,
step/servo motors. Axis designation, NC/CNC tooling. Fundamentals of part programming,
Types of format, Part Programming for drilling, lathe and milling machine operations,
subroutines, do loops, canned Cycles, parametric sub routines. (10)

Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
6. Understand the materials properties and their characteristics.
7. Select the suitable material for the specific application.
8. Select and apply the suitable manufacturing process to make a product.
9. Explain the role and functions of Computers in manufacturing processes.
10. Explain the NC/CNC machine tools construction and applications.

Text Books:
1. Ashby, M. F. Materials selection in mechanical design, 4th edition, Elsevier, 2011.
2. Radhakrishna Subramanyan & Raju CAD/CAM/CIM, 4th edition, New Age
International (P) Ltd., Publishers, 2008.

References:
3. Mikell.P.Groover “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated
Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.
4. Chris McMahon and Jimmie Browne “CAD/CAM Principles", "Practice and
Manufacturing management “ Second Edition, Pearson Education, 1999.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 209 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester

18MDME107 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Nil

Course Description:
Product design and development is an important process of all manufacturing industries. This
course provides a comprehensive view of idea to product realization. In this course, the
students are introduced to various design for manufacture the product based on the
development cycle. Industrial design is introduced to the students to simulating the
manufacturing process in digital and virtual forms.

Course Objectives:
1. Describe the product development process and account for its conditions and terms and
use the most common methods of managing terms and concept development, use basic
sketching techniques to communicate ideas, plan, implement and present a design
project.
2. Use a CAD-software to design products with moving parts and with the help of top-
down methodology,
3. Create advanced solid and surface models, produce realistic images and simple
animations of a product,
4. Apply the PDM/PLM-processes to design products.
5. Apply the prototyping model concepts on new product development.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
Need for product design & development-Strategic importance of Product development -
integration of customer, designer, material supplier and process planner, Competitor and
customer - behaviour analysis. Understanding customer-promoting customer understanding-
involve customer in development and managing requirements - Organization process
management and improvement. (9)

UNIT II: CONCEPT GENERATION, SELECTION AND TESTING


Plan and establish product specifications. Task - Structured approaches - clarification - search-
externally and internally-Explore systematically - reflect on the solutions and processes -
concept selection - methodology - benefits. Implications - Product change - variety -
component standardization - product performance - manufacturability – Concept Testing
Methodologies. (9)

UNIT III: PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE


Product development management - establishing the architecture - creation - clustering -
geometric layout development - Fundamental and incidental interactions - related system level
design issues - secondary systems -architecture of the chunks - creating detailed interface
specifications-Portfolio Architecture. (8)

UNIT IV: INDUSTRIAL DESIGN


Integrate process design - Managing costs - Robust design - Integrating CAE, CAD, CAM
tools – Simulating product performance and manufacturing processes electronically - Need for

Page 210 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

industrial design-impact – design process - investigation of customer needs - conceptualization


- refinement - management of the industrial design process - technology driven products - user
- driven products - assessing the quality of industrial design. (10)

UNIT V: DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT


Definition - Estimation of Manufacturing cost-reducing the component costs and assembly
costs – Minimize system complexity - Prototype basics - Principles of prototyping - Planning
for prototypes - Economic Analysis - Understanding and representing tasks-baseline project
planning - accelerating the project-project execution. (9)

Course Outcomes:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
1. Summarize the concept of Product and Process for organization management.
2. Apply the structured approaches for concept generation, selection and testing of
products.
3. Solve system level design issues and creating interface specifications.
4. Explain the importance of CAD/CAM integration in industrial design process.
5. Explain the concept of design for manufacturing and product development.

Text Books:
1. Karl T. Ulrich and Steven D. Eppinger, Product Design and Development, McGraw –
Hill International Edns.1999
2. Kevin Otto, Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Indian Reprint 2004, Pearson Education

References:
6. Peter scalon, “Process planning, Design/Manufacture Interface”, Elsevier science
technology Books, Dec 2002.
7. Chitale A.V. and Gupta R.C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, 2nd Edition, PHI,
2002.
8. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation, Production, Systems and Computer Integrated
Manufacturing”, Pearson Education 2001.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 211 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME108 DIGITAL MANUFACTURING PLANNING AND CONTROL

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Nil

Course Description:
This course is essential for working in any capacity of operations in the supply chain because
students will gain a thorough understanding of Manufacturing Planning and Control key
elements. MPC, is responsible for the planning and control of the flow of materials through the
manufacturing process. For efficient, effective and economical operation in a manufacturing
unit of an organization, it is essential to integrate the manufacturing planning and control
system.

Course Objectives:
The general objectives of the course are to enable the students to
1. able to develop, manage and control all aspects of an effective and efficient
manufacturing planning and control system- a key to the success of any product
manufacturing company.
2. gain knowledge to develop a demand management system, including activities such as
forecasting, determining, and estimating customer demand, converting specific
customer orders into promised delivery dates, and balancing demand with supply
3. understand the Planning and forecasting-how to link strategic goals to production by
developing an overall business plan which integrates the various functional planning
efforts
4. construct and manage an effective operations planning and control for making good use
of manufacturing resources
5. understand the Materials Requirement Planning-using e- tool for simulation and
performing the detailed analysis.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
Overview of manufacturing systems and various issues of interest: Assembly Line, Repetitive
batch manufacturing, Cellular manufacturing, FMS, JIT, CIM. (7)

UNIT II: MANUFACTURING PLANNING


Preplanning: Forecasting, Economic analysis, Aggregate planning, Capacity planning,
Inventory planning.
Decision making in design of manufacturing systems : Group Technology, Line balancing,
Plant layout.
Using computer programmes solve forecasting and line balancing problem (9)

UNIT III: OPERATIONAL PLANNING


Operations planning : MRP, MRP II, Hierarchical planning systems, JIT systems, FMS
Operation and control: Lot sizing decisions, production scheduling, line of balance, quality
planning and control, cost planning and control, productivity planning and control and
applications of theory of constraints. (9)

Page 212 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT IV: WORLD CLASS MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS


Road map to World Class Manufacturing Systems: Ideal Manufacturing, Intelligent
Manufacturing and Agile Manufacturing Systems.
Simulation: Simulation analysis of manufacturing systems. (9)

UNIT V: IMPLEMENTATION OF DIGITAL MANUFACTURING


Applications of recent developments in IT including ERP, e-Business, Enterprise Applications
Integration (EAI) and Virtual Manufacturing: Concepts, Justification and Status of
development and implementation. (11)

Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the aspects of an effective and efficient manufacturing planning and
control system- a key to the success of any product manufacturing company.
2. Apply the knowledge to plan the management activities such as forecasting,
determining and estimating customer demand, converting specific customer orders into
promised delivery dates, and balancing demand.
3. Apply control strategies to production by developing an overall business plan which
integrates the various functional planning efforts
4. Explain the various functionalities of world class manufacturing system.
5. Explain the digital manufacturing process and issues on the implementation process.

Text Books:
3. R. B. Chase, N. J. Aanilano and F. R. Jacobs (2011), Production and Operations
Management- Manufacturing and Services, Tata McGraw Hill, APICS/CPIM Certification
Edition.
4. H. Noori and R. Radford (1995), Production and Operations Management, McGraw Hill
Inc.

References:
3. Danny Samson, “Manufacturing & Operations Strategy”, Prentice Hall, 1991
4. K.C. Jain & L.N. Aggarwal, “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”,
Khanna Publishers 1990.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 213 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME109 BIG DATA ANALYTICS FOR MANUFACTURING


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Nil

Course De3scription:
This course deals with real world applications of Big data especially in manufacturing
engineering. Begin with big data collection in the manufacturing sources and how effectively
utilised for further analysis in manufacturing activities. Various practical applications and their
case studies illustrates the potential possibility of improvement in the process towards world
class manufacturing.

Course Objectives: Specific objectives may be summarized as:


1. Optimize business decisions and create competitive advantage with Big Data analytics
2. Explore the fundamental concepts of big data analytics.
3. Learn to analyze the data acquisition in data collection systems.
4. Understand and apply big data analytics in the various manufacturing applications.
5. Understand the issues and challenges of Big data in design and manufacturing.

UNIT-I BIG DATA


Big Data and its Importance – Four V’s of Big Data – Drivers for Big Data – Introduction to
Big Data Analytics – Big Data Analytics applications. (7)

UNIT-II BIG DATA PROCESSING


Integrating disparate data stores - Mapping data to the programming framework - Connecting
and extracting data from storage - Transforming data for processing. (7)

UNIT-III DATA ACQUISITION


Data Acquisition, considerations, frameworks, big data collection systems, Messaging queues,
custom connectors. Batch analysis-case studies (7)

UNIT-IV APPLICATIONS IN MANUFACTURING


Benefits and Impacts of Big Data in Design and Manufacturing Engineering, Applying Big
Data Concepts to Improve Flat Steel Production Processes, Big Data in General Electric,
General Motors and the Automotive Industry, Big Data in Semiconductor Manufacturing and
Integrated Circuits, Big Data at Work for a Missile Plan, Big Data in Cloud-based Design and
Manufacturing. (12)

UNIT -V CHALLENGES AND ISSUES


Production Process Monitoring, Maintenance, Quality Assurance and Logistics for
Manufacturers, Big Data in CAD/CAE/CAM and CAD Educational Assessment, Methods,
Technologies and Technology Progress around Big Data, General Challenges of Big Data, Big
Data Challenges in Design and Manufacturing Engineering. (12)

Page 214 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon the completion of this course the students will be able to
1. Understand the business decisions and create competitive advantage with Big Data
analytics
2. Apply the fundamental concepts on the big data analytics.
3. Analyze the data acquisition in data collection and processing.
4. Understand and apply big data analytics in the various manufacturing applications.
5. Study and resolve the issues and challenges of Big data in design and manufacturing.

Text Books

3. Arshdeep Bahga & Vijay Madisetti, “Big Data Analytics: A Hands-On Approach,
Bahga, 2016.
4. Chris Eaton, Dirk DeRoos, Tom Deutsch, George Lapis, Paul Zikopoulos,
“Understanding Big Data: Analytics for Enterprise Class Hadoop and Streaming Data”,
McGrawHill Publishing, 2012.
5. Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, “Intelligent Data Analysis”, Springer, 2007.

References:
3. Bill Franks, “Taming the Big Data Tidal Wave: Finding Opportunities in Huge Data
Streams with Advanced Analytics”, John Wiley& sons, 2012.
4. Big data in manufacturing: a systematic mapping study, O’Donovan et al. Journal of
Big Data (2015) 2:20, DOI 10.1186/s40537-015-0028-x.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 215 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME202 COMUPTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING


LABORATORY
L T P C
Course Prerequisite: Nil 0 0 4 2

Course Objectives:
1. To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modelling software systems.
2. To study the features of CNC Machine Tool.
3. To expose students to modern control systems (Fanuc, Siemens etc.,)
4. To know the application of various CNC machines like CNC lathe, CNC Vertical
Machining centre and CNC EDM.
5. To study the rapid prototyping and build model using 3D printing.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
(i) Creation of 3D assembly model of following machine elements using 3D Modelling
software, Flange Coupling, Plummer Block, Screw Jack, Lathe Tailstock, Universal
Joint , Machine Vice, Safety Valves, Non-return valves, Connecting rod and Piston.
(ii) Manual Part Programming: Part Programming - CNC Machining Centre a) Linear
Cutting. b) Circular cutting. c) Cutter Radius Compensation. d) Canned Cycle
Operations.
Part Programming: CNC Turning Centre a) Straight, Taper and Radius Turning. b)
Thread Cutting. c) Rough and Finish Turning Cycle. d) Drilling and Tapping Cycle.
(iii) Computer Aided Part Programming :CL Data and Post process generation using CAM
packages. Application of CAPP in Machining and Turning Centre. 3D printing practice

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Draw 3D and Assembly drawing using CAD software.
2. Demonstrate manual part programming with G and M codes using CAM
3. CNC programming with machining practice with CNC Lathe and Milling
4. Develop the prototype using 3 D printer.

Text Books:
Lab manual provided by the department

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 216 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech IV Year I Semester

18MDME110 SMART SENSORS AND INDUSTRY 4.0


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisites: Nil

Course Description: Sensors has become an essential device in the process control monitoring
and applied in wide range of industries. The areas of applications of sensor technology include
meteorology, transport systems (aerospace, automobile, high-speed trains), energy systems,
environment, electronics, bio-medical (design of life-support and drug delivery systems), etc.
Now days variety of sensors developed for their inherent requirements. Industry 4.0

Course Objectives:
1. Study the working principle of various sensors.
2. Sensors calibrations for acquiring data.
3. Developing the smart manufacturing capabilities on the industrial process.
4. Learn the Industry 4.0 concepts and implement in smart manufacturing.
5. Know the data transmission and cyber security standards.

UNIT I: PHOTONIC AND OPTOELECTRONICS SENSORS


Optical Fiber Sensors: Devices and Techniques, Silicon Mirroring Sensors, Vision-Aided
Automated Vibrometer for Remote Audio–Visual Range Sensing, Optical Oxygen Sensors for
Micro- and Nanofluidic Devices. Infrared and Thermal Sensors: Thin Film Resistance
Temperature Detectors, Adaptive Sensors for Dynamic Temperature Measurements. (9)

UNIT II: MAGNETIC AND INDUCTIVE SENSORS


Accurate Scanning of Magnetic Fields, Low & High Frequency Measurements, Technologies
for Electric Current Sensors, Sound and Ultrasound Sensors, Piezo resistive, Wireless, and
Electrical Sensors, Microwave Sensors for Non-Invasive Monitoring of Industrial Processes,
Application of Inertial Sensors in Developing Smart Particles. (9)

UNIT III: SMART MANUFACTURING ENABLING TECHNOLOGIES


Design of Anti-Metallic RFID for Applications in Smart Manufacturing, Smart Manufacturing
Techniques using Sheet Forming, Software Development Tools to Automate CAD/CAM
systems, Interaction between Design Research and Technological Research in Manufacturing
Firm. (9)

UNIT IV: INDUSTRY 4.0


Defining industry 4.0, Why Industry 4.0 and Why Now?, Four Main Characteristics of Industry
4.0, benefits to business, Industry 4.0 design principles, Building Blocks of Industry 4.0.
Conceptual Framework for Industry4.0, Smart Factories: Introducing the Smart Factory,
Smart Factories in Action, Why Smart Manufacturing Is Important, Real-World Smart
Factories, New Internet services and business models. (9)

UNIT V: MANAGING THE DIGITAL TRANSFORMATION


Smart and Connected Product Business Models, Lean Production Systems for Industry4.0,
Internet of Things and New Value Proposition, Advances in Robotics in the Era of Industry
4.0, Overview of Cyber Security in the Industry 4.0 Era. (9)

Page 217 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
1. Understand the working principle of various sensors.
2. Calibrate a sensor for acquiring data.
3. Explain the smart manufacturing capabilities on the industrial process.
4. Understand the Industry 4.0 concepts and implement in smart manufacturing.
5. Apply the data transmission protocols to correlate the cyber security standards.

Textbook:
1. Alp Ustundag Emre Cevikcan Industry 4.0: Managing The Digital Transformation,
Springer Series in Advanced Manufacturing, Springer International Publishing
Switzerland 2018.
2. Zongwei Luo, Smart Manufacturing Innovation and Transformation: Interconnection
and Intelligence, March 2014.
References:
1. Alasdair Gilchrist, Industry 4.0 The Industrial Internet of Things, Springer
Science+Business Media New York, 233 Spring Street, 6th Floor, New York, 2016.
2. I. R. Sinclair, Sensors and Transducers, Elsevier, 2001, ISBN: 978-0-7506-4932-2.
3. C.W. de Silava, Sensors and Actuators, 2nd edition, CRC Press, 2016.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 218 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

MINORS in
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Stream Name: Mechatronics

(Offered to all the Engineering Disciplines except Mechanical Engineering)

Page 219 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester

18MDME111 ENGINEERING STATICS AND APPLIED MECHANICS

L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Engineering Maths and Physics.

Course Objectives
1. Determine the resultant force and moment for a given system of forces and its
application.
2. Analyze planar and spatial systems to determine the forces in members of trusses,
frames and problems related to friction.
3. Determine the centroid and second moment of area
4. Understanding the concept of stress and strain and its application.
5. Understanding of torsion and determine the deformation of a shaft of different shapes.

UNIT-I: INTRODUCTION TO FORCE AND MOMENT


Classification of Engineering Mechanics, laws of Mechanics, characteristics of forces,
composition of two force system, resolution of forces, equilibrium of bodies, equilibrium of
connected bodies, moment of a force, Varignon’s theorem, Couple, resolution of a force into a
force and a couple, resultant of non-concurrent force system. (10)

UNIT-II: ANALYSIS OF PIN-JOINTED PLANE FRAMES AND FRICTION


Perfect, Deficient and Redundant Frames. Nature of forces in members. Method of analysis.
Method of joint. Method of section. Method of tension coefficients. Frictional force. Laws of
friction. Angle of friction. Problems of non-concurrent force systems. (8)

UNIT-III: CENTROID AND MOMENT OF INERTIA


Properties of Areas and Solids: Centroid, Centre of Gravity; Moment of Inertia, Polar moment
of Inertia and Principal Axes, Moment of Inertia of rigid Bodies.
Centre of gravity, center of gravity of composite bodies, Theorem of pappus-Guldinus, Mass-
moment of inertia, radius of gyration, parallel axis theorem, moment of inertia of composite
bodies. (9)

UNIT-IV: PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS


Stress, Strain, Elasticity, Hooke’s Law, Elastic Constants, Stress-Strain Diagram, Factor of
Safety, Working Stress, Thermal Stress, Strain Energy in Tension, Compression and Shear, Bi-
axial Stress, Stresses in Thin –Walled Pressure Vessels. (9)

UNIT-V: TORSION
Pure torsion, derivation of torsional equations, polar modulus, power transmission, torsional
rigidity, Stepped shafts and composite shafts, Coupling, strain energy in torsion, closed coiled
helical spring. Torsion of hollow and thin walled shafts. (9)

Page 220 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Text Book:
1. Mechanics of Materials by Gere and Timoshenko, second addition
2. Beer, Ferdinand P., and Elwood Russell Johnston. Vector mechanics for engineers.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003.
Reference Books
1. Shames, Irving Herman, and G. Krishna Mohana Rao. Engineering mechanics: statics
and dynamics. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1967.
2. Russell, C. Hibbler. Engineering Mechanics: Statics, Value Edition+ Modified
Mastering Engineering Revision With... Pearson Etext--Access Card Package. Prentice
Hall, 2019.
3. Bhavikatti, S. S. Fundamentals of Engineering Mechanics. New Academic Science, 7th
Edition.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 221 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester

18MDME112 FLUID POWER SYSTEMS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: 18MAT108
Course Description:
Fluid power systems are the systems that use pressurized fluids for generation, control and
transmission of power. Such systems are extensively used in automobiles, heavy machinery
and in control systems. This course is intended to provide the students with necessary
background in the fluid power so that they acquire a working knowledge of the typical fluid
power systems. The fundamental concepts required for design, analysis, application, operation
and maintenance of fluid power systems will be covered.

Course Objectives:
1. To review the fluid mechanics principles that is relevant to fluid power systems
2. To teach basic components of fluid power systems and their working principles
3. To elucidate the working of hydraulic pumps, motors, valves, actuators and their use in
hydraulic circuits
4. To elucidate the working of compressors, pneumatic actuators, valves and their use in
pneumatic circuits.
5. To describe the implementation logic control using fluid circuits
UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO HYDRAULIC POWER
Pascal’s law and problems on Pascal’s Law, Continuity equation, Bernoulli’s equation.
Structure of Hydraulic Control System. The Source of Hydraulic Power: Pumps, Pumping
theory, pump classification, gear pumps, vane pumps, piston pumps, pump performance, pump
selection. Variable displacement pumps.
Hydraulic Actuators and Motors: Linear Hydraulic Actuators [cylinders], Mechanics of
Hydraulic Cylinder loading, Hydraulic Rotary Actuators, Gear motors, vane motors, piston
motors, Hydraulic motor theoretical torque, power and flow rate, hydraulic motor performance.
(10)

UNIT II: CONTROL COMPONENTS IN HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS


Directional Control Valves – Symbolic representation, Constructional features, pressure
control valves –direct and pilot operated types, flow control valves. Shock absorber .Hydraulic
Circuit Design and Analysis: Control of single and double acting Hydraulic Cylinder,
regenerative circuit, pump unloading circuit, Double pump Hydraulic system, Counter Balance
Valve application, and Hydraulic cylinder sequencing circuits. Locked cylinder using pilot
check valve, cylinder synchronizing circuits, speed control of hydraulic cylinder, speed control
of hydraulic motors, accumulators and accumulator circuits. (9)

UNIT IV: PNEUMATIC CONTROL


Characteristics of compressed air. Structure of Pneumatic control system. Compressed air:
Production of compressed air – compressors, preparation of compressed air- Driers, Filters,
Regulators, and Lubricators. Pneumatic Actuators: Linear cylinders– Types, conventional type
of cylinder working, end position cushioning, seals, mounting arrangements applications.
Rotary cylinder types construction and application. Design parameters, selection.

Page 222 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Pneumatic Control valves: Design and constructional aspects, poppet valves, slide valves spool
valve, suspended seat type slide valve. Simple Pneumatic Control: Direct and indirect actuation
pneumatic cylinders, use of memory valve. Signal processing elements: Use of Logic gates –
OR and AND gates pneumatic applications. (9)

UNIT V: MULTI-CYLINDER APPLICATIONS


Coordinated and sequential motion control. Motion and control diagrams – signal elimination
methods. Cascading method. Practical application examples (up to two cylinders) using
cascading method (using reversing valves). Electro-Pneumatic control: Principles-signal input
and output pilot assisted solenoid control of directional control valves, use of relay and
contactors. Control circuitry for simple single cylinder applications., Distribution of
compressed air- Piping layout. (9)

UNIT III: ACCESSORIES AND MAINTENANCE OF FLUID POWER SYSTEMS


Conductor sizing for flow rate requirements, Hydraulic oils; Desirable properties, general type
of fluids, sealing devices, reservoir system, filters and strainers, problem caused by gases in
hydraulic fluids, wear of moving parts due to solid particle contamination, temperature control,
trouble shooting. Safety of Fluid Power Systems. (8)

Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course, student will be able to
1. Apply the basic fluid mechanics principles used in design and analysis of fluid power
systems
2. Distinguish between different types of fluid power systems and know their relative
merits and demerits
3. Design and analyze components of hydraulic systems like pumps, hydraulic motors,
cylinders, valves and actuators.
4. Design and analyze components of pneumatic systems like compressors, valves and
actuators.
5. Describe the working principles of controls for fluid power circuits.

Text Books:
3. Fluid Power with applications, Anthony Esposito, Fifth edition, Pearson education, Inc.
2000.
4. Pneumatics and Hydraulics, Andrew Parr. Jaico Publishing Co. 2000.

References:
5. Pinches, Industrial Fluid Power, Prentice hall
6. D. A. Pease, Basic Fluid Power, Prentice hall
7. J. J. Pipenger, Industrial Hydraulics, McGraw Hill
8. H. L. Stewart, Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Industrial Press

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 223 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME113 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: None 3 0 0 3

Course Description:
This course reviews the introduction to automation, Material Handling, Overview of Material
Handling Equipment, Storage Systems, Automated Production Lines and Line balancing
method to reduce lead time.

Course Objectives:
The students will study:
1. The principles of automation, importance of automated flow lines and its types.
2. Study the elements in automation, types of automation and levels of automation.
3. Outline of the system configurations used in automated production.
4. Recognize and articulate the foundational assumption of the transfer mechanism, types
of transfer mechanism that may be used for work part transfer.
5. Automated assembly systems, and their associated system configurations, list the
hardware components used for parts delivery at workstations Outline typical automated
assembly.

UNIT I - INTRODCUTION TO AUTOMATION:


Automation and control technologies in production system Basic elements of an automated
system, advanced automation functions, levels of automation, continuous and discrete control
systems, computer process control, common measuring devices used in automation, desirable
features for selection of measuring devices. (10)

UNIT II - INTRODUCTION TO MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEM:


Overview of Material Handling Equipment, Considerations in Material Handling System
Design, 10 Principles of Material Handling, Material Transport Systems, Automated Guided
Vehicle Systems, Monorails and other Rail Guided Vehicles, Conveyor Systems, Analysis of
Material Transport Systems. (10)

UNIT III - PRODUCTION AND ASSEMBLY SYSTEMS:


Automated production lines- fundamentals, system configurations, work part transfer
mechanisms, storage buffers, control of production line, applications Automated assembly
systems- fundamentals, system configurations, parts delivery at work stations, applications.
(9)
UNIT IV - CELLULAR MANUFACTURING
Group technology, part families, parts classification and coding, production flow analysis,
Opitz coding system, composite part concept, machine cell design, applications of GT. (8)

UNIT V - FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS:


Introduction to FMS, types of FMS, FMS components, applications and benefits, planning and
implementation issues in FMS, quantitative analysis of FMS. (8)

Page 224 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
After completion of the program, students will be able to:
1. Explain types of automation, components of automation, strategies and levels of
automation and advanced automation functions.
2. Understand automated transfer and storage system, recognize the equipment’s used in
auto- mated transfer and storage system.
3. Summarize the various automated storage systems and automatic data capture.
4. Apply the transfer lines with and without storage buffers in manual assembly line.
5. Apply line balancing algorithms to various manual assembly lines problems.

Text Books:

1. Mikell P. Grover - Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated


Manufacturing, PHI Publication.

Reference books:

1. CAD CAM: Principles, Practice and Manufacturing Management, Chris Mc Mohan,


Jimmie Browne, Pearson edu. (LPE)
2. Automation, Buckinghsm W, Haper & Row Publishers, New York, 1961.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 225 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME114 ROBOTICS AND CONTROL


L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Knowledge of Engg. Mechanics, Instrumentation & Control and Maths.
1. To make students understand how does a serial robot works
2. To make students learn how to design a serial robot for a given task
3. To make students understand the societal impacts of robotic technology

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL ROBOTS


Classification, Robot configurations, Functional line diagram, Degrees of Freedom.
Components, common types of arms, joints, grippers. Robot Reference frames, Robot
characteristics, Robot Workspace, Robot Applications. (9)

UNIT II: KINEMATICS OF ROBOTS


Kinematics of robots- Position analysis: Robot as Mechanism, Conventions, Matrix
representation, Homogeneous Transformation, Representation of transformation, Inverse of
Transformation, Forward and Inverse Kinematic of Robots, Forward and Inverse kinematics
equations: position and orientation, Roll, Pitch ,Yaw Angles, Euler Angles, Articulated Joints,
Denavit Hartenberg Representation of forward kinematics, Inverse Kinematic Programming of
Robot, Degeneracy and Dexterity. (10)

UNIT III: DIFFERENTIAL MOTIONS AND VELOCITIES OF ROBOTICS


Differential motions and velocities: Differential relationship, Differential versus large scale
motions, Differential motions of a frame versus a Robot, Differential motion of a frame about
Reference axes, General axis, Frame, Interpretation of the differential change, Differential
Change between frames (8)

UNIT IV: MANIPULATOR DYNAMICS, TRAJECTORY PLANNING AND ROBOT


PROGRAMMING
Lagrange – Euler and Newton – Euler formations, Trajectory Planning: Trajectory planning
and avoidance of obstacles, path planning, Skew motion, joint integrated motion – straight line
motion. Robot programming -Types – features of languages and software packages. (9)

UNIT V: CONTROL OF MANIPULATORS


Open and closed loop control, Linear control schemes. Model of manipulator joint, Joint
actuator, Partitioned PD control Schemes, PID control schemes, Computed Torque Control,
Force control of Robotics Manipulators tasks, Force control strategy, Hybrid Position/ Force
control , Impedance force /Torque control. (9)

Course Outcomes:
On completion of this course, the students will be able to
1. Understand the fundamentals of robotics.
2. Apply the mechanics of serial manipulator.
3. Plan the trajectory of a serial manipulator.
4. Design the position and force control techniques for a serial manipulator.

Page 226 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Text Books
1. Niku Saeed B., Introduction to Robotics, John Wiley & Sons
2. Mittal R.K. and Nagrath I.J., Robotics and Control, McGraw Hill Education

Reference Books
1. Saha S.K., Introduction to Robotics, McGraw Hill Education
2. Craig John J., Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control, Pearson

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 227 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME203 MECHATRONICS LABORATORY


L T P C
0 0 4 2

Course Prerequisite: Basic Electronics and fundamental concepts of Mechatronics

Course Objectives:
1. To synergize the combination of mechanical, electrical, electronics, control, and
computer engineering to design and manufacture useful products.
2. To provide a common floor where students could perform experiments regarding
fundamental sequence control using various sensors and actuators.
3. To assist the students in the development of ‘hands-on’ skills on multidisciplinary
systems.
4. To design and analyze basic pneumatics system.
5. To write CNC program codes for various machining operations.

List of Experiments:

1. Control of stepper motor/ stepper motor interfacing with (8051) microcontroller


2. Closed loop position control of DC motor
3. Closed loop velocity control of DC motor (to write an assembly language program to
control the speed of DC motor using (8051) microcontroller)
4. Closed loop control of pneumatics cylinder
5. Actuation of single acting cylinder by OR gate using PLC
6. Actuation of single acting cylinder by AND gate using PLC
7. Actuation of single acting cylinder with ON delay timer using PLC
8. Stimulate the single acting cylinder with OFF delay timer using PLC
9. Automatic actuation of double acting cylinder using PLC
10. Continuous actuation of double acting cylinder using proximity sensor
11. Range measurement using ultrasonic sensor
12. Modelling and position control of one degree of freedom planar mechanism
13. PLC program development to a pick and place robot
14. Introduction to CNC & NC machines, and part programming (G-codes and M-codes)
15. Developing CNC program codes for threading, milling, drilling, etc. (G-codes and M-
codes)
16. Experiments on CNC lathe – Turning, threading operations

Course Outcomes:
Upon the successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Design a mechatronic system with the help of microcontrollers, PLCs, and other
electrical and electronic circuits.
2. Conduct experiments with the actual robot to experience its basic movements/motions.
3. Control the pneumatics cylinder using PLCs.
4. Control the position and speed of DC stepper motor using microcontroller.
5. Write part programs for CNC lathe and milling operations.

Page 228 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Text Books:

Lab manual provided by the department

Reference Books:

1. Bolton W., ‘Mechatronics’, 3rd Ed., Pearson, 2004.


2. K. P. Ramachandran, G. K. Vijayaraghavan, M. S. Balasundaram, ‘Mechatronics’,
Wiley India, 2012.
3. R. K. Rajput, ‘A textbook of Mechatronics’, S Chand, 2008.
4. Devdas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, ‘Mechatronics system design’, 2nd Edition,
Cenage Learning.

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 229 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech IV Year I Semester

18MDME115 MECHATRONICS

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisites: Basic Electronics Engineering

Course Objectives
1. To have the comprehensive knowledge of the technology related to mechatronics and
automation.
2. To understand the structure of electronics and their applications in mechanical devices.
3. To understand the principle of automatic control with the help of drives and actuators.
4. To understand the principles of process control and programmable logic controllers.
5. To develop an ability to use the technique, skills, and modern engineering tools
necessary for engineering practice.

UNIT-I: INTRODUCTION
Introduction: Definition of Mechanical Systems; Elements of Mechatronics system; Design
process; systems – measurement and control systems; Applications – CNC machines, flexible
manufacturing system (FMS), computer integrated manufacturing (CIM), humanoid robot,
Advanced vehicle control systems (AVCS) (9)

UNIT-II: SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS


Definition of transducer; classification of transducers; characteristic parameters used in
transducers; Sensors - Characteristics -Temperature, flow, pressure sensors. Displacement,
position and proximity sensing by magnetic, optical, ultrasonic, inductive, capacitive and eddy
current methods. Encoders: incremental and absolute, gray coded encoder. Resolvers and
synchros. Piezoelectric sensors. Acoustic Emission sensors. (10)

UNIT-III: DRIVES AND ACTUATORS


Actuators: Hydraulic and Pneumatic actuators - Directional control valves, pressure control
valves, process control valves. Rotary actuators. Development of simple hydraulic and
pneumatic circuits using standard Symbols. Electrical actuators: DC motor, AC servo motor,
Stepper motor, Induction motor speed control (9)

UNIT-IV: CONTROLLERS
Controller principles, Proportional, Integral, Derivative controller, PID controllers,
Introduction to PLCs, Basic structure of a PLC, Principles of operation, selection of PLC for
the application (8)

UNIT-V: DESIGN OF MECHATRONICS SYSTEMS


Mechatronics approach to design; case examples – boat autopilot, high-speed tilting trains,
automatic car park system, engine management system, antilock brake system (ABS control;
Robotic automation in car automated production lines. (9)

Page 230 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Course Outcomes:
Upon the successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Understand the fundamentals of mechatronics systems and significance of system and
design process in mechatronics applications.
2. Illustrate the significance of sensors and transducers in measurement and
instrumentation process.
3. Describe the operation of hydraulic and pneumatic, electrical, and mechanical actuator
systems.
4. Understand PID, PLC, general functions, its advantages and application.
5. Develop issues encountered and techniques required in developing mechatronics
products and automation systems.

Textbook:
1. Bolton W., ‘Mechatronics’, 3rd Ed., Pearson, 2004.

Reference books:
1. K. P. Ramachandran, G. K. Vijayaraghavan, M. S. Balasundaram, ‘Mechatronics’,
Wiley India, 2012.
2. R. K. Rajput, ‘A textbook of Mechatronics’, S Chand, 2008.
3. Devdas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, ‘Mechatronics system design’, 2nd Edition, Cenage
Learning.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 231 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

MINORS in
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Stream Name: NANOTECHNOLOGY

(Offered to all the Engineering Disciplines


except Mechanical Engineering)

Page 232 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester

18MDME116 ELEMENTS OF NANOSCIENCE AND NANOTECHNOLOGY

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description: To enable the students to learn the basics of nanoscience and
nanotechnology

Course Objectives:
1. Understand the fundamentals of nanotechnology and to gain Knowledge on different
classes of nanomaterials
2. Learn what are the various synthesis methods of nanomaterials
3. Acquire the knowledge on characterization techniques involved in nanotechnology.
4. Understand the various applications in nanotechnology

UNIT I: BASICS AND SCALE OF NANOTECHNOLOGY


Introduction and scientific revolutions, Time and length scale in structures, Definition of a
nanosystem, Dimensionality and size dependent phenomena, Surface to volume ratio, Fraction
of surface atoms and surface energy, Surface stress and surface defects, Properties at nanoscale
– optical & mechanical, Properties at nanoscale – electronic & magnetic. (9)

UNIT II: DIFFERENT CLASSES OF NANOMATERIALS


Classification based on dimensionality, Quantum dots, wells and wires, Carbon-based nano
materials – fullerences and buckyballs, Carbon nanotubes and grapheme, Metal based nano
materials – Nanogold and Nanosilver, Metal oxide based nano materials, Nanocomposites and
Nano-polymers, Nanoglasses and nano ceramics, Biological nanomaterials (9)

UNIT III: SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS


Chemical methods: Metal nanocrystals by reduction, Chemical methods: Metal nanocrystals
by reduction, Solvothermal synthesis and photochemical synthesis, Sonochemical routes and
chemical vapor deposition (CVD), Metal oxide chemical vapor deposition (MOCVD)
Physical methods: Ball milling, Electrodeposition techniques, Spray pyrolysis and flame
pyrolysis, DC/RF magnetron sputtering, Molecular beam epitaxy (MBE) (9)

UNIT IV: FABRICATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOSTRUCTURES


Nanofabrication: Photolithography and its limitation and electron beam lithography (EBL),
Nanoimprinting and soft lithography patterning.Characterization: Field emission scanning
electron microscopy (FESEM) and environmental scanning electronmicroscopy (ESEM),
High resolution transmission electron microscope (HRTEM), Scanning tunneling microscope
(STM), Surface enhanced raman spectroscopy (SERS), X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy
(XPS), Auger electron spectroscopy (AES), Rutherford backscattering spectroscopy (RBS)
(10)

Page 233 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: APPLICATIONS IN NANOTECHONOLOGY


Solar energy conversion and catalysis, Molecular electronics, nanoelectronics and printed
electronics, Polymers with a special architecture, liquid crystalline systems, Linear and
nonlinear optical and electro-optical properties, Applications - nanomaterials for data storage,
Photonics and plasmonics, Chemical and biosensors, Nanomedicine and nanobiotechnology,
Nanotoxicology challenges (8)

Course Outcomes:
The successfully complete of this course, Student will be able to:
1. Understand the fundamentals of nanotechnology
2. Give a general introduction to different classes of nanomaterials
3. Improve their knowledge on various synthesis methods of nanomaterials
4. Understand characterization techniques involved in nanotechnology
5. Familiarize themselves with nanotechnology potentialities

Text Books

1. T. Pradeep, “A Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, Tata McGraw Hill


Education Pvt. Ltd., 2012
2. Hari Singh Nalwa, “Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology”, Academic Press,
2008
3. A.Nabok, “Organic and Inorganic Nanostructures”, Artech House, 2009

Reference Books/Other Reading Material

1. C.Dupas, P.Houdy, M.Lahmani, “Nanoscience: Nanotechnologies and Nanophysics”,


Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2007.
2. S. Edelstein and R. C. Cammarata, “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and
Applications”, Institute of Physics Pub., 2001

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 234 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester

18MDME117 FUNDAMENTALS OF SOLID-STATE ENGINEERING

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description: To teach fundamental scientific concepts essential to solid state


engineering so that students are capable of taking more advanced courses in the field of
materials science.

Course Objectives:
1. Acquire knowledge on physics of crystalline solids and elastic properties, lattice
dynamics, transport properties and optical processes in solids
2. Understand quantum mechanical concepts of free electron and theory of solids
3. Gain theoretical knowledge on optical properties.

UNIT I: CRYSTAL BINDING AND ELASTIC CONSTANTS


Introduction to interatomic forces, Van der Waals – London interaction, Equilibrium lattice
constants and cohesive energy, Ionic crystals, Madelung energy and Madelung constant,
Evaluation of the Madelung constant, Covalent, metallic and hydrogen bonding, Hook’s law:
elastic strain components, dilation, Stress components, elastic compliance and stiffness
constants. (9)

UNIT II: CRYSTAL DIFFRACTION, VIBRATIONS AND THERMAL PROPERTIES


Crystal diffraction – Bragg’s law, Reciprocal lattice vectors, concept of Brillouin zones,
Vibration of crystals with monoatomic basis, First Brillouin zone, Group velocity, quantization
of elastic waves (concept of phonon), Phonon heat capacity: Planck’s distribution and normal
modes, Density of states in one and three dimensions, Debye model for density of states - T3
law, Einstein model for density of states (9)

UNIT III: FREE ELECTRON FERMI GAS: TRANSPORT PHENOMENA


Free electron gas in one dimensions, Fermi- Dirac distribution, Effect of temperature on the
Fermi – Dirac distribution function, Free electron gas in three dimensions: Fermi energy,
Density of states, Heat capacity of the electron gas, Electrical conductivity and Ohm’s law,
Electrical resistivity: Matthiessen’s rule, Motion in magnetic fields: cyclotron frequency, Hall
effect, thermal conductivity of metals – Wiedemann-Franz law (9)

UNIT IV: ENERGY BANDS AND SEMICONDUCTOR CRYSTALS


Nearly free electron model: origin of the energy bands Bloch functions and Kronig-Penney
model, Wave equation of electron in a periodic potential, Metals and insulators in energy band
concept, Semiconductors: direct and indirect band gap, Equations of motions: concept of holes
and effective mass, Intrinsic carrier concentration and mobility, Impurity conductivity: donor
and acceptor states, semimetals, super lattices and Zener tunneling (9)

UNIT V: OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF SOLIDS


Optical reflectance, Kramers-Kronig relations, Electronic interband transitions, Concept of
excitons and energy level diagram, Frenkel excitons: Alkali halides and molecular crystals,

Page 235 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Mott-Wannier excitons, Raman effect in crystals, Concept of plasmons – derivation of plasma


frequency, basic concept of polaritons and polarons (qualitative treatment) (9)

Course Outcomes:
The successfully complete of this course, Student will be able to:
1. Familiarize with the physics of crystalline solids and elastic properties
2. Acquire knowledge on lattice dynamics, transport properties and optical processes in
solids
3. Understand quantum mechanical concepts of free electron and theory of solids
4. Gain theoretical knowledge on optical properties, electron-phonon interactions in solids
and in modern heterostructures
5. Understand the optical properties of solids and basic concept of qualitative treatment.

Text Books
1. C. Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, 8th edition, Wiley India, 2015
2. M. Ali Omar, “Elementary Solid State Physics-Principles and Applications”, Pearson
Publication, 2005

Reference Books
1. Herald Ibach, Hans Luth, “Solid State Physics-An Introduction to Principles of
Materials Science”, Springer Publication, 2009
2. J. Dekker, “Solid State Physics”, Macmillan India Ltd, 2004
3. J.M. Ziman, “Principles of Theory of Solids”, Cambridge University Press, 1999

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 236 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME118 QUANTUM MECHANICS FOR NANOTECHNOLOGY

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description: To provide a working knowledge of the foundations, techniques, and


key results of quantum mechanics for solving problems in nanotechnology.

Course Objectives:
1. Understand the origin of old and new Quantum Mechanics
2. Explain the bound and scattering state and can solve the numerical
3. Demonstrate comprehensive knowledge on quantum physics behind applications -
Nano Dimension and Quantum Phenomena

UNIT I: BASIC FORMULATION & BOUND STATE PROBLEMS


Old quantum mechanics, Heisenberg uncertainty principle, Ehrenfest theorem, Statistical
interpretation and normalization of wave function, Hermitian operator, commutation,
Schrödinger’s time dependent and time independent wave equations, Stationary states, Infinite
square well in one and three dimensions, Delta function potential, Finite square well.
(9)

UNIT II: SCATTERING STATES & QUANTUM TUNNELING


Scattering states, Reflection and transmission of particles, Delta function potential well,
Rectangular potential barrier (E<V0), Rectangular potential barrier (E>V0), Alpha-particle
emission, Tunneling effect, Double delta function potential barriers, Resonant tunneling. (8)

UNIT III: DISCRETE EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS


Energy Eigen functions and Eigen values coordinates precession, Spherical Harmonic
oscillator in one dimension, Momentum, Eigen values, Schrödinger equation in spherical
coordinates, Angular equation, radial equation, Infinite spherical well, ground state properties
of hydrogen atom, Angular momentum (Lx,Ly,Lz), Generalized angular momentum (Jx,Jy,Jz),
Eigen values, Spin ½. (9)

UNIT IV: APPROXIMATION METHODS


Principle of variational method, Proof of variational method and implementation, Energy Eigen
value in case of time independent perturbation theory for non-degenerate energy levels, Eigen
function in case of time independent perturbation theory for non-degenerate energy levels,
Energy Eigen value in case of time independent perturbation theory for degenerate energy
levels, Eigen function in case of time dependent perturbation theory for two-level systems,
Sinusoidal perturbations Incoherent perturbation, Transition rate , Adiabatic and Sudden
approximations (Elementary concepts) (10)

UNIT V: IDENTICAL PARTICLES AND SCATTERING THEORY


Two particle system’s Schrödinger equation, Transformation to center of mass frame from
laboratory frame Exchange operator symmetrization of wave function Bosons and Fermions
Exchange forces, solids, free electron gas Band structure, quantum scattering theory

Page 237 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Differential and total cross sections, Green’s functions, Born approximation, application to
spherically symmetric potentials. (9)

Course Outcomes:
The successfully complete of this course, Student will be able to:
1. Explain the origin of old and new Quantum Mechanics
2. Explain the bound and scattering state and can solve the numerical
3. Correlate quantum physics behind applications - Nano Dimension
4. Solve the many body problems using various assumptions
5. Start the core subjects of Nanotechnology based on Quantum Phenomena

Text Books
1. David J. Griffiths, “Introduction to Quantum Mechanics”, Second Edition, Pearson,
2009
2. AjoyGhatak and S. Lokanathan, “Quantum Mechanics”, Fifth Edition, Macmillan,
2009

Reference Books
1. Bransden B.H., and Joachain C.J., “Quantum Mechanics”, Second Edition, Pearson,
2007
2. YoavPeleg, Reuven Pnini, ElyahuZaarur, and Eugene Hecht, “Schaum’s Outline of
Quantum Mechanics”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010
3. Mathews P.M. and Venkatesan K.,“Quantum Mechanics”, Second Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2010

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 238 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME119 MICRO AND NANOFABRICATION

L T P C
3 0 0 3
Course Prerequisite: None

Course Description: To deal with the aspects of the technology of processing procedures
involved in the fabrication of micro and nanoelectronic devices

Course Objectives:
1. Learn a systematic overview of micro and nano fabrication processes and understanding
of lithography, etching and ion implantation methods to fabricate, structure and modify
the layer
2. Understand thin film fabrication techniques including PVD and CVD and to apply the
knowledge to film formation
3. Apply the knowledge of microfabrication technology to the fields of general
microelectronics systems

UNIT I: CRYSTAL GROWTH, EPITAXY AND OXIDATION


Introduction to IC fabrication, Electronic grade silicon – crystal plane and orientation – defects
in the lattice, Czochralski crystal growing, Silicon shaping – processing consideration Vapour
phase epitaxy – liquid phase epitaxy, Selective epitaxy - molecular beam epitaxy – epitaxial
evaluation Growth mechanism and kinetics Thin oxides – oxidation techniques and systems –
oxide properties, Redistribution of dopants at interface – oxidation of polysilicon – Oxidation
induced effects (10)

UNIT II: LITHOGRAPHY, WET AND DRY ETCHING


Optical lithography, Mask Making, Electron lithography, X-ray lithography, Ion lithography –
plasma properties, Feature size control and an-isotropic etch mechanism, Lift off techniques,
Plasma reactor – Fl2&Cl2 based etching, Relative plasma etching techniques and equipment
(8)

UNIT III: DEPOSITION, DIFFUSION & ION IMPLANTATION


Deposition process Physical vapour deposition – sputtering Polysilicon - plasma assisted
depositionModels of diffusion in solids – Fick’s one dimensional, diffusion equation – atomic
diffusion mechanismCarrier recovery due to annealing, Implantation equipment – annealing -
shallow junction High energy implantation Metallization applications, Metallization choices –
patterning – metallization problems (9)

UNIT IV: DEVICE AND MOS CIRCUIT FABRICATION


Isolation – p-n junction isolation, Self alignment – local oxidation, Trench techniques –
planarizationChemical- mechanical polishing – metallization and gettering, Basic MOS device
considerations – MOS transistor Layout and design rules, Metal - gate transistor layout –
polysilicon-gate transistor layout -channel length and width biases, CMOS technology - CMOS
isolation and latch up Silicon - on –Insulator devices , State-of- the art and advanced, CMOS
technologies. (9)

Page 239 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT V: TOWARD MOLECULAR NANOTECHNOLOGY


Directed self-assembly: device assembly, Electrostatic self-assembly, Templated self-
assembly: colloids and nanoparticle, Templated self-assembly: block copolymers and DNA
nanostructures, Scanning probe lithographic techniques: local anodic oxidation Scribing,
Atomic manipulation by SPA, Erasable electrostatic lithography, Electronics with nanotubes,
nanowires, and carbon-60 (9)

Course Outcomes:
The successfully complete of this course, Student will be able to:

1. Provide learners a systematic overview of micro and nano fabrication processes


2. Gain understanding of lithography, etching and ion implantation methods to
fabricate, structure and modify the layer
3. Understand thin film fabrication techniques including PVD and CVD and to apply
the knowledge to film formation
4. Apply the knowledge of microfabrication technology to the fields of general
microelectronics systems
5. Understand the various methods of molecular nanotechnology.

Text Books/
1. Sami Franssila, “Introduction to Microfabrication”, Wiley Publications, 2010
2. Sorab. K. Gandhi, "VLSI Fabrication and Principles", McGraw Hill, 2005

Reference Books
1. Richard C.Jaeger, “Introduction to Microelectronic Fabrication”, Prentice hall, 2002
2. Bo Cui, “Recent advances in Nanofabrication Techniques and Applications”, InTech
Publisher, 2011
3. A G Davies and J M T Thompson, “Advances in Nanoengineering Electronics, Materials
and Assembly”,Imperial College Press, 2007
4. Michael Pycraft Hughes , “Nanoelectromechanics in Engineering and Biology”, by CRC
Press LLC, 2003

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 240 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME204 MICRO AND NANOFABRICATION LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 4 2
Course Prerequisite: Micro & Nanofabrication

Course Description: To gain knowledge in Micro and Nano fabrication Processes

Course Objectives:

1. Students will gain knowledge and hands on experience in fabrication of Nano-powders


using Planetary Ball Mill.
2. Students will gain knowledge and hands on experience in cleaning and processing
wafers for thin films.
3. Students will have hands on experience over utilization of various non ambient
atmospheric conditions.
4. Students will gain knowledge and experience in fabrication and post processing of thin
films.
5. Students will get knowledge in utilization of AFM and SPM using nanolithography.

List of Experiments:

1. To fabricate nano powders using Planetary Ball Mill.


2. To perform wafer cleaning processes followed for VLSI applications
3. To oxidize silicon under O2 ambient using temperature-controlled furnace
4. To deposit Al thin film on the oxidized silicon surface
5. To perform patterning by photolithography process
6. To perform wet chemical etching of silicon dioxide and metal thin films.
7. To fabricate MOS capacitor and study its I-V characteristics
8. To pattern nanostructures using E-Beam lithography (Virtual Laboratory)
9. To analyze nanostructures defined by E-Beam lithography using AFM (Virtual
Laboratory)
10. To do nanolithography by scanning probe microscopy (Virtual Laboratory)

Course Outcomes:

Upon the successful completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1. Gain basic knowledge on micro and nanofabrication processes used electronic devices
2. Develop understanding of fundamental issues, ideas and results involved in
microfabrication
3. Acquire experience in micro-fabrication processes
4. Provide basic knowledge in Thin film fabrication

Text Books:

Lab manual provided by the department

Page 241 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Reference Book
1. Micro and Nano Fabrication Laboratory Course Material, 2016
2. Sami Franssila, “Introduction to Microfabrication”, Wiley Publications, 2010
3. Sorab. K. Gandhi, "VLSI Fabrication and Principles", McGraw Hill, 2005
4. Richard C.Jaeger, “Introduction to Microelectronic Fabrication”, Prentice Hall,
2002
5. A G Davies and J M T Thompson, “Advances in Nanoengineering Electronics,
Materials and Assembly”, Imperial College Press, 2007

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 242 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech IV Year I Semester

18MDME120 INDUSTRIAL NANOTECHNOLOGY

L T P C
Course Prerequisite: None 3 0 0 3

Course Description: To provide knowledge of various industrial applications of


nanotechnology

Course Objectives:

1. Elucidate on advantages of nanotechnology based applications in each industry


2. Provide instances of contemporary industrial applications of nanotechnology
3. Provide an overview of future technological advancements and increasing role of
nanotechnology in each industry

UNIT I: NANOTECHNOLOGY IN ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS INDUSTRY


Nano electrical and electronic devices: advantageous, Data storage and memory, Micro and
nanoelectromechanical systems Lasers, lighting and displays Batteries, Fuel cells, Photovoltaic
cells, Electric double layer capacitors, Nanoparticle coatings for electrical products
(9)

UNIT II: NANOTECHNOLOGY IN BIOMEDICAL AND PHARMACEUTICAL


INDUSTRY
Nanoparticles in bone substitutes and dentistry, Tissue engineering/regenerative medicine,
Scaffolds for tissue engineering, Nanorobotics in surgery, Drug delivery advantages of
nanostructured delivery systems, Activation and targeting of nanotechnology-based drug
delivery systems, Cancer diagnostics and therapy: why nanotechnology, Nanotools for early
cancer detection, Nanomedicine for cancer treatment. (9)

UNIT III: NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR ENVIRONMENT APPLICATIONS


Nanotechno structured catalysts TiO2 nanoparticles for water, purification: background
of TiO2 as a semiconductor photocatalyst, Photocatalytic mechanism, general pathways, and
kinetics, Photocatalytic degradation of specific waterborne pollutants, Nanoparticles for
treatment of arsenic, Treatment of arsenic using nanoparticles other than TIO2, Nanoscale
carbon materials for contaminant separation, Nanostructured metal oxide gas sensors for air-
quality monitoring, The gas-sensing mechanism, integrated solid-state sensors. (10)

UNIT IV - NANOTECHNOLOGY IN AGRICULTURE AND FOOD TECHNOLOGY


Nanotechnology in agriculture, Precision farming, smart delivery system, Insecticides using
nanotechnologyPotential of nano-fertilizers, Nanotechnology in food industry, Packaging,
Food processing, Food safety and biosecurity, Contaminant detection and smart packaging
(8)
UNIT V - NANOTECHNOLOGY IN TEXTILES AND COSMETICS
Nanofibre production –electrospinning, controlling morphologies, of nanofibers,
Multifunctional polymer nanocomposites, Carbon nanotubes and nanocomposites, Nano-filled
polypropylene fibers, Nano-finishing in textiles (UV resistant, antibacterial), hydrophilic,
self-cleaning, flame retardant finishes), Cosmetics – formulation of gels Formulation of

Page 243 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

shampoos, hair-conditioners (micellar self- assembly and its manipulation) Sun-screen


dispersions for UV protection using Titanium oxide – color cosmetics (9)

Course Outcomes:
The successfully complete of this course, Student will be able to:
1. Elucidate on advantages of nanotechnology based applications in Electronics and
Electrical industry
2. Elucidate on advantages of nanotechnology based applications in Biomedical &
Pharma Industry.
3. Elucidate on advantages of nanotechnology based applications in Environmental
applications.
4. Elucidate on advantages of nanotechnology based applications in Agriculture &
Food Technology.
5. Provide instances of contemporary industrial applications of nanotechnology in
Textile Industry.

Text Books
1. Mark A.R., Daniel Ratner, “Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next Big
Idea”, Pearson Education, India,2003
2. Bharat Bhushan,“Handbook of Nanotechnology”, Springer, Barnes & Noble,2004

Reference Books
1. Eelina H. Malsch, “Biomedical Nanotechnology”, CRC Press,2005
2. Kenneth E.G.,Craig R.H., Cato T.L., Lakshmi S.N., “Biomedical Nanostructures”, John
Wiley & Sons Inc.,2008
3. Maqhong Fan, Huang C.P., Alan E.B., “Environanotechnology”,Elsevier,2010
4. Tian C.Z., Rao Y.S., Keith C.K.L., ZhiqiangH.,Tyagi R.D., Irene M.C.L,
“Nanotechnologies For WaterEnvironment Applications”, ASCE publications, 2009
5. Jennifer Kuzma and Peter VerHage, “Nanotechnology in agriculture and food
production”, WoodrowWilson International Center,2006
6. Lynn J. Frewer, WillehmNorde, Fischer R. H. and Kampers W. H., “Nanotechnology
in the Agri-foodsector”,Wiley-VCH Verlag,2011
7. P. J. Brown and K. Stevens, “Nanofibers and Nanotechnology in Textiles”, Woodhead
Publishing Limited, Cambridge, 2007
8. Mai Y-W., “PolymerNano composites”, Woodhead publishing, 2006
9. Chang W.N., “Nanofibres fabrication, performance and applications’, Nova Science
Publishers Inc, 2009

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 244 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

MINORS in
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Stream Name: Energy Engineering

(Offered to all the Engineering Disciplines except Mechanical Engineering)

Page 245 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year I Semester

18MDME121 FLUID MECHANICS AND HYDRAULIC MACHINERY

L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisite: Partial Differential Equations

Course Description:
Modelling and predicting the behaviour of fluid flow is an important part of many scientific
and technological problems. Flow of fluid is an important aspect of atmospheric and oceanic
circulation, combustion in engines, biological processes such as the flow of blood. From the
days of Isaac Newton to the present day world, considerable progress has been made in the
mathematical modelling of fluid flow. With the advent of enhanced computational ability,
computational fluid dynamics has played a major role in solving complex fluid flow problems.
In this course, the students are introduced to various fluid properties and to model fluids at rest.
Flow of fluids is introduced to the students in two forms, namely, the Lagrangian and the
Eulerian form. Eventually, both the integral and differential form of the governing equations
of fluid dynamics are derived. Flow of fluids in closed conduits and over various geometries is
also introduced. Basic design of hydraulic turbines and pumps are introduced to the students.

Course Objectives:
6. To provide a basic understanding of the properties and behavior of matter (fluids) by means
of analytical equations.
7. To develop an understanding about hydrostatic law, principle of buoyancy and stability of
a floating body and application of mass, momentum and energy equation in fluid flow.
8. To determine the losses in a flow system, flow through pipes, boundary layer flow and flow
past immersed bodies.
9. Determine the force applied by a jet on stationary and moving vanes.
10. To understand the working principle of hydraulic machinery like turbines and pumps.

UNIT I: FLUID PROPERTIES AND KINEMATICS OF FLUID FLOW


The Concept of a Fluid, Classification of fluid flows, System & Control volume, Density,
Specific gravity, Thermodynamic Properties of a Fluid, Viscosity, Surface Tension,
Capillarity, Vapor pressure and Cavitation. Lagrangian and Eulerian descriptions, material
derivative, velocity and acceleration field, streamlines, path lines and streak lines.
Fluid statics: Barometer and atmospheric pressure, Manometry, Buoyancy and stability. (9)

UNIT II: GOVERNING EQUATIONS OF FLUID FLOW


Reynold’s transport theorem, Integral form of the conservation of mass for moving or
deforming control volumes and steady flow processes, Integral form of Energy equation,
Integral form of linear momentum equation, Integral form of angular momentum equation.
Derivation of the Bernoulli equation (9)

Page 246 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT III: INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL FLOW


Laminar and Turbulent flows, Entrance region, Laminar flow in pipes, Turbulent flow in pipes,
Minor and Major losses. Orifice meter and Venturimeter.
Flow over flat plate, Boundary layer equations, Displacement, Momentum and Energy
thicknesses, Momentum integral technique for boundary layers, Boundary layers with pressure
gradients. (8)

UNIT IV: IMPACT OF JET VANES & HYDRAULIC TURBINES


Hydrodynamic force of jet striking stationary and moving vanes, flat and curved vanes, jet
impinging centrally and tangentially.
Classification of hydraulic turbines- Impulse and reaction turbines; Basic equation of energy
transfer in rotodynamic machines, specific speed; Components of Pelton turbine, Velocity
triangles and power for Pelton turbine, Maximum efficiency of Pelton turbine; Types of
reaction turbines, Components of Francis turbine, Velocity triangles, power and efficiency of
Francis turbine. Kaplan turbine. (11)

UNIT V: HYDRAULIC PUMPS


Working principle and main parts of a centrifugal pump; Classification of centrifugal pumps;
Static and Manometric head of a centrifugal pump; Efficiencies of centrifugal pump.
Main parts and working of reciprocating pump; Discharge, work done and power required to
drive a reciprocating pump; Slip of a reciprocating pump; (8)

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Interpret the properties of fluids and their applications, determine differential
pressure using manometric principles, calculate the buoyant forces and estimate
the stability of floating and immersed bodies.
2. Distinguish between a system and control volume approach and will be able to use
the governing equations based on integral approach for solving fluid flow
problems.
3. Have a clear understanding of internal flow physics and capable of estimating the
major and minor losses observed in pipe flows. Similarly, they will be able to
assess various flow parameters in external flows with and without pressure
gradients.
4. Assess the forces acting on vanes with varied geometries and point of jet impact.
Further, they can differentiate different turbines and estimate the performance
parameters of various turbine used in hydraulic power plants.
5. Differentiate different pumps and calculate their performance characteristics.

Text Books:
3. Cengel, Y.A, Cimbala, John, M., “Fluid Mechanics, Fundamentals and Applications”,
McGraw Hill Education; Third edition (1 July 2017)
4. B.K. Venkanna, “ Fundamentals of Turbomachinery”, PHI Learning Private
Limited,2018

References:
1. R. K. Bansal, “A Textbook of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, Laxmi
Publications, Ltd., 2005

Page 247 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

2. Robert W. Fox and Alan T. Mc Donald, “Introduction to Fluid Mechanics”, John Wiley
& Sons Private Ltd., 2009, 7th Edition.
3. James R. Welty, Charles E. Wicks and Robert E. Wilson, “Fundamentals of
Momentum, Heat and Mass transfer”, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) private limited., 2008,
5th Edition.
4. Frank M White, “Fluid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 7th Edition, 2012.
5. Milton Van Dyke, “An Album of Fluid Motion”, Parabolic Press, 12th Edition.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 248 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech. II Year I Semester

18MDME122 APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS

L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisite: 18MDME121

Course Description:
This course on Applied Thermodynamics focuses on applied aspects of Engineering
Thermodynamics which is an essential prerequisite for many courses of mechanical
engineering. The principles of thermodynamics are also applicable to a wide range of problems
encountered in all branches of engineering. This course is designed to equip the students with
a thorough knowledge of basics and applications of thermodynamics and to provide them with
necessary skills and techniques to solve problems in thermodynamics through a systematic
analysis using fundamental principles. The specific topics to be covered in the course include
concepts of system and surroundings, energy, energy transfer by work and heat, properties of
substances and property changes, first and second laws of thermodynamics along with
applications of these concepts to analysis of steam turbines, nozzles, refrigeration, air
conditioning and internal combustion engines.

Course Objectives:
1. To introduce the concepts of system, surroundings, energy interactions, thermodynamics
properties of substances and to teach different techniques used for estimating the properties
like gas laws and property tables
2. To learn the principles of work and energy.
3. To acquire knowledge about the fundamentals of thermodynamic laws, concepts and
principles.
4. To perform thermodynamic analysis of engineering systems like steam turbines, nozzles,
refrigeration and air conditioning, and internal combustion engines.

UNIT 1: THERMODYNAMIC BASICS


Macroscopic versus Microscopic viewpoint, Thermodynamic system and control volume,
Thermodynamic properties, processes and cycles, Homogeneous and heterogeneous systems,
Thermodynamic equilibrium, Quasi-static process, Concept of continuum, Zeroth law of
thermodynamics, temperature scale, Ideal gas, Work Transfer, Heat transfer, First law of
thermodynamics, Specific heat, Enthalpy, Internal Energy, Steady flow energy equation and
application, PMM1 and Steady flow energy equation. (9)

UNIT 2: SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS


Qualitative difference between heat and work, cyclic heat engine, Kelvin-Planck statement of
second law, Clausius’ statement of second law, Refrigerator and heat pump, Equivalence of
Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statement, Reversibility and Irreversibility, Carnot cycle, Reversed
heat engine, Carnot’s Theorem, Corollary of Carnot’s theorem, absolute thermodynamic
temperature scale and Efficiency of heat engine, Entropy, Inequality of Clausius, Temperature-
Entropy plot

Page 249 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Pure Substances: Pure substance, Vapor-Liquid-Solid-Phase equilibrium in a pure substance,


Independent properties of a pure substance, Phase boundaries, tables of thermodynamic
properties, Thermodynamic Surfaces, p-v and p-T diagram for a pure substance, p-v-T surface,
T-s and h-s or Mollier diagram for a pure substance, dryness fraction, Steam Tables, Charts of
Thermodynamic properties, Measurement of steam quality.
(9)

UNIT 3: STEAM TURBINES & NOZZLES


Steam Turbines : Classification of steam turbines, Impulse and Reaction turbines, Staging,
Stage and Overall efficiency, Velocity diagram of simple and compound multistage impulse
and reaction turbines and related calculations, work done, efficiencies of impulse and reaction
turbines, losses in steam turbines, Governing of turbines.
Steam and Gas Nozzles: Flow through Convergent and convergent-divergent nozzles,
variation of velocity, area and specific volume, choked flow, throat area, Nozzle efficiency,
Off design operation of nozzle, Effect of friction on nozzle, Super saturated flow. (9)

UNIT 4: REFRIGERATION & AIR-CONDITIONING


Refrigerants: Desirable properties, Common refrigerants used, Nomenclature
Refrigeration: Comparison of heat engine, heat pump and refrigerating machine, Unit of
refrigeration and C.O.P, Simple vapour compression refrigeration cycle, T-S, P-h and h-s
charts, Effect of Subcooling and Superheating, Air refrigeration Cycle.
Air-Conditioning: Properties of moist air, Dry, wet bulb and Dew point temperature,
Psychrometric chart, Psychrometric processes in air conditioning equipment. (9)

UNIT 5: INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES


I. C. Engines: Classification of IC engines, two stroke & four stroke, and SI & CI engines –
comparison, Otto and Diesel cycles, Valve and port timing diagrams, Performance analysis of
I.C Engines, Morse test, Heat balance.
Combustion: Combustion analysis, heating values, air requirement, Air/Fuel ratio, standard
heat of reaction and effect of temperature on standard heat of reaction, Combustion efficiency,
heat of formation, Adiabatic flame temperature, enthalpy of formation, enthalpy and internal
energy of combustion, Combustion in SI and CI Engine, Knocking phenomenon and control.
(9)

Course Outcomes:
On successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:

1. Apply the fundamentals of the zeroth and first laws of thermodynamics and analyze a wide
range of systems.
2. Apply the second law of thermodynamics for the design of heat engine, heat pump and
refrigerators and to Evaluate entropy changes in a wide range of processes.
3. Calculate important parameters like efficiency, power, and torque for steam turbines and
nozzles.

Page 250 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

4. Perform simple calculations for refrigeration and air conditioning systems like estimating
power requirement, COP etc.
5. Explain the basic nomenclature, working, underlying principles, and combustion processes
in IC engines and their performance testing.

Text Books:
2. Cengal, Y.A and Boles, M.A, Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach, 5th ed.,
McGraw-Hill, 2006.
3. R.K. Rajput, Applied Thermodynamics, 2nd Edition, Laxmi Publications.

References:
5. Sonntag, R.E., Borgnakke, C., and Van Wylen, G.J., Fundamentals of
Thermodynamics, 6th ed., John Wiley, 2003.
.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Examinations and End Semester Examination

Page 251 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME123 HEAT TRANSFER

L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisite: 18MDME121 & 18MDME122

Course Description:
Fundamental concepts of heat transfer; steady-state and unsteady-state heat conduction;
analytical and empirical relations for forced and free convection heat transfer; condensation
and boiling; heat exchanger analysis and design; and Heat transfer by radiation.

Course Objectives:
6. To elucidate the fundamental mechanisms of heat transfer
7. To teach the governing laws of heat transfer by conduction, convection and radiation
8. To train the students in using the analytical and empirical methods for estimating heat
transfer under different conditions.
9. To explicate the rudimentary aspects in heat transfer with phase change.
10. To introduce different approaches for solving sizing and rating problems in Heat
Exchanger design

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION AND STEADY ONE-DIMENSIONAL CONDUCTION


Underlying physics and basic rate equations for conduction, convection and radiation modes
of heat transfer; Relationship to Thermodynamics, Thermal properties of materials, Heat
conduction equation in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinates; Boundary conditions
and initial conditions. Simplification of conduction equations for one dimensional steady state
conduction; Applications to plane wall, cylindrical shell and spherical shells, composite walls;
Electrical analogy and overall heat transfer coefficient; conduction with heat generation.
(9)

UNIT II: EXTENDED SURFACES AND TRANSIENT CONDUCTION


Heat transfer from extended surfaces; governing equation and analytical solutions for different
boundary conditions, performance and efficiency of fins. The Lumped heat capacitance model,
governing equation, Biot number; One dimensional transient heat flow: applications to semi-
infinite solid, plane slab, cylinders and spheres; Heisler charts. (9)

UNIT III: CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER


Thermal and velocity boundary layers, convection heat transfer coefficient, laminar and
turbulent boundary layers, boundary layer momentum and energy equations, non-dimensional
parameters and their significance, Correlations for forced convection problems involving flat
plates, cylinders; spheres and banks of tubes. Internal flows- mean velocity, mean temperature,
entry and fully developed regions, correlations for heat transfer in laminar and turbulent pipe
flows. Natural convection heat transfer on a vertical plate; governing equations, dimensionless
numbers, empirical relations for natural convection on plates, cylinders and spheres.
(9)

Page 252 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT IV: BOILING, CONDENSATION AND HEAT EXCHANGERS


Non-dimensional numbers in heat transfer with phase change, Boiling heat transfer modes,
pool boiling, forced convection boiling, empirical correlations for boiling heat transfer,
Condensation heat transfer mechanism, condensation on a vertical plate and vertical cylinders,
film condensation inside horizontal tubes; dropwise condensation. Classification of heat
exchangers, overall heat transfer coefficient, fouling factor, LMTD and NTU analyses of heat
exchangers. (9)

UNIT V: RADIATION HEAT TRANSFER


Physical mechanism of Radiation, radiation intensity, black body radiation, Planck’s
distribution law, Wein’s displacement law, Stefan Boltzmann law, Real surfaces, emissivity,
absorptivity, reflectivity and transmissivity, Kirchoff’s identity, grey surface, view factor
between surfaces, reciprocity relation, heat exchange between grey surfaces and black surfaces,
electric network analogy, radiation shields. Effect of participating media, Radiation combined
with other modes of heat transfer. (9)

Course Outcomes:
7. Estimate heat transfer rate due to conduction, convection and radiation under simple
conditions using Fourier’s Law, Newton’s Law, and Stefan-Boltzmann Law.
8. Calculate the temperature distribution and rate of heat transfer in one dimensional heat
conduction problems (Cartesian, polar and spherical coordinates) like composite walls,
cylinders, and extended surfaces.
9. Calculate temperature evolution in lumped and one-dimensional conduction systems using
Newton’s law of cooling, analytical methods and chart solutions.
10. Calculate the heat transfer and temperature distribution in external and internal fluid flow
problems using the principles of momentum and thermal boundary layer, bulk mean
temperature, mean temperature, phase change, Nusselt condensation theory and empirical
Nusselt number correlations.
11. Design an appropriate heat exchanger, like condenser, evaporator, radiator etc., for a given
heat transfer requirement using LMTD and NTU-𝜖 methods.
12. Calculate heat transfer due to radiation under certain conditions using the concepts of black
and grey bodies, shape factor and electrical network analogy.

Textbook:
2. F. P. Incropera & D. P. Dewitt, Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, John Wiley &
Sons, 2001, 5th edition.

References:
5. Yunus Cengel, Heat and Mass Transfer: Fundamentals and Application, McGraw Hill
6. J.P. Holman, Heat Transfer, McGraw Hill, 2002, 9th Edition.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 253 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME124 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS

L T P C
2 1 0 3
Course Prerequisites: Fluid Mechanics, Thermodynamics and Applied Mathematics.

Course Description: Computational fluid dynamics (CFD) has become an essential tool in
analysis and design of thermal and fluid flow systems in wide range of industries. Few
prominent areas of applications of CFD include meteorology, transport systems (aerospace,
automobile, high-speed trains), energy systems, environment, electronics, bio-medical (design
of life-support and drug delivery systems), etc. The correct use of CFD as a design analysis or
diagnostic tool requires a thorough understanding of underlying physics, mathematical
modelling and numerical techniques. The user must be fully aware of the properties and
limitations of the numerical techniques incorporated in CFD software. This course aims to
provide precisely these insights of CFD.

Course Objectives:
Specific objectives may be summarized as:
4. To give the students necessary exposure to the CFD techniques such that they can solve
basic fluid flow problems using CFD
5. To understand mathematical characteristics of partial differential equations.
6. To learn computational solution techniques for various types of partial differential
equations.

UNIT 1: GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

Introduction and Philosophy of Computational Fluid Dynamics, Need for problem solving with
CFD, Applications of CFD, Basic structure of a CFD code, Governing equations: Continuity
equation, Momentum equation, Energy equation, Mathematical classification of partial
differential equations: Parabolic, Elliptic and Hyperbolic equations, Well posed and ill posed
problems, Initial and boundary conditions. (9)

UNIT 2: LINEAR SOLVERS AND FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR DIFFUSION


PROBLEMS

Solution of discretised linear algebraic equations, Iteration method: Jacobi’s method,


Elimination methods: L-U decomposition technique, Tridiagonal matrix algorithm (Thomas’
algorithm), Finite Volume Method for one-dimensional steady state diffusion, two-
dimensional diffusion and three-dimensional diffusion problems. (9)

UNIT 3: FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION-DIFFUSION PROBLEMS

Steady one dimensional convection and diffusion, Central differencing scheme, Properties of
discretisation schemes, Assessment of the central differencing scheme for convection-diffusion
problems, Upwind differencing scheme, Hybrid differencing scheme, Quick scheme.
(9)

Page 254 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

UNIT 4: SOLUTION ALGORITHMS FOR PRESSURE-VELOCITY COUPLING IN


STEADY FLOWS

Introduction, Staggered grid, Momentum equations, The SIMPLE algorithm, Assembly of a


complete method, SIMPLER and SIMPLEC methods. (9)

UNIT 5: TURBULENCE MODELLING AND GRID WITH APPROPRIATE


TRANSFORMATION

Effect of turbulence on time-averaged Navier-Stokes equations, Characteristics of simple


turbulent flows, Turbulence models: Mixing length model, The k-ε model, Reynolds stress
equation model, Grid with Appropriate Transformation: General transformation of the
equations, Metrics and Jacobian, Stretched (Compressed) grids, Boundary fitted coordinate
systems, Elliptic grid generation. (9)

Course Outcomes:
1. Develop the basic governing equations for fluid and heat flow by examining the physical
boundary conditions.
2. Construct the discretized equations according to the nature (i.e. elliptic, parabolic and
hyperbolic) of the flow problem.
3. Solve the linear algebraic equations by direct and iterative methods.
4. Analyze and evaluate various finite volume based CFD schemes to solve convection-
diffusion problems.
5. Apply the variations of SIMPLE schemes for incompressible flows.
6. Select an appropriate model for turbulence flow and method for grid generation.

Text Books:
1. John D Anderson, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Tata-McGraw Hill Publisher, 1st
Edition, 1995.
2. K Muralidhar & T Sundararajan, “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”, Narosa
Book Distributors Pvt Ltd, 2nd Edition, 2009.
3. H K Versteeg& W Malalasekara, “Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The
Finite Volume Method”, Pearson Education (Indian Reprint), 2nd Edition, 2007.

References:
1. S V Patankar, “Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow”, Taylor & Francis, 1st Edition,
1980.
2. R H Pletcher, J C Tannehill& D A Anderson, “Computational Fluid Mechanics and Heat
Transfer”, CRC Press, 3rd Edition, 2012.

Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Term Tests and End Semester Examination.

Page 255 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech III Year II Semester

18MDME205 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

L T P C
0 0 4 2
Course Prerequisite: Thermal Engineering

Course Objectives:
1. To enable the students to do experimentation on heat transfer equipment and gain
practical knowledge about heat transfer in thermal systems
2. To give practical exposure to students on working and performance evaluation of fluid
machinery.
3. To give hands on training to students on .

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Overall heat transfer coefficient of composite slab apparatus
2. Heat transfer coefficient in transient heat conduction
3. Efficiency and effectiveness of a pin-fin
4. Emissivity of gray body
5. Experiment on critical heat flux apparatus
6. Performance test on parallel and counter flow heat exchanger
7. Performance test on Pelton wheel.
8. Performance test on Francis turbine.
9. Performance test on Kaplan turbine.
10. Performance Test on a 4 -Stroke Diesel Engines
11. Performance Test on 2-Stroke Petrol engine
12. Evaluation of Engine friction by conducting Morse test on 4-Stroke Multi cylinder
Engine
13. Retardation and motoring test on 4- stroke engine
14. Heat Balance of an I.C. Engine.
15. Performance Test on Reciprocating Air – Compressor Unit

Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Experimentally evaluate important parameters in heat transfer equipment.
2. Conduct performance tests on hydraulic turbines.
3. Conduct different types of performance tests on IC engines.
4. Conduct performance test on compressors.

Text Books:
Lab manual provided by the department

Mode of Evaluation: Continuous Internal Evaluation and End Semester Examination.

Page 256 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

B. Tech IV Year I Semester

18MDME125 DESIGN OF GAS TURBINE ENGINES


L T P C
2 1 0 3

Course Prerequisite: Basic Thermodynamics, Heat Transfer, Thermal Engineering

Course Description: Gas turbine is the heart of a jet propulsion system and also used to
develop shaft power for power generation. It is intended that the student learn the basic working
process of gas turbines when being used for thrust generation and also for shaft power
generation. Various parts of the gas turbine, namely, the compressor, turbine, combustion
chamber etc. are incorporated into the course and a detailed mathematical modelling of these
various accessories is part of the course. At the end of this course, the student will be equipped
with the tools necessary to analyse the gas turbine using practical and jet propulsion cycles and
also evaluate the performance of the compressors and axial turbines.

Course Objectives:
1. Introduce the student with the various types of cycles used for analysing gas turbines.
2. To make the student understand the working process of centrifugal and axial
compressors in a gas turbine.
3. To determine the performance of an axial flow turbine in a gas turbine
4. To introduce the combustion chamber, inlet and nozzle systems of a gas turbine.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION AND BASIC PRINCIPLES


Compressible flow machines, Energy transformation, Stagnation properties, Velocity of sound,
Streamline, Streamtube, Mach number, Mach angle and Mach cone, Streamtube area-velocity
relation, Normal shock wave, Oblique shock and expansion waves, flow with friction and heat
transfer, flow in constant-area duct with friction. Open and closed cycle arrangements, Ideal
cycle analysis, Simple gas turbine cycle, Heat exchange cycle, Reheat cycle, Reheat and Heat
exchange cycle, Intercooled cycle, Intercooled cycle with heat exchanger, Intercooled and
reheat cycle, Intercooled cycle with heat exchange and reheat, Ericsson cycle.
(9)

UNIT II: GAS TURBINE CYCLES


Practical cycles and their analysis, Stagnation properties, Compressor and Turbine efficiency,
Pressure or flow losses, Heat exchanger effectiveness, Effect of varying mass flow, Effect of
variable specific heat, Mechanical losses, Cycle efficiency, Polytropic efficiency, Performance
of actual cycle, Jet propulsion cycles, Ramjet engine, Pulsejet engine, Turboprop engine,
Turbojet engine, Thrust equation, Specific thrust of the turbojet engine, Efficiencies related to
Jet propulsion cycles, Thrust augmentation. (9)

UNIT III: COMPRESSORS


Centrifugal Compressor: Essential parts, principle of operation, Ideal energy transfer, Blade
shapes and velocity triangles, Analysis of flow through compressor, Diffuser, Volute casing,
Performance parameters, Losses in centrifugal compressors, Compressor characteristics,
Surging and Choking.

Page 257 of 258


Dept. of Mechanical Engineering

Axial Flow Compressors: Geometry and working principle, Stage velocity triangles, Work
done factor, Enthalpy-Entropy diagram, Compressor stage efficiency, Performance
coefficients, Degree of reaction, Flow through blade rows, Flow losses, Stage losses, Pressure
rise calculation in a blade ring, Performance characteristics, Comparison of axial flow
compressors. (9)

UNIT IV: TURBINES


Single impulse stage, Single reaction stage, Multistage machines, Velocity triangles of a single
stage machine, Expression for work output, Blade loading and flow coefficients, Blade and
Stage efficiencies, Maximum utilization factor for a single impulse stage, Velocity
compounding of multistage impulse turbine, Pressure compounding of multistage impulse
turbine, Reaction turbine, Multistage reaction turbines, Blade to gas speed ratio, Losses and
efficiencies, Performance graphs. (9)

UNIT V: COMBUSTION, NOZZLE & INLET SYSTEMS


Combustion theory applied to gas turbine combustor, Factors affecting combustion chamber
design, Factors affecting combustion chamber performance, Form of combustion system,
Requirements of the combustion chamber, Process of combustion in a gas turbine, Combustion
chamber geometry, Mixing and Dilution, Combustion chamber arrangements, Inlets, Subsonic
inlets, Diffuser, Supersonic inlets, Exhaust nozzles. (9)
Course Outcomes:
The students after completing the course will be able to:
1. Develop a relationship for the energy transfer in a turbomachine and understand the
concept of the degree of reaction.
2. Analyse the performance of practical gas turbine and jet propulsion cycles by taking
into account the various losses in different components.
3. Analyse the flow through the centrifugal and axial compressor from inlet to outlet and
also analyse the effect of impeller blade shape on the performance of centrifugal and
axial compressor.
4. Analyse the performance of a multi-stage pressure compounded axial reaction turbine
for various degree of reactions and draw the performance charts.
5. Evaluate the factors affecting the design of combustion chamber and also understand
the various inlet types and evaluate the nozzle performance

Text Books:

1. V. Ganesan, Gas Turbines, Tata McGraw Hill Co., 3rd edition, 2010.

References:
1. Ahmed F. El-Sayed, Aircraft Propulsion and Gas Turbine Engines, CRC Press
(Taylor & Francis Group)
2. Cohen and Rogers, Gas Turbines Theory, Wesley Longman, 1996.
3. J.F. Lee, Theory and design of stream and gas turbine, McGraw Hill, 1954.
4. R. Yadav, Steam & Gas Turbines and Power Plant Engineering, Central
Publishing House, 2004.
Mode of Evaluation: Assignments, Mid Examinations, End Semester Examination.

Page 258 of 258

You might also like